HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications CAG-18-240
CITY OF RENTON
PUBLIC WORKS SHOPS
SIGN SHOP EXPANSION
PROJECT LOCATION
3555 NE 2ND ST
RENTON , WA 98056
PROJ ECT MAN UAL
.
� �
V
a
•
DECEMBER 2018
WAGNER ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS
1916 Pike Place # 221
Seattle, Washington 98101
206-448-2528
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 00
City of Renton TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1 of 3
00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS - PROJECT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 1
Division 00—Procurement and Contracting Requirements
No. Title
00 00 00 Table of Contents
00 00 01 Instructions to Bidders
00 00 02 Advertisement for Bids
00 00 03 Bid Form
00 20 00 Bidder's Qualification Statement
00 42 10 Bid Submittal Checklist.............................................................................................................................
00 72 00 General Conditions for Construction
00 80 00 Forms:
Bid Bond Form
Contract Bond Form
Sample Agreement Form
Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes
Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form
Division 01 -General Requirements
No. Title
01 10 00 Summary of Work
01 11 30 Hazardous Materials
01 14 00 Work Restrictions
01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures
01 21 00 Prevailing Wage Rates
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements
01 32 16 Construction Schedule
01 40 00 Quality Requirements
014216 Definitions
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 56 00 TESC
01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage
01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements
01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
01 78 00 Closeout Submittals
Division 02-09 Architectural
No. Title
02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition
02 41 16 Building Demolition
03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
06 10 53 Rough Carpentry
06 20 00 Finish Carpentry
07 21 00 Insulation
07 25 00 Weather Resistive Barriers
07 46 40 Fiber Cement Siding
07 51 00 Built-Up Modified Asphalt Membrane Roofing
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
August 1, 2018 00 00 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 00
City of Renton TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2 of 3
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 36 13 Overhead Sectional Doors
08 51 13 Aluminum Windows
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 13 Resilient Base
09 91 00 Painting
Division 22 Plumbing
No. Title
22 00 00 Plumbing General Conditions
22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing
22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage
22 15 00 General Service Compressed Air Systems
Division 23 Mechanical
No. Title
23 00 00 HVAC General Conditions
23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 74 00 Outdoor Air-Handling Units
23 81 26 Split System Air-Conditioners & Heat Pumps
Division 26 Electrical
No. Title
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
26 05 19 600 Volt Wre and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding
26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes
26 05 45 Seismic Restraints for Raceways and Electrical Equipment
26 05 53 Electrical Identification Procedures
26 22 00 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers
26 24 13 Switchboards
26 24 16 Panelboards and Load Centers
26 27 26 Wring Devices
26 28 13 Fuses
26 28 19 Enclosed Switches
26 29 13 Motor Control
26 32 13 Standby Service
26 51 00 Interior Lighting Fixtures
26 56 00 Exterior Lighting Fixtures
Division 27 Communications
No. Title
27 00 00 Telephone and Data Raceway System
27 05 23 Cable Television System
August 1, 2018 00 00 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 00
City of Renton TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3 of 3
27 53 19 Antenna System
Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security
No. Title
28 13 00 Entry Access/CCTV System
28 31 00 Fire Alarm and Detection System
Division 31 Site
No. Title
31 10 00 Site Prep
31 12 00 Earthwork
31 41 33 Trench Safety
Division 32 Paving
No. Title
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
32 13 13 Concrete Paving
August 1, 2018 00 00 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 1 of 6
DOCUMENT 00 0001 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 0—INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.1 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
A. Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings,
specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing to the Owner/Architect/Engineer (O/A/E)
seven (7) calendar days before the bid due date. Oral explanations or instructions given before
the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective Bidder
concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective Bidders by
addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of
it would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders.
B. In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW the
City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms. However, no
preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of MWBE participation
shall be required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or
considered nonresponsive on that basis.
C.
D. The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Veteran-owned
businesses.http://www.dva.wa.qov/proqram/certified-veteran-and-servicemember-owned-
businesses and
1.2 PREPARATION OF BIDS—CONSTRUCTION
A. Bids must be: (1)submitted on the Bid Form, or copies of forms,furnished by the Owner or the
Owner's agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a bid must initial each change
appearing on any Bid Form. If the bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the
corporation's authorized designee. The address of the Bidder shall be typed or printed on the
Bid Form in the space provided.
B. The Bid Form may require Bidders to submit bid prices for one or more items on various bases,
including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate prices; (3) unit prices; or (4)any
combination of items 1 through 3 above.
C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items, failure to bid on the alternates may disqualify the
bid. If bidding on all items is not required, Bidders should insert the words"no bid" in the space
provided for any item on which no price is submitted.
D. Substitute bid forms will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes theirsubmission.
1.3 BID GUARANTEE
A. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive bid alternates is $35,000.00 or less, bid security
is not required.
B. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive alternates is greater than $35,000.00, a bid
guarantee in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount is required. Failure of the Bidder to
provide bid guarantee when required shall render the bid non-responsive.
C. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond or postal money order, or certified check or
000001 -1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 2 of 6
cashier's check made payable to the City of Renton Treasurer.
The Owner will return bid guarantees (other than bid bond)to unsuccessful Bidders as soon
as practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with the successful Bidder. The
successful Bidder's bid guarantee will be returned to the successful Bidderwith its official notice
to proceed with the work of the contract.
D. The Bidder will allow 60 days from bid opening date for acceptance of its bid by theOwner.
The Bidder will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond
waiver within 15 days after receipt of the contract. If the apparent successful Bidder fails to
sign all contractual documents or provide the bond and insurance as required or return the
documents within 15 days after receipt of the contract, the Owner may terminate the award of
the contract.
E. In the event a Bidder discovers an error in its bid following the bid opening, the Bidder may
request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions:
1. Written notification is received by the Owner within 24 hours following bid opening.
2. The Bidder provides written documentation of the claimed error to the satisfaction of the
Owner within 72 hours following the bid opening.
The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the bid in writing. If
the Bidder's request for withdrawal of its bid is approved, the Bidder will be released from
further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain
the Bidder's bid guarantee.
1.4 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS
The low Bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive Bidder offering the low aggregate
amount for the base bid item, plus additive or deductive bid alternates selected by the Owner,and
within funds available for the project.
The Bidder agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for sixty (60)days from date of bidopening.
1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda
numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in the
bid being declared non-responsive.
1.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK
The Bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of
the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which
can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to; (1)conditions bearing upon
transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2)the availability of labor, water,
electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical
conditions at the site; (4)the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5)the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the work. The Bidder also acknowledges
that it has satisfied itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials
or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an
inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings
00 00 01 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 3 of 6
and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the Bidder to take the actions
described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Bidder from responsibility for
estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work.
1.7 BID AMOUNTS
A. The bid prices shown for each item on the Bid Form shall include all labor, material, equipment,
overhead and compensation to complete all of the work for that item.
B. The Owner will obtain and pay for the general building permit for this project prior to project
Notice to Proceed. The Bidder is required to pay for the electrical permit.
C. The Bidder agrees to hold the base bid prices for sixty (60)days from date of bid opening.
1.8 TAXES
All bid amounts shall include Washington Sales Tax(WSST) based on the City of Renton rate
(currently 10%) entered on the appropriate location on the Bid Form. All other taxes imposed by
law shall be included in the bid amount. The Owner will include WSST in progress payments. The
Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and shall furnish proof of payment
to the Owner if requested.
[NOTE: Contractor must bond for contract amount plus the WSST.]
1.9 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A. Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids.
B. The Bid Form shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the
Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the outside:
1. The project number and description.
2. The name and address of the Bidder
3. Identification as Bid Form.
C. Prior to the bid opening, the Owner's representative will designate the official bid clock. Any
part of the Bid Form,or in the rare situation of a bid modification, not received prior to the times
specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the bid will be returned to
the Bidder unopened.
D. A bid may be withdrawn in person by a Bidder's authorized representative before the opening
ofthe bids. Bidder(s)representative will be required to show ID and sign on bid summarysheet
before it will be released.
E. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign language
interpreters, braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10)working days prior to the
scheduled bid opening.
1.10 BID RESULTS
After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain bid results from the Owner.
000001 -3
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 4 of 6
1.11 LOW RESPONSIBLE BIDDER
A. Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, a Bidder must
meet the following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350(1)to be considered
a responsible Bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The Bidder must:
1. At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter
18.27 RCW;
2. Have a current state unified business identifier number;
3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder's employees working in
Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as
required in Title 50 RCW; and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82
RCW;
4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or
39.12.065(3).
5. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not
have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by
the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of
limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any
provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW.
(Before award of a public works contract, a bidder shall submit to the contracting agency a
signed statement in accordance with RCW 9A.72.085 verifying under penalty of perjury
that the bidder is in compliance with the responsible bidder criteria requirements. A
contracting agency may award a contract in reasonable reliance upon such a sworn
statement.)
B. Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory Bidder responsibility, the
Owner has adopted relevant supplemental criteria for determining Bidder responsibility which
the Bidder must meet (RCW 39.04.350 (3)).
1. The Owner shall consider an overall accounting of the attached supplemental criteria for
determining Bidder responsibility"DIVISION 00 0400 SUPPLEMENTAL
RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA".
2. At least seven (7)days prior to the bid submittal deadline, a potential Bidder may request
that the Owner modify the supplemental responsibility criteria. The Owner will evaluate the
information submitted by the potential Bidder and respond before the bid submittal
deadline. If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an
addendum to the bidding documents identifying the new criteria.
3. Upon Owner's request, the apparent low Bidder must supply the requested responsibility
information within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or
failure to submit all the information requested within the time provided may render the bid
non-responsive
4. If the Owner determines that the apparent low Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will
00 00 01 -4
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 5 of 6
notify the Bidder of its preliminary determination in writing.
5. Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the Bidder may
withdraw its bid or request a hearing where the Bidder may appeal the preliminary
determination and present additional information to the Owner.
6. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the Bidder's
request.
7. The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the
hearing.
8. If the Owner determines a Bidder to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing,
the reasons for the determination. If the final determination affirms that the Bidder is not
responsible, the Owner will not execute a contract with any other Bidder until two (2)
business days after the Bidder determined to be not responsible has received the final
determination.
9. The Owner's Final Determination is specific to this project, and will have no effect on other
or future projects.
1.12 CONTRACT AWARD
A. The Owner will evaluate bid responsiveness and responsibility.
1. A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements:
a. It is received at the proper time and place.
b. It meets the stated requirements of the Bid Form.
c. It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the state of Washington at
the time of bid opening and is not banned from bidding by the Department ofLabor
and Industries.
d. It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, if required.
2. A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the following requirements:
a. It meets the mandatory responsibility criteria established in RCW 39.04.350 and an
overall accounting of the supplemental responsibility criteria established for the project
B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
C. The apparent low Bidder, for purpose of award,shall be the responsive and responsible Bidder
offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid plus selected additive or deductive bid
alternates and meeting all other bid submittal requirements.
1.13 DOCUMENTS(ATTACHED)
A. Advertisement for Bids
B. Bid Form
C. Supplemental Bidder Responsibility Criteria
D. General Conditions for Construction
E. Bonds - Bid and performance
F. Sample contract
000001 -5
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 01
City of Renton INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 6 of 6
G. Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes
H. Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form
Note: Payment Bond and Performance Bond are required. These forms will be provided
by the Owner.
000001 -6
Sign Shop Expansion 00 00 02
City of Renton Public Works Shops ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENTS 00 0002 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project:
TITLE: Sign Shop Expansion
ESTIMATED BASE BID COST RANGE: $500,000- $600,000
SUBMITTAL TIME/DATE/LOCATION: 3:00 PM, December 14, 2018
Office of the City Clerk
Seventh Floor, Renton City Hall
1055 Grady Way, Renton,WA, 98057
Public Bid Opening will commence at approximately 3:10
PM in Room 621, Sixth Floor.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE: 10:00 A.M. December 3, 2018 at the
Public Works Maintenance Division,
3555 NE 2nd St, Renton, WA, 98056
Meet at the flagpole.
Attendance at the pre-bid conference and site walk is
mandatory.
The work consists of constructing a 1,400 ft.2 addition onto an existing 2,000 ft.2 building. The addition is a
single-story building constructed with wood framing members. The work includes revisions to paved parking and
landscaping areas.
Bid documents will be available for download on November 29, 2018, at the following websites:
• City of Renton at http://rentonwa.qov/bids
• Builders Exchange of Washington, Inc. at http://www.bxwa.com.
• Daily Journal of Commerce Plan Center at http://plancenter.dic.com
Questions about the project shall be addressed to, Michael Nolan, City of Renton, Facilities Department, 1055
Grady Way, Suite 600, Renton, WA, 98057, phone 425-430-6608, fax 425-430-6603, email
mnolan(carentonwa.qov .
The City's fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are
applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the
most recent prevailing wage rates. The "Effective Date" for this project is the Bid Form due date above. The
applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor& Industries website located at
https://fortress.wa.qov/Ini/waqelookup/prvWaqelookup.aspx.
The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
THE CITY OF RENTON
Jason Seth, City Clerk
Published:
Daily Journal of Commerce November 29, 2018
Daily Journal of Commerce December 6, 2018
00 0002-1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 0003
City of Renton Public Works Shops BID FORM
Page 1 of 2
•
� �
�
•
CITY OF RENTON
MAIL TO: CITY CLERK 1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057
HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK
SEVENTH FLOOR, RENTON CITY HALL
1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057
BID FORM
In compliance with the contract documents, the following bid form is submitted:
1) BASE BID
1 a) BASE BI D:
�
(Written) (Numeric)
1 b) SALES TAX ON BASE BI D (The combined sa/es tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%):
�
(Written) (Numeric)
1 c) TOTAL BASE BID
�
(Written) (Numeric)
2) BID ALTERNATES
The undersigned proposes to perform work called for in the following alternates as indicated on the Contract
Documents for the following resulting additions and or deletions to the Basic Bid. The bidder agrees to hold the
following alternate bid prices for sixty(60)consecutive calendar days from the date designated for receipt of bids.
A.1. Base Bid for Alternate No. 1
Provide and install a new manual transfer switch at Building A.
ADD $
(Numeric)
A.2. Sales Tax on Alternate No. 1 (The combined sa/es tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%):
ADD $
(Numeric)
A.3. TOTAL FOR ALTERNATE No. 1: TOTAL ADD $
(Numeric)
00 0003-1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 0003
City of Renton Public Works Shops BID FORM
Page 2 of 2
B.1. Base Bid for Alternate No. 2
Convert an equipment room in Building B to a server room.
ADD $
(Numeric)
B.2. Sales Tax on Alternate No. 2, (The combined sa/es tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%):
ADD $
(Numeric)
B.3. TOTAL FOR ALTERNATE No. 2: TOTAL ADD $
(Numeric)
TIME FOR COMPLETION:
Contract Time - The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the work under the Base
Bid (and accepted Alternates) within 120 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed.
Final Completion — All the Work shall be fully and finally completed in accordance with the contract
documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of$500 for each consecutive
calendar day that is in default after the Contract Time. Liquidated damages shall be deducted from the
contract invoice after taxes and retainage.
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA
Receipt of the following addenda is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Name of Firm
NOTE: If eidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation;if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below.
Signed by Official Capacity
Print Name
Address
City State Zip Code
Date Telephone FAX
State of Washington Contractor's License No.
Federal Tax ID # E-mail address:
Employment Security Department No.
00 0003-2
Sign Shop Expansion 00 20 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
Page 1 of 2
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
Each Contractor bidding on work included in these Contract Documents shall prepare and submit the
following data:
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Business Address:
3. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm
name?
4. Contracts now in hand. Number of Contracts:
Total Gross Amount$
5. Contracts not completed. Gross Amount$
6. General character of work performed by firm:
7. List at least two and up to four projects of a similar nature which have been completed by the
Contractor within the last ten years. List the client, the year the project was completed, and the
gross dollar amount of each project:
Gross Dollar Year
Amount Project Name, Client Name and Phone Number Completed
$
$
$
$
8. Identify the proposed superintendent for this project.
Name of Superintendent
Reference Phone Number
List 2 similar ro�ects with reference and hone number
Page 1 of 2
Sign Shop Expansion 00 20 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
Page 2 of 2
10. Have you changed bonding companies within the last three years?
If so, why?
12. Within the last five years, have you been sued by the client or have you ever sued the client or
been a party to a suit on any public works contract for a special district, school district,
municipality, county or state government?
Describe the nature of the suit.
Disposition of case, if settled:
Failure to complete this section in full shall be considered prounds for reiection. Provide
additional paqes if necessarv.
13. Within the last five years, have you ever not completed a contract, or been replaced on a
contract, for any public works contract for a special district, school district, municipality, cou nty or
state government?
Describe the nature of problem.
Disposition of the problem if settled.
Failure to complete this section in full shall be considered prounds for reiection. Provide
additional qaaes if necessarv.
14. Bank references:
Company
Authorized Signature:
Title:
**END OF SECTION 00 20 00 00**
Page 2 of 2
Sign Shop Expansion
004210
City of Renton Public Works Shops BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST
Page 1 of 1
BID SUBMITTAL CHECK LIST
FORMS
Forms which must be submitted as a complete bid proposal are listed here:
1. Section 00 00 03 - BID FORM
2. Section 00 20 00 - BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION'S STATEMENT
3. Section 00 80 00 1 - BID BOND
4. Section 00 80 00 4 -CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE PAYMENT
STATUTES
3. Section 00 80 00 5 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
(Items 1-10 are to be completed prior to bid)
1. Have you included costs for each item in the Bid Form?
2. Has Bid Bond or Certified Check been enclosed with your Bid?
3. Is the amount of the bid guarantee at least 5% of the total amount of the Bid?
4. Has the proposal been properly signed?
5. Do written amounts of the bid proposal agree with amounts shown in figures?
6. Have you completed the Statement of Bidder's Qualifications?
7. Have you certified receipt of addenda?
8. Have you completed the Deposit or Bid Bond Form - Deposit Statement?
9. Are all of the Bid Forms included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope?
**END OF SECTION**
00 0002
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 1 of 48
DOCUMENT 00 7200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONTENTS
Section Descrintion
Paae
PART 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 Definitions................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Order of Precedence................................................................................... 4
1.3 Execution and Intent................................................................................... 5
PART 2-INSURANCE AND BONDS
2.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance...................................................................... 5
2.2 Coverage Limits......................................................................................... 6
2.3 Insurance Coverage Certificates.................................................................... 6
2.4 Payment and Performance Bonds.................................................................. 6
2.5 Alternative Surety....................................................................................... 7
2.6 Builders Risk............................................................................................. 7
PART 3-TIME AND SCHEDULE
3.1 Progress and Completion............................................................................. 8
3.2 Construction Schedule................................................................................. 8
3.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work for Convenience......................................... 8
3.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work for Cause....................................................... 9
3.5 Delay....................................................................................................... 9
3.6 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes................................................................. 10
3.7 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely Completion........................................... 10
PART 4-SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
4.1 Discrepancies and Contract Document Review................................................. 11
4.2 Project Record........................................................................................... 11
4.3 Shop Drawings........................................................................................... 11
4.4 Organization of Specifications........................................................................ 12
4.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications &other pocuments...................... 12
PART 5-PERFORMANCE
5.1 Contractor Control and Supervision................................................................ 13
5.2 Permits, Fees and Notices............................................................................ 14
5.3 Patents and Royalties.................................................................................. 14
5.4 Prevailing Wages........................................................................................ 14
5.5 Hours of Labor........................................................................................... 15
5.6 Nondiscrimination....................................................................................... 15
5.7 Safety Precautions...................................................................................... 16
5.8 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage Areas............................................. 17
5.9 Prior Notice of Excavation............................................................................. 18
5.10 Unforeseen Physical Conditions..................................................................... 18
5.11 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, Vegetation, Utilities, & Improvements. 18
5.12 Layout of Work........................................................................................... 19
5.13 Material and Equipment................................................................................ 19
5.14 Availability and Use of Utility Services............................................................. 19
00 7200-1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 2 of 48
5.15 Tests and Inspections.................................................................................. 19
5.16 Correction of Nonconforming Work................................................................. 20
5.17 Clean Up................................................................................................... 21
5.18 Access to Work.......................................................................................... 21
5.19 Other Contracts.......................................................................................... 21
5.20 Subcontractors and Suppliers........................................................................ 21
5.21 Warranty of Construction.............................................................................. 23
5.22 Indemnification........................................................................................... 23
PART 6- PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.1 Contract Sum............................................................................................. 24
6.2 Schedule ofValues..................................................................................... 24
6.3 Application for Payment................................................................................ 24
6.4 Progress Payments..................................................................................... 25
6.5 Payments Withheld..................................................................................... 25
6.6 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights.................................................................. 26
6.7 Substantial Completion................................................................................. 26
6.8 Prior Occupancy......................................................................................... 26
6.9 Final Completion, Acceptance, and Payment.................................................... 26
PART 7-CHANGES
7.1 Change in the Work.................................................................................... 26
7.2 Change in the Contract Sum......................................................................... 28
7.3 Change in the Contract Time......................................................................... 33
PART 8-CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
8.1 Claims Procedure....................................................................................... 35
8.2 Arbitration................................................................................................. 36
8.3 Claims Audits............................................................................................. 36
PART 9-TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.1 Termination by Owner for Cause.................................................................... 38
9.2 Termination by Owner for Convenience........................................................... 39
PART 10- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.1 Governing Law........................................................................................... 39
10.2 Successors and Assigns.............................................................................. 40
10.3 Meaning of Words....................................................................................... 40
10.4 Rights and Remedies................................................................................... 40
10.5 Contractor Registration................................................................................. 40
10.6 Time Computations..................................................................................... 40
10.7 Records Retention....................................................................................... 40
10.8 Third-Party Agreements............................................................................... 41
10.9 AntitrustAssignments.................................................................................. 41
10.10 Headings and Captions................................................................................ 41
PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 DEFINITIONS
00 7200-2
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 3 of 48
A. "Application for Pavment" means a written request submitted by Contractor to A/E for payment of
Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values,
supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E mayrequire.
B. "Architect," "Enqineer," or"A/E" means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture
or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority.
C. "Chanqe Order" means a written instrument signed by Owner and Contractor stating their
agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2)the amount of the adjustment in
the Contract Sum, if any, and (3)the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, ifany.
D. "Claim" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the
terms of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part 8.
E. "Contract Award Amount" is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates.
F. "Contract Documents" means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid
Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions,
Public Works Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and
modifications thereof.
G. "Contract Sum" is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance of the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly
chargeable to the Work, except Washington State sales tax.
H. "Contract Time" is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving
Substantial Completion of the Work.
I. "Contractor" means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
J. "Da s : Unless otherwise specified, day(s)shall mean calendarday(s)."
K. "Drawinqs" are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details,
schedules, and diagrams.
L. "Final Acceptance" means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after Contractor
has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section
6.09 B.
M. "Final Completion" means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the
Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.09 A.
N. "Force Maieure" means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3.05A.
O. "Notice" means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member
of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or
sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice.
00 7200-3
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 4 of 48
P. "Notice to Proceed" means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the
Contract Time begins.
Q. "Owner" means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative with the authority to enter
into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and
make related determinations and findings.
R. "Person" means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or
individual.
S. "Prior Occupancv" means Owner's use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial
Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.08 A.
T. "Proqress Schedule" means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further
set forth in Section 3.02.
U. "Proiect" means the total construction ofwhich the Work performed in accordance with the
Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or
by separate contractors.
V. "Proiect Manual" means the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
requirements, sample forms, and other Contract Documents.
W.
"Proiect Manaper" means the Owners designated manager for the project with authority to direct
the Contractor and to approve or disapprove the Work.
X. "Proiect Record" means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in
paragraph 4.02A.
Y. "Schedule of Values" means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each
principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner.
Z. "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements
for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services.
AA. "Subcontract" means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work.
BB. "Subcontractor" means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the Work.
AA. "Substantial Completion" means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is
sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.07.
AB. "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes,
but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture
and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents
00 7200-4
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 5 of 48
precedence in the following order:
1. Change Orders
2. Owner Issued Clarifications
3. Signed Public Works Contract
4. Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions
5. Project Manual--provisions in Division 0 shall take precedence over provisions of any
other Division.
6. Project Manual--provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over subsequent
divisions.
7. Drawings--in case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take
precedence over small scale drawings.
8. Technical Specifications
9. Signed and Completed Bid Form.
10. Instructions to Bidders.
11. Advertisement for Bids.
1.3 EXECUTION AND INTENT
Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner:
1. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the
Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract
Documents;
2. Contractor familiar with proiect: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited
and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be
performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the
Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be
furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and
subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect
performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof;
3. Contractor financiallv capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they
mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform Contractor's
obligations required by the Contract Documents; and
4. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies,
equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the
Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so.
PART 2 — INSURANCE AND BONDS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all
the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner
that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor's insurance by Owner shall not
00 7200-5
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 6 of 48
relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by
this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines
Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond
costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers
providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner.
A. Term of insurance coverape: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage
during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional
Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years.
Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any
corrective Work required by Section 5.16.
1. Commercial General Liabilitv Insurance: Commercial General Liability(CGL)on an
Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Completed operations/products liability;
b. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed;
and
c. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington.
2. Commercial Automobile Liabilitv Insurance: Required if a commercial vehicle will be used
in performance of work or delivery of products by the contractor, beyond normal commutes.
3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architect, engineering,
surveying, legal, or medical)are being provided to the Owner and if those professional
services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if
coverage is maintain at least 3-years beyond the conclusion of work.
4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability
coverage limits.
5. Builders Risk—When applicable to the work being performed, is required up to the amount
of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance
provisions. See section 2.6.
6. Pollution Liability— Required if work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage
may be included in other required policies.
B. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers' Compensation): Contractor shall comply with the
Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen's and
Harbor Workers'Act and the Jones Act.
C. Insurance to protect for the followina: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for
damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which
may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by
Contractor or any Subcontractor.
D. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton as a Primary and Non-contributory
Additional Insured on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability,
Excess/Umbrella, when applicable).
E. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk
Manager or with Risk Manager approval.
00 7200-6
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 7 of 48
2.2 COVERAGE LIMITS
Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be as follows for applicable required
insurance:
A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including
Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual
Aggregate
B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability,
Each Accident or Loss.
C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability.
D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability.
E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or limits are
adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities.
2.3 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES
A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a
completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance
coverage.
B. List Proiect info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder. The
certificate holder should read:
City of Renton
ATTN: Gary Lamb
1055 South Grady Way
Renton, WA. 98057
C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy
cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the policy
holder.
2.4 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS
Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100%of the Contract Award Amount,
plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form
provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders,
increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new
payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment
and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide
additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or
more. No payment or performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is $35,000 or less and
Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the
period allowed by RCW 39.08.010.
2.5 ALTERNATIVE SURETY
When alternative suretv required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance
bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or
materials required by the Contract Documents if:
00 7200-7
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 8 of 48
A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety;or
B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required by Owner.
2.6 BUILDER'S RISK
A. Contractor to buv Builders Risk Insurance:, Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders
Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on
a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. The insurance shall cover the interest
of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear.
B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an "all risk" basis and insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft,
vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal
including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and
shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E's services and expenses required as a result of
an insured loss.
C. Waiver of subroqation riqhts: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each
other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E's sub-consultants, separate contractors described in
Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for damages caused by fire or other perils
to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property
insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such
insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation
by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity
even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual
or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the
person or entity had an insurable interest in the propertydamaged.
PART 3 - TIME AND SCHEDULE
3.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces,
achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within a
reasonable period thereafter.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Preliminary Proqress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within
14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The
Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work,
and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including
dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment.
1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid
Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested
by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion
Date.
2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract
00 7200-8
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 9 of 48
Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be
shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work
and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this
Float Time. It belongs to the project.
3 Form of Propress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule
shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as specified by Owner. The
preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions of the Work, with a
more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed byOwner.
4 Owner comments on Proqress Schedule: Owner shall return comments on the preliminary
Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor's
schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor's construction means,
methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor
shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress
payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this
section.
5 Monthlv updates and compliance with Proqress Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply
with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor
shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual
progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress
Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.05, Contractor
shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities
into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a
corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the
Work.
6 Contractor to notifv Owner of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any
actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or
performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected
duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action
being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor
of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time.
3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE
A. Owner mav suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to
suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually
agreed.
B. Compliance with suspension; Owner's options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the
Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to
minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a
period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that
period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either:
1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work;or
2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of
Part 9.
C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the
00 7200-9
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 10 of 48
notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work.
D. Equitable Adiustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance
directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements
set forth in Part 7.
3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE
A. Owner mav stop Work for Contractor's failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform
its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in
writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been
taken.
B. No Equitable Adiustment for Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of
performance attributable to Contractor's failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable
remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure.
3.5 DELAY
A. Force Maieure actions not a default; Force Maieure defined: Any delay in or failure of
performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a
default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was
unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party ("Force Majeure"). Acts of Force Majeure
include, but are not limited to:
1. Acts of God or the public enemy;
2. Acts or omissions of any government entity;
3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible;
4. Quarantine or epidemic;
5. Strike or defensive lockout;
6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated;
and
7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and
for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available.
B. Contract Time adiustment for Force Maieure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an
act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section
7.03. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act
of Force Majeure.
C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adiustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Time, and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in
Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or
negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request according to Sections 7.02 and
00 7200-10
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 11 of 48
7.03.
D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adiustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be
entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of
performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose
acts Contractor is responsible.
E. Contract Time adiustment onlv for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of
performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled
to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that
was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to
Section 7.03, but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum.
F. Contractor to mitipate delav impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and
mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure orotherwise.
3.6 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES
A. Contractor to notifv Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or
potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information,
to Owner.
B. Pass throuah notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in
its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-subcontracts, that in the event timely
performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential
labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier
Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the
dispute.
3.7 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION
A. Liquidated Damaqes
1. Reason for Liquidated Damaqes: Timely performance and completion of the Work is
essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence.
Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work
does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible
to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated
damages are included in the Contract Documents.
2. Calculation of Liquidated Damaqes amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in
the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for
breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and
between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty
of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain.
This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the
Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the
Contractor.
3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damapes assessed: Assessment of liquidated
damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to
00 7200-11
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 12 of 48
the Contract Documents.
B. Actual Damaaes
Calculation of Actual Damaaes: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final
Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct
architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when
Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is
actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these
costs against any payment due Contractor.
PART 4 - SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
4.1 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW
A. Specifications and Drawinas are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings
is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and
supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and
other provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementarv: The Contract Documents are
complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if
required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or
shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown
or mentioned in both.
C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If,
during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in
the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby,
report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner in writing.
D. Contractor knowledae of discrepancv in documents —responsibilitv: Contractor shall do no Work
without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where
required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If Contractor performs any construction
activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents
contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the
performance and shall bear the cost for its correction.
E. Contractor to perform Work implied bv Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or
materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract
Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically.
F. Interpretation questions referred to Owner: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements
of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner.
4.2 PROJECT RECORD
A. Contractor to maintain Proiect Record Drawinqs and Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark
in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including
00 7200-12
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 13 of 48
horizontal and vertical locations of sub-structural materials referenced to permanent visible and
accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers,
manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals
(COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the "Project Record."
B. Update Proiect Record weeklv and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the
project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled "PROJECT RECORD." The
Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to
Owner at all times.
C. Final Proiect Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed
and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance
4.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Definition of Shop Drawinps: "Shop Drawings" means documents and other information required
to be submitted to Owner by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail:
the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit,
and attachment details)of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited
to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules,
performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in
detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and
equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the
manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity,
nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own
expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
B. Approval of Shop Drawinps bv Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop
Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract
Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review.
Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed
by the City of Renton. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor's approval
shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings
with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the
activities of Owner or separate contractors. Contractor's submittal schedule shall allow a
reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the
Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of
Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or
taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable
promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.
Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be
returned without action.
C. Contractor not relieved of responsibilitv when Shop Drawinqs approved: Approval, or other
appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by
A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during
construction, or constitute an approval of Contractor's means or methods of construction. If
Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently
rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs ofcorrection.
00 7200-13
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 14 of 48
D. Variations between Shop Drawinps and Contract Documents: If Shop Drawings show variations
from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in
writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing
such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued.
If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the
Project Record.
E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawinas: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1,
Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless
otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor.
4.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
Specification oraanization bv trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally to
trade practices. These sections are for Owner and Contractor convenience and shall not control
Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be
performed by any trade.
4.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS. SPECIFICATIONS. AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
A. The Citv/Owner not Contractor, owns Copvriaht of Drawinqs and Specifications: The Drawings,
Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E's contracted service
to the City through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor
nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other
documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any
rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the
copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor's set, shall be returned or suitably
accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work.
B. Drawinas and Specifications to be used onlv for this Proiect: The Drawings, Specifications, and
other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use
solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on
other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific
written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license
to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents
prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work.
C. Shop Drawina license pranted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non-exclusive
license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including
reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein,
prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all
Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop
Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property
right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in
Section 5.03 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising
out of Owner's use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor's own
cost, licenses in conformity with this section.
D. Shop Drawinas to be used onlv for this Proiect: The Shop Drawings and other submittals
prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers,
and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They
are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment
00 7200-14
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 15 of 48
supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without
the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or
equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the
Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work
under the Contract Documents.
PART 5 - PERFORMANCE
5.1 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and
direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful
manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work,
unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.
Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner.
B. Competent Superintendent required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a
competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor. The superintendent must be
satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner.
Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if
Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable,
provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for
transition.
C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and aqents: Contractor shall be responsible
to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents.
D. Contractor to emplov competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict
discipline and good order among all of the Contractor's employees and other persons performing
the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to
them. Contractor's employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair,
equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request
Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems
incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.
E. Contractor to keep proiect documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of
the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit
drawings.
F. Contractor to complv with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s)and
employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW
42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in
any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall
remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors' employees, if they are in
violation of this act.
5.2 PERMITS. FEES. AND NOTICES
A. Permits: Owner will obtain and pay for the Land Use Permit, General Building Permit, Civil
00 7200-15
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 16 of 48
Construction Permit and Signage permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the work
shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed
permits shall be delivered to Owner.
B. Contractor to complv with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices
required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of
public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
5.3 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES
Pavment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license
fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and
liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual
property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall
not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason
to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or
copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement
5.4 PREVAILING WAGES
A. Contractor to pav Prevailinq Waaes: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all
workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in
accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and
Industries. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is
determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. The State of
Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in King
County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and
Industries: http://www.lni.wa.qov/TradesLicensinq/PrevWaqe/WaqeRates. Based upon the bid
submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this
project is April 26, 2018.
B. Statement of Intent to Pav Prevailinp Waaes: Before payment is made by the Owner to the
Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included
in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to
the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the
Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each
classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and
Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate.
C. Affidavit of Waaes Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner
an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the
Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project.
D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director
of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive
and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060.
E. Statement with pav application; Post Statements of Intent at iob site: Each Application for
Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance
with the pre-filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s)
shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial
Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning
00 7200-16
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 17 of 48
prevailing wages may be made.
F. Contractor to pav for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296-127
WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established
fee(s)for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of
Labor and Industries forcertification.
G. Certified Pavrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall
submit a certified copy of payroll records if requested.
5.5 HOURS OF LABOR
A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are
incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic
employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do
the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in
any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life
or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time
employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half
times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours ofservice.
B. 4-10 Apreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or
subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement
with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such
agreement may provide that the employees work ten-hour days for more than four calendar days
a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions
of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any
such agreement.
5.6 NONDISCRIMINATION
A. Discrimination prohibited bv applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply
with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City
of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the
grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status,
honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be
denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or
activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement.
B. Durinp performance of the Work:
1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant
for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or
the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or
disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW 49.60.
2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be
considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability.
3. Contractor to notifv unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each
00 7200-17
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 18 of 48
labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a
collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the
labor union, employment agency, or workers' representative of Contractor's obligations
according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60.
4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its
books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington
State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain
compliance with this section of the Contract Documents.
5. Pass throuqh provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this
section in every Subcontract.
5.7 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of
employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and
equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractorshall:
1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and
provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard
analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor
shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner's representative prior to the initial
scheduled construction meeting.
2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the
appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades,
signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators,
shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles,
construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local
laws and regulations.
3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline
Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations
dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public
natural resources.
4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction
site.
B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for
ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed
as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions relating to employees,
public, or agents of the Contractors.
C. Contractor safetv responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and
other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and
equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or
adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations,
and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or
to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary
safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property
00 7200-18
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 19 of 48
and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them.
D. Contractor to maintain safetv records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure
data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupationaldisease,
or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report
any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of
exposure.
E. Contractor to provide HazMat traininp: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project
site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial
assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area.
1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of:
a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health
Standards;
b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where
hazardous chemicals are present; and
c. Hazard communications proqram: The location and availability of written hazard
communication programs, including the required list(s)of hazardous chemicals
and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC.
2. Trainin . At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the
Project site which includes:
a. Detectinp hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to
detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such
as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual
appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released,etc.);
b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the
work area;
c. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect
themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its
Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site
from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices,
emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and
d. Hazard communications proaram: The details of the hazard communications
program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation
of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees
can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.
F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or
harmful substances shall include the following duties:
1. Illeaal use of danqerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport,
generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter
designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or
harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter
00 7200-19
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 20 of 48
collectively referred to as "hazardous substances"), in violation of any such law,
regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be
stored more than 90 Days on the Project site.
2. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly
notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise
required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor
shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law,
regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity
concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup
actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the
Project site.
G. Public safetv and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public.
Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or
inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor's
responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be
borne by Contractor.
H. Contractor to act in an emerpencv: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of
adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss
or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized orinstructed.
I. No dutv of safetv bv Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as
imposing any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied
assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety
conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the
public.
5.8 OPERATIONS. MATERIAL HANDLING. AND STORAGE AREAS
A. Limited storape areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to
Owner-approved areas.
B. Temporary buildinqs and utilities at Contractor expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage
sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner
and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by
Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work.
C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways
authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not
be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or
prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation.
D. Ownership and reqortina bv Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all
materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor
shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or
severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a
copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or
applicable law.
E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on-site: Contractor shall be
00 7200-20
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 21 of 48
responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the
Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval
of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall
be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use.
F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equiqment: Contractor shall protect and be
responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of
Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss
that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor
shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or
equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to
Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused
by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor.
5.9 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at
the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially
from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual
nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as
inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then
Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the
first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice.
B. Adiustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a
change in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the
Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or
both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7.
5.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES. EQUIPMENT.VEGETATION. UTILITIES AND
IMPROVEMENTS
A. Contractor to protect and repair qropertv: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing
structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site.
Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor
fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed
and charge the cost to Contractor.
5.11 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. Advanced planninp of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of
operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision.
B. Lavout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines and
bench marks indicated on the Drawings, and shall be responsible for all field measurements
about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms,
equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall
be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established.
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks
established.
5.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
00 7200-21
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 22 of 48
A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and
articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose
intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the
Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or
catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed
as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or
process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless
otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor responsible for fittinp parts topether: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching
that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly, or receive or be received by
work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or
alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance by Owner.
C. Owner mav reiect defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not
in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be
rejected by Owner.
5.13 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
A. Owner to provide and charpe for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to
Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost
to the Contractor.
5.14 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Contractor to provide for all testina and inspection of Work: Contractor shall maintain an
adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are
necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection and quality surveillance of all its
Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor
shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent
testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and
shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. Contractor shall give Owner
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall
maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner.
B. Owner mav conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such
inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that
the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are
expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner
and do not:
1. Constitute or imply acceptance;
2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;
3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or
equipment;
00 7200-22
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 23 of 48
4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents; or
5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any
other remedy to which it may be entitled.
C. Inspections or inspectors do not modifv Contract Documents: Neither observations by an
inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor
inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the
Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the
Contract Documents.
D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional
charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe
and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge
Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time
specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or
retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no
undue delay in the Work.
5.15 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK
A. Work covered bv Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the
requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered
for Owner's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense and without change in the
Contract Time.
B. Pavment provisions for uncoverina covered Work: If, at any time prior to Final Completion,
Owner desires to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner may
request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance
with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract
Sum for the costs of uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby
delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in
Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay
the costs of examination and reconstruction.
C. Contractor to correct and pav for non-conformina Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work
found by Owner not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether
observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed,
or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including
additional testing and inspections.
D. Contractor's compliance with warrantv provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for
commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.08, or within the terms of
any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to
be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so. Owner shall give such notice
promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect
to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between
Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor's duty to correct with
respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or
replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance.
00 7200-23
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 24 of 48
E. Contractor to remove non-conforminp Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site
portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner.
F. Owner mav charqe Contractor for non-conformina Work: If Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace,
correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor.
G. Contractor to pav for damaaed Work durina correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of
correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by
Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed
to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have
according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described
in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has
no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract
Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may
be commenced.
I. Owner mav accept non-conforminq Work and charpe Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so
instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced
as appropriate and equitable.
5.16 CLEAN UP
Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site,
including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste
materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools,
scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site
in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided
herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged
to Contractor.
5.17 ACCESS TO WORK
Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in
progress wherever located.
5.18 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
A. Subcontractor Responsibilitv: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in
each of its first-tier subcontracts, and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same
language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used
for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide
documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor
responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors
regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its
first-tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibilitycriteria:
00 7200-24
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 25 of 48
1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27
RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal;
2. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier(UBI)number;
3. If applicable, have:
a. Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the subcontractor's
employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW;
b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50
RCW;
c. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as
required in Title 82 RCW;
d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW;
4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or
39.12.065 (3).
5. On a project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not
have been found out of compliance by the Washington state apprenticeship and training
council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside
their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under
chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year period immediately preceding the date of the
Owner's first advertisement of the project.
6. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not
have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by
the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of
limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any
provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW.
B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application
for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of$2,500.
Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any
Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection, and shall obtain
Owner's written consent before making any substitutions oradditions.
C. Subcontracts in writinp and pass throuqh provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By
appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable
to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the
Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities
which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each
Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting
thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this
paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its
Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds.
00 7200-25
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 26 of 48
D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule,
supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the
Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents.
E. Automatic assipnment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is
hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that:
1. Effective onlv after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only
after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.01 and only for those
Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing;and
2. Owner assumes Contractor's responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner
will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor
assumed in the Subcontract.
3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,
obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5.19 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Contractor warrantv of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the
Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or
workmanship performed by Contractor.
B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed
or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall:
1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial
practice;
2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the
benefit of Owner;
3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by
Owner; and
4. Contractor responsibilitv for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any
subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranties should they extend beyond the
period specified in the Contract Documents.
C. Warranties bevond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final
Acceptance.
5.22 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Renton, its elected officials, officers, agents,
employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the
same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising
from injury or death to persons, including injuries, sickness, disease or death of Contractor's own
employees, agents and volunteers, or damage to property caused by Contractor's negligent act or omission,
except for those acts caused by or resulting from a negligent act or omission by Renton and its officers,
00 7200-26
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 27 of 48
agents, employees and volunteers.
Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an
infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest,
including copyright, trademark, and trade secret.
Should a court of competentjurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115,
(Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration,
improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate...) then, in the event of liability for
damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the
concurrent negligence of the contractor and Renton, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers,
Contractor's liability shall be only to the extent of Contractor's negligence.
It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement
constitute Contractor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the
purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The
provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement.
PART 6 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.1 CONTRACT SUM
Owner shall pav Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for
performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
6.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor
shall submit to Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal
category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner("Schedule of Values"). The approved Schedule
of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any
other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner as the basis for progress payments.
Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of
Values.
6.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Monthlv Application for Pavment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined
otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for
Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of
Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner may require.
B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is
certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW
60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting
an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section
1.03, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the Application
for Payment.
C. Reconciliation of Work with Proqress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for
Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress
of the Work with the Progress Schedule.
00 7200-27
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 28 of 48
D. Pavment for material delivered to site or stored off-site: If authorized by Owner, the Application
for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and
suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for
material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory
evidence of the following:
1. Suitable facilitv or location: The material will be placed in a facility or location that is
structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored;
2. Facilitv or location within 10 miles of Proiect: The facility or location is located within a 10-
mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by
Owner;
3. Facilitv or location exclusive to Proiect's materials: Only materials for the Project are
stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside
for the Project);
4. Insurance provided on materials in facilitv or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a
certificate of insurance extending Contractor's insurance coverage for damage, fire, and
theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit;
5. Facilitv or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is
continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor's authorized personnel shall have
access;
6. Owner riqht of access to facilitv or location: Owner shall have the right of access in
company of Contractor;
7. Contractor assumes total responsibilitv for stored materials: Contractor and its surety
assume total responsibility for the stored materials; and
8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor
furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other
information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials
are moved from storage to the Project site.
6.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Owner to pav within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner
determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for
Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application
for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Withholdinq retainaae; Options for retainaae: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each
progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by
law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the
retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved
be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in
escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in
escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an
appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds.
C. Title passes to Owner upon pavment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress
payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims,
00 7200-28
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 29 of 48
security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from
any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to
insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents.
D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW.
6.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD
A. Owner's riqht to withhold pavment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently
discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be
necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to:
1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents;
2. Remaininp Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work
required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum;
3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or
complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16;
4. Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor's failure to perform in accordance with the
Contract Documents; or
5. Contractor's neqliqent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the
result of Contractor's fault or negligent acts oromissions.
B. Owner to notifv Contractor of withholdinq for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part
or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify
Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW.
6.6 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS
Chaqters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated bv reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW,
concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and
payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully
set forth herein.
6.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or
portion thereof designated and approved by Owner)when the construction is sufficiently complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the
facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner)for the use for which it is intended. All
Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall
not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and
operating normally, if all required occupancy permits have not been issued, or if the Work is not
accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved
shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion
which must be approved by Change Order. Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof
does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved.
00 7200-29
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 30 of 48
6.8 PRIOR OCCUPANCY
A. Prior Occupancv defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor,
take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work ("Prior
Occupancy") at anytime priorto Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the
time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance,
bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the
obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial
termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims.
B. Damaqe; Dutv to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph,
Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy.
Contractor's one-year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems
activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.
6.9 FINAL COMPLETION. ACCEPTANCE. AND PAYMENT
A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved
shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which
is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action.
B. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has
completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved
shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition
to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any
outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the
amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release
Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and
performance bonds, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor's
failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Final pavment waives Claim riphts: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any
Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any
such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act
or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims made in
accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8.
PART 7 -CHANGES
7.1 CHANGE IN THE WORK
A. Chanpes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time bv Chanqe Order: Owner may, at any time
and without notice to Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in
the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through
the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an
increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be
made as provided in Section 7.02 or 7.03, respectively, and such adjustment(s)shall be
incorporated into a Change Order.
00 7200-30
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 31 of 48
B. Owner mav request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may
request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a
Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as
mutually agreed. Contractor's Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for
implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the
Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or
productivity occasioned by the change in the Work.
C. COP neaotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.02 and 7.03,
Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable
terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct
Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed
with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner's approval. All Work done pursuant to
any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
D. Chanpe Order as full pavment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on
the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall
constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and
consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of
efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or
related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment.
E. Failure to aqree upon terms of Chanqe Order; Final offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor
are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment
in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer
from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written response within 30 Days of
Contractor's request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If
Contractor rejects Owner's final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement,
Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8.
F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work
through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order)when the time required to
price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project.
The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following:
1. The scope of work
2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount
3. Any estimated change to the ContractTime
4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of
the General Conditions
5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7
of the General Conditions
Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data,
a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field
00 7200-31
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 32 of 48
Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order.
7.2 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM
A. General Aaalication
1. Contract Sum chanqes onlv bv Chanpe Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed
by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract
Sum in its Change Order Proposal.
2. Owner fault or nealiaence as basis for chanpe in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor's
performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose
acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change
in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor's changed cost of
performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts
Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner;
or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.05.
(a) Notice and record keepina for equitable adiustment: A request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner
within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes
of this part, "occurrence" means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent prosecution
of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor
believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall
immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and
specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and,
if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner.
(b) Content of notice for equitable adiustment; Failure to complv: Contractor shall not
be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or
costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor's written notice to Owner.
The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving
rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the
impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent
possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to
properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's interests are
prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment.
(c) Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence
of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an
additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall
supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above
with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum:
the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure
set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only
that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were
actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract
Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such
act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an
informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation
relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate
the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.03C. Failure to provide
00 7200-32
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 33 of 48
such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the
format required shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a
waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment.
(d) Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request
made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work.
(e) Contractor to combine requests for same event toqether: Any requests by
Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time
that arise out of the same event(s)shall be submitted together.
3. Methods for calculatinq Chanpe Order amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined
by one of the following methods:
a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.02B.
b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as
determined in paragraph 7.02C.
c. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph
7.02D.
4. Fixed price method is default; Owner mav direct otherwise: When Owner has requested
Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which
method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor
shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the
basis of the fixed price method.
B. Chanae Order Pricina — Fixed Price
Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by
a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following
procedures shall apply:
1. Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor's Change Order Proposal, or
request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete
itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and
profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below, and shall be submitted
on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner.
2. Use of industry standards in calculatinp costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon
appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and
equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and
Contractor.
3. Costs continqent on Owner's actions: If any of Contractor's pricing assumptions are
contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the
proposal or request for an equitable adjustment.
4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes
in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall
not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves
additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools,
00 7200-33
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 34 of 48
overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference.
5. Breakdown not required if chanqe less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the
Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not
be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request
for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fairvalue.
6. Breakdown required if chanqe between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in
the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor
may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in
the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the
Owner to determine fair value:
a. lump sum labor;
b. lump sum material;
c. lump sum equipment usage;
d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and
e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below.
7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the
fixed price method shall include only the following items:
a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated
or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work
by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect
labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following:
(1) Basic wapes and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the
Department of Labor and Industries approved "statement of intent to pay
prevailing wages" or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct
supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost
of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working
supervisor's hours.
(2) Worker's insurance: Direct contributions to the City of Renton for industrial
insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates
established by the Department of Labor and Industries.
(3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance
Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State
Unemployment Compensation Act.
(4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, not
exceeding those allowances established by regional labor union agreements,
which are itemized and identified separately.
(5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act,
which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2%of the sum of the
amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3)above.
00 7200-34
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 35 of 48
b. Material costs: This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to
perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual
known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from
standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts.
Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges, shall be itemized.
c. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or
actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be
used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment
only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional rental costs actually
incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of
actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following
sources:
(1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). The maximum
rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the Associated
General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC
WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract
execution date.
(2) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical
work.
(3) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on
mechanical work.
The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental
rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment
shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current
edition on the Contract execution date.
d. Allowance for small tools, expendables &consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools
which cost $250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The
maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following:
(1) 3% for Contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs.
(2) 5% for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs.
Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be
itemized.
e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for
changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors' cost of Work
shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor.
f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect
delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract
Sum. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.03D, the amount of such
compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this
subsection (f). This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all non-craft labor, temporary
construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office
cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of
extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly
limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed
upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below:
00 7200-35
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 36 of 48
(1). Proiects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under$3
million, the following shall apply:
(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually
performed by Contractor's own forces, 16% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor(including
lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces,
16%of the first$50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work
performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6%of the first$50,000 of the amount due each
Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any.
(d) Subcontractor markuq for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s)of any lower tier, 4% of the first
$50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining
amount if any.
(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied
shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
(2). Proiects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to
or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply:
(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually
performed by Contractor's own forces, 12% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor(including
lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces,
12% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work
performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first$50,000 of the amount due
each Subcontractor, and 2%of the remaining amount if any.
(d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s)of any lower tier, 4%of the first
$50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining
amount if any.
(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied
shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
g. Allowance for qrofit: Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any
change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for which
contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.03. It
shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed
upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below:
00 7200-36
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 37 of 48
(1) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or
Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6%of the cost
developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
(2) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for Work performed at lower tier: For
Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of
a lower tier, 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with Section
7.02B 7a. —h.
h. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is
defined as:
(1) Contractor's liabilitv insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor's liability
insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order; and
(2) Pavment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for
Contractor's bond arising directly from the changed Work.
The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and
allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g above.
C. Chanae Order Pricina — Unit Prices
1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on
a unit-price basis, Owner's authorization shall clearly state:
a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed;
b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material
quantities; and
c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.
2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:
a. Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As
requested by Owner, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order
Work and areas in which they are working;
b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement;and
c. Not exceed any cost limit(s)without Owner's prior written approval.
3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in
accordance with paragraph 7.02B and satisfy the following requirements:
a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices
shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including
overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs; and
b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement
statements signed by Owner.
00 7200-37
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 38 of 48
D. Chanae Order Pricina —Time-and-Material Prices
1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform
Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner's authorization shall clearlystate:
a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed;
b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any,
for material quantities or labor; and
c. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.
2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:
a. Identifv workers assianed: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the
Work being performed. As requested by Owner, identify workers assigned to the
Change Order Work and areas in which they are working;
b. Provide dailv timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in
accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2
working days for Owner's review.
c. Allow Owner to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity
measurement;
d. Perform Work efficientiv: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as
efficiently as possible; and
e. Not exceed Owner's cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior
written approval.
3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs
in accordance with paragraph 7.02B and additional verification supported by:
a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and
b. Invoices: Invoices for material.
7.3 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME
A. COP requests for Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order.
Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order
Proposal.
B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor's fault: If the time of Contractor's performance is
changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or anyone for
whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the
Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed time of performance is due to
the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible.
00 7200-38
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 39 of 48
1. Notice and record keeqinp for Contract Time request: A request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days
of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is
entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and
begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor
shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish
copies of such record to Owner.
2. Timinq and content of Contractor's Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an
adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before
Contractor's written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a
description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier,
if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time
requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's
interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable
adjustment.
3. Contractor to provide supqlemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written
notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.03B.2 with additional supporting data.
Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized
in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and
analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the
delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that
the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time
for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation sufficiently detailed to
permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. Failure to provide such additional
information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall,
to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to
an equitable adjustment.
4. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request in
accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall
proceed diligently with performance of the Work.
C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule: Any change in the Contract Time
covered by a Change Order, or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor's schedule attributable to the
change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. Any Change
Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact
on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the
Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and
except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been
avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives.
D. Cost of chanqe in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change
in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.03D, subject to the following conditions:
1. Must be solelv fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused
by the fault or negligence of Owner orA/E;
2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.03B;
00 7200-39
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 40 of 48
3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in
Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.03C;and
4. Limitations on dailv costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited
to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor
may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.02B 7f for any change in the Work that
contributed to this change in Contract Time:
a. Non-productive supervision or labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or
labor extended because ofdelay;
b. Weeklv meetinas and indirect activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar
indirect activities extended because of the delay;
c. Temporary facilities or equipment r ental: cost of temporary facilities or
equipment rental extended because of the delay;
d. Insurance premiums: cost of insurance extended because of the delay;
e. Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon,
but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally
specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay.
PART 8 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
8.1 CLAIMS PROCEDURE
A. Claim is Contractor's remedv: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change
Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7.01, or on the resolution of any request
for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7.02 or the Contract Time
as provided in Section 7.03, Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as
provided in this section.
B. Claim filinp deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner's
final offer made in accordance with paragraph 7.01 E, or by the date of Final Acceptance,
whichever occurs first.
C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes
in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential)to which Contractor may be
entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain
the following information:
1. Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional
compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of
Work affected by the Claim;
00 7200-40
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 41 of 48
2. Dates: The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the Claim;
3. Owner and A/E emplovee's knowledqeable about Claim: The name of each employee of
Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim;
4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents
which support the Claim;
5. Identification of other supportina information: The identification of any documents and
the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim;
6. Copies of supportinp documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the
Contract Documents, that support the Claim;
7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the
specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an
extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor's analysis of its
Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time;
8. Details on Claim for adiustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is
sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set
forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.02; and
9. Statement certifvina Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the
Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and
accurate to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully
supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects
the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes
Owner is liable.
D. Owner's response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that
complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, to
Contractor as follows:
1. Resqonse time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000,
with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received;or
2. Resqonse time for Claim of$50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more,
with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to
Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a
written decision in such additional time.
E. Owner's review of Claim and finalitv of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor's Claim,
Owner may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the
issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final
resolution of any Claim. Owner's written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive
as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in
Section 8.02.
F. Waiver of Contractor riqhts for failure to complv with this Section: Any Claim of the Contractor
against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively
deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the
requirements of this Section.
00 7200-41
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 42 of 48
8.2 ARBITRATION
A. Timinq of Contractor's demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner's decision
rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.01 D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written
demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30
Days afterthe date of Owner's decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said
30 Day period shall result in Owner's decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its
Subcontractors.
B. Filina of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the
American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall
negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually
acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows:
1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in
accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules;or
2. Claims preater than $30,000: Disputes over$30,000 shall be conducted in accordance
with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to
use the expedited rules.
C. Arbitration is forum for resolvinp Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by
arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may
occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action
relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained.
D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Chanqe Order: If the parties resolve the
Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change
Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including
all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays,
inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity.
8.3 CLAIMS AUDITS
A. Owner mav audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time
following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain
and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit
Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall
constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery.
B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor
shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents:
1. Daily time sheets and supervisor's daily reports;
2. Collective bargaining agreements;
3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records;
4. Payroll registers;
00 7200-42
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 43 of 48
5. Earnings records;
6. Payroll tax forms;
7. Material invoices, requisitions, and deliveryconfirmations;
8. Material cost distribution worksheet;
9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.);
10. Vendors', rental agencies', Subcontractors', and agents'invoices;
11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier
Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts;
12. Subcontractors' and agents' payment certificates;
13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors);
14. Job cost report, including monthly totals;
15. Job payroll ledger;
16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries;
17. Generalledger;
18. Cash disbursements journal;
19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the
Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years
preceding execution of the Work;
20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by
the company involved, its accountant, orothers;
21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor's
internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all
such other source documents;
22. All non-privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all
documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract
Time sought by each Claim;
23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for
items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials,
equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals
involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals;and
24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid.
C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by
00 7200-43
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Page 44 of 48
employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall
provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours.
Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner's
auditors.
PART 9 - TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
A. 7 Dav Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and
to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part
of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:
1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion
thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the
Contract Time;
2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for
the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency;
3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct
Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents;
4. Contractor fails to supplv workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply
skilled workers or proper materials or equipment;
5. Contractor failure to pav Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make
prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor;
6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction;or
7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of
any provision of the Contract Documents.
B. Owner's actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at its option:
1. Take possession of Proiect site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession
of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery
thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work;
2. Accept assipnment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to
Section 5.20; and
3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems
expedient.
C. Suretv's role: Owner's rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties
of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
00 7200-44
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION F
D. Contractor's required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this section,
Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be entitled to receive
further payment until the Work is accepted.
E. Contractor to pav for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the
cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E's services and expenses made
necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the
Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such
costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These
obligations for payment shall survive termination.
F. Contractor and Suretv still responsible for Work performed: Termination of the Work in
accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for
Work performed.
G. Conversion of"Termination for Cause"to "Termination for Convenience": If Owner terminates
Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in
paragraph 9.01A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience
pursuant to Section 9.02.
9.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate
(without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner)the Work, or any part of it, for the
convenience of Owner.
B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a
written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly:
1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of
termination;
2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials,
equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such
portion of the Work as is notterminated;
3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms
acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work
terminated;
4. Assipn orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and
interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts;
5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed
by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related
to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest;and
6. Continue qerformance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not
terminated
C. Terms of adiustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work or
any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an
equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the
termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to
termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled
to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon
April 5,2018 00 7200-45
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION F
termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be
required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part 7.
D. Owner to determine whether to adiust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any
portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner.
PART 10 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.1 GOVERNING LAW
Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed
by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King county.
10.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
Bound to successors; Assianment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their
partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements,
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written
consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or
lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such
an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all
obligations set forth in the Contract Documents.
10.3 MEANING OF WORDS
Meaninq of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words
which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents
in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes
of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority,_
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual,
or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated.
Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in
the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings,
or required to complete the installation.
10.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
No waiver of riqhts: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an
acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
10.5 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
Contractor must be reaistered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or
licensed as required by the laws of the City of Renton, including but not limited to RCW 18.27.
10.6 TIME COMPUTATIONS
Computinp time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time
begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in
April 5,2018 00 7200-46
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION F
which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the
period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are
excluded from the computation.
10.7 RECORDS RETENTION /PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS
A. Six-vear records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its
Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.03, shall be retained
for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance.
B. Record Keepinp and Reportinq: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly
reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this
Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this
Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the
Washington State Public Records Act(Chapter 42.56 RCW).
C. Public Records Compliance. To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the
Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in
its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone
messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the
event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at
Contractor's own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold
harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys'fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related
to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which
Contractor has withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City
in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the
Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order.
10.8 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS
No third-partv relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any
persons other than Owner and Contractor.
10.9 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT
Contractor assiqns overcharqe amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual
economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the
purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to
goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with
the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing
after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order.
Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub-
Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor.
10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS
Headinqs for convenience onlv: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for
convenience of reference, and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect,
interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or
describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT
April 5,2018 00 7200-47
Sign Shop Expansion 00 7200
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION F
April 5,2018 00 7200-48
Sign Shop Expansion 00 8000
City of Renton Public Works Shops PROPOSAL BID BOND
.
� � Proposal Bid Bond
�
• KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor]
of[address] as Principal,
and [Surety]
a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of ,
and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the
City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid proposal of said Principal for
the work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves,
our heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns,jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its
sealed proposal for the following construction, to wit:
said bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal bid by said Principal be accepted, and the contract be
awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said contract
and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10)days
from and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void,
otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect.
IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of
Renton in accordance with the terms of the Proposal and furnish a performance bond with Surety or
Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal
shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of
Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and
sealed this day of ,
[Principal] [Surety]
[Signature of authorized official] [Signature of authorized official]
By:
[Title] [Attorney-in-Fact]
[Address]
00 8000-1
Sign Shop Expansion 00 8000
City of Renton Public Works Shops PROPOSAL BID BOND
[Telephone Number]
00 8000-2
.
�l' ,�
�
,
.
CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, the undersigned
as principal, and corporation organized and
existing under the laws of the State of as a surety corporation, and
qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors
with municipal corporations, as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City
of Renton in the penal sum of$ for the payment of which
sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or person
representatives, as the case may be.
This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinance
of the City of Renton.
Dated at , Washington, this day of , 20_
Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that:
WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. providing for construction of the
Siqn Shop Expansion ; the Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and
undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth;
NOW, THEREFORE, this Performance and Payment Bond shall be satisfied and released only
upon the condition that Principal:
• Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by Owner in the
manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract;
• Pays all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material persons,
and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials to the Project;
• Indemnifies and holds Owner, its officers, and agents harmless from and against all claims,
liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment,
and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and
reimbursing and paying Owner all expenses that Owner may incur in making good any
default by Principal; and
• Indemnifies and holds Owner harmless from all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages
and costs, including property damages and personal injuries, resulting from any defect
appearing or developing in the material provided or workmanship performed under the
Contract.
• Pays all taxes incurred on said contract under title 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington
(RCW) and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW.
The indemnities to Owner shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other
design professionals retained by Owner in connection with the Project.
Sign Shop Expansion Bond to the City of Renton
.
�l' ,�
�
• .
No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to
be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect Surety's obligation on the Performance
Bond. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the
terms of the Contract or the Work.
This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and
venue shall be in King County, Washington.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this instrument in two (2) identical
counterparts this day of , 20 _
Principal Surety
Signature Signature
Title Title
Name and address of local office of
agent and/or Surety Company:
Sign Shop Expansion Bond to the City of Renton
.
�i '�
�
.
AGREEMENT
CONTRACT NO. [Enter Contract#]
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of[Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between
the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to
as "City" and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor."
Now, therefore the parties agree as follows:
1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as if fully set forth herein: the City's
Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Bid package, Instructions to Bidder,
General Conditions Addenda, Proposal Form, Supplemental Conditions, Special Provisions, Contract
Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor's Proposal and all documents
submitted therewith in response to the City's Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents
referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents as revised by the Amendments and
Special Provisions included with the City's Call for Bids and Contract Documents.
2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the
project entitled [Enter Project name], [Enter Project number], including all changes to the Work and force
account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified
in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a
contract amount not to exceed $ , unless modified by an approved change order or
addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for
the Work.
4. Completion Date. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work
under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If the
Physical Work under this Agreement is not completed within the time specified, Contractor shall pay
liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract
Bid Documents.
5. Independent Contractor: Contractor's employees, while engaged in the performance of any of
Contractor's services under this Agreement, shall be considered employees of the Contractor and not
employees, agents, representatives of Renton and as a result, shall not be entitled to any coverage or
benefits from the City of Renton. Contractor's relation to Renton shall be at all times as an independent
contractor. Any and all Workman's Compensation Act claims on behalf of Contractor employees, and any
and all claims made by a third-party as a consequence of any negligent act or omission on the part of
Contractor's employees, while engaged in services provided to be rendered under this Agreement, shall
be the solely Contractor's obligation and responsibility.
6. Jurisdiction and Venue. Any lawsuit or legal action brought by any party to enforce or interpret this
Agreement or any of its terms or covenants shall be brought in the King County Superior Court for the State
of Washington at the Maleng Regional Justice Center in Kent, King County, Washington, or its replacement
or successor.
7. Severability. A court of competent jurisdiction's determination that any provision or part of this Agreement
is illegal or unenforceable shall not cancel or invalidate the remainder of this Agreement,which shall remain
in full force and effect.
8. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall
be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees.
9. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except
as expressly provided in this Agreement.
10. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which
shall for all purposes be deemed an original.
[Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name] � r}-
[Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] "�+
.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its
City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written.
CONTRACTOR: CITY OF RENTON:
President/Partner/Owner Denis Law, Mayor
ATTEST
Secretary Jason Seth, City Clerk
FIRM INFORMATION
d/b/a [Enter Firm name]
CHECK ONE: ❑ Limited Liability Co. ❑ Partnership ❑ Corporation ❑ Other
STATE OF [Enter state of incorporation]
INCORPORATION:
CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION:
[Address Line 1] City of Renton
[Address Line 2] 1055 South Grady Way
[City, State and Zip] Renton, WA 98057
[Enter Phone Number] [Enter Phone Number]
[Enter Fax Number or Email Address] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address]
Attention:
If business is a CORPORATION, the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary
must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished
to the City and made a part of the contract document.
If the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as)
and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract.
If the business is an limited Liability Company, an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her
title.
[Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name] � r}-
[Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] "�+
.
o ,�.
�
.
This form must be submitted with the Bid
Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes
The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the
bid solicitation date, the bidder is not a "willful" violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of
any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and
binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and
Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction.
I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the
foregoing is true and correct.
Bidder's Business Name
Signature of Authorized Official*
Printed Name
Title
Date City State
Check One:
Sole Proprietorship ❑ Partnership ❑ Joint Venture ❑ Corporation ❑
State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed:
If a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted:
* If a corporation, proposa/must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-
president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-
partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner.
� ,�
�
s
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the forgoing
proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest
or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly
induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid,
or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any
manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the
other Bidder or Bidders.
AND
CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER
Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from
anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby
assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials
purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from
anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing
the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of
his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to
the aforementioned exception.
AND
MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM
I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the
performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or
mechanic employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage
or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have
read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the
substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief.
FOR: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO
PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT
Name of Project
Name of Bidder's Firm
Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20_
Sign Shop Expansion 01 1000
City of Renton SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of contract.
3. Permits, fees and bonds.
4. Work sequence
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Contractor use of site and premises.
7. Work restrictions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls"for limitations and procedures governing temporary
use of Owner's facilities.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
1.03 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Sign Shop Expansion
1. Owner's Name: City of Renton
2. Architect's Name: Wagner Architects
3. The Project consists of the following:
a. Construction of an addition to an existing building.
b. Limited modifications to an existing building
c. Relocation of a radio antenna
d. Installation of a new generator transfer switch, as a bid alternate
e. Replacement of existing landscaping and some pavement with new pavement
1.04 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Contract Type: Single General Construction Contract based on a single lump-sum price as described in Division
00.
1.05 PERMITS, FEES AND BONDS
A. The Owner will obtain and pay for the building permit. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits
prior to a Notice to Proceed.
1.06 WORK SEQUENCE
A. The work shall be scheduled so as to allow continuous operation of the existing sign shop and of the overall
public works facility.
B. The Contractor shall schedule and supervise the work to accomplish completion within the contract time.
C. The Contractor shall schedule any work that impairs facility operations to after hours or weekends and only as
approved by Owner.
01 1000- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 1000
City of Renton SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 2
1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. Maintain access to existing
walkways, corridors, and other adjacent facilities. Do not close or obstruct roads, sidewalks, or driveways
without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:
1. Work by Owner.C. WORK RESTRICTIONS
1. Hours of Operation: Per City of Renton Municipal Code 4-4-030 C.: Commercial, multi-family, new single
family and other nonresidential construction activities shall be restricted to the hours between seven
o'clock (7:00) a.m. and eight o'clock(8:00) p.m., Monday through Friday. Haul hours shall be restricted to
the hours between eight-thirty(8:30)a.m.and three-thirty(3:30)p.m., Monday through Friday, and work on
Saturdays shall be restricted to the hours between nine o'clock(9:00) and seven o'clock (7:00), unless
otherwise approved in advance by the Owner, in conjunction with the Development Services Division.
2. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated.
a. Provide Owner not less than 72 hours' notice in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
b. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
3. Other Restriction per Section 01 1400
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED
END OF SECTION
01 1000-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 11 30
City of Renton HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01 1130 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for hazardous materials.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.03 NOT USED
1.04 CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION
A. Contractor to provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended to
be used during execution of the project, including storage locations.
1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is
encountered during execution of the Work. The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is
hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification
procedure for its abatement by the Contractor.
B. Compliance with Regulations:All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements. The
disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable state
and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the
most stringent shall apply.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
011130- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 14 00
City of Renton WORK RESTRICTIONS
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01 1400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in
which the Work is indicated.
1. Roads and Parking Lots: Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways and
sidewalks clear and available to Owner`s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of roadways and to minimize space and time requirements for
storage of materials and equipment on-site.
b. Schedule work that will impact Owner and Lessee's access to hours that will not impede such access.
c. Use barge cranes only for Work, no land based cranes are to be used.
1.03 NOISE CONTROL
A. Meet all requirements of WAC 173-60-040. Maintain the level of construction noise inside adjacent buildings
from exceeding a dB(A) 60 curve (with windows closed).
B. Meet all requirements of the City of Renton Municipal Code.
C. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: The noise level of each piece of equipment shall not
be greater than 85 dB(A)at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisier operating conditions. Provide
rubber-tired equipment whenever possible instead of inetal-tracked equipment. Mufflers for stationary engines
shall provide hospital-area silencing quality.
D. Air Compressors: Equip air compressors with silencing packages. Electric-driven compressors are preferred.
1.02 HEIGHT CONTROL
A. Federal Aviation Administration Permission: Due to the project site's proximity to Renton Airport, do not use a
crane higher than the antenna.
PART 3 -EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 14 00-1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 20 00
City of Renton PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.
B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.
C. Modification procedures.
D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. See General Conditions all requirements pertaining to retainage.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Format: On 8-1/2"X 11" paper.
B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.
C. Submit printed schedule on form acceptable to the Owner. Contractor's standard form or electronic media
printout will be considered.
D. Submit for Owner approval, electronic format of Schedule of Values, a minimum of 15 days before first
Application for Payment submittal. Approved Schedule of Values will be used by the Owner as the basis for
progress payments.
E. Format: Schedule of Values shall breakdown the total Contract Sum to each category of work utilizing the
Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification
Section.
1. Site mobilization shall not exceed 5%of Contract Sum.
2. Construction closeout shall not be less than 3% of Contract Sum.
3. For each line item exceeding 5%of Contract Sum, show breakdown by major products and operations.
4. Cross reference Schedule of Values amounts to the Construction Progress Schedule scheduled tasks with
specified in Section 01 3216
5. Round figures to nearest dollar amount.
6. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum.
7. Major cost items, which are not directly a cost of actual work-in-place, such as distinct temporary facilities,
may be either shown as items in schedule of values or included in General Conditions, mobilization and/or
demobilization at Contractor's option.
F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Order Proposals (COP)and Field Authorizations (FA), with each
Application for Payment.
1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement, if not stipulated, at monthly intervals.
B. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit approved Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages forms for Contractor and
all subcontractors. Without exception, processing of an Application for Payment will not begin until approved
copies are on file with Owner for each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed by Contractor
or subcontractors included in that Application.
1. Submit a list of all subcontractors and suppliers.
2. Submit instructions to Owner for the disposition of retainage funds.
a. In accordance with chapter 60.28 of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW), Owner shall reserve a
contract retainage not to exceed Five percent of the moneys earned by Contractor as trust fund for the
01 20 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 20 00
City of Renton PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 4
protection and payment of:
1) The claims of any person and Owner arising in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2) The state with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such
Contractor.
b. The funds held in retainage shall be held until forty-five(45)days following Final Acceptance subject to
the provisions of chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW.
c. Contractor's written instructions should be addressed to the Owner with a copy to the Architect.
d. At the option of Contractor, the moneys reserved by Owner shall be either:
1) Retained in a fund by Owner.
2) Bonded for all or any portion of the contract retainage in a form acceptable to Owner; or
3) Deposited in an interest-bearing account in a bank, mutual savings bank, or savings and loan
association.
4) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by Owner.
(a) Escrow Agent: If the retained funds are to be placed in escrow, Contractor will select the
escrow agent, subject to approval by Owner. The selected agent must be a bank or trust
company in the State of Washington.
(b) Pursuant to electing the escrow option, an escrow agreement shall be executed by
Contractor, Owner, and bank. Three copies of the agreement should be completed and
executed by Contractor and returned to Owner forjoint execution,who in turn will forward all
copies to the bank for receipt and acceptance. The bank will retain one copy and return one
copy each to Contractor and Owner. A completed and signed escrow agreement must be
on file with Owner for payment before Contractor's first application is processed.
(c) Escrow Payments: As each progress estimate is presented for payment, Contractor shall
make a vouchered request for the retained funds that are to be placed in escrow. Upon
receiving a retainage invoice, Owner will issue a check payable to Contractor and the bank
jointly. Such checks will be mailed to the bank and Contractor will receive copies of check
transmittal letters.
(d) Escrow Investments: The bank shall invest the retained funds in bonds and other securities
selected by Contractor from the following list approved by Owner:
(1) Bills, certificates, notes or bonds of the United States.
(2) Other obligations of the United States or its agencies.
(3) Obligations of any corporation wholly owned by the government of the United States.
(4) Indebtedness of the Federal National Mortgage Association.
(5) Time deposits in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and loan
associations in the State of Washington.
(e) Deposits in savings accounts in commercial banks, mutual savings banks, and savings and
loan associations in the State of Washington.
(fl The investments selected must mature on or prior to the date set for completion of the
contract, including extensions thereof or forty-five (45) days following the Final Acceptance
of the improvement or work. Interest on such investments shall be paid to Contractor as it
accrues.
(g) Escrow Costs and Fees: All escrow costs and fees shall be paid by Contractor, in
accordance with the Escrow Agreement.
(h) Release of Escrow Investments to Contractor: Upon Final Acceptance and the expiration of
forty-five (45) days following the date of Acceptance, and contingent upon Contractor's
compliance with provisions of the public works statutes, Owner will issue written instructions
to the bank to release to Contractor the investment held in escrow. If there should be either
unpaid taxes or other unsatisfied claims against the retained percentage, the provisions of
the Escrow Agreement will govern.
C. Provide a signed receipt from the Architect documenting the Architect's approval of the redlined record set of site
drawings. Without this signed approval a pay request will not be approved
D. Submit draft Application for Payment to Architect for approval 10 days prior to submittal of actual Application for
Payment.
01 20 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 20 00
City of Renton PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 4
E. Present required information in digital form.
F. Form: As approved by the Owner
G. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.
H. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion
of work performed.
I. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as
for an original item of Work.
J. Submit one signed digital image of each Application for Payment.
K. Include the following with the application:
1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3216.
2. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.
3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products if any.
4. Statements of Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages as documented by the Washington State Department of
Labor and Industries for each contractor or subcontractor included on the Pay Application.
L. When Owner requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide
one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by
number and description.
1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. Owner will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time
as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on Owner's standard form.
B. For other required changes, Owner will issue a Field Authorization (FA) signed by the Owner, A/E and
Contractor instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The document will describe the required changes, will identify an initial estimate of the probable cost of any
changes, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
2. Promptly execute the change.
C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Owner will issue a request for Change Order Proposal (COP)
that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and
specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change and the period of time during which the
requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14
days.
D. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Owner, describing the proposed
change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on
the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. Document any requested substitutions in
accordance with Section 01 6000.
E. Computation of Change in Contract Sum: Will be as specified in the Agreement and the General Conditions.
1. For change requested by Owner for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on
Contractor's price quotation.
2. For change requested by Contractor,the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change
Order as approved by Owner.
4. For change ordered by Owner without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be determined by
Owner based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work.
F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation.
1. Provide following data:
a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
c. Overhead and profit.
d. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
01 20 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 20 00
City of Renton PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 4
e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
f. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.
2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,
within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.
G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the
Conditions of the Contract.
H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to
record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price.
I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times
for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.
J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract
Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.
B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished:
1. Closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000.
2. Contractor's Certification of Payment of Debts Claims.
3. Contractor's Certificate of Release of Liens.
4. Owner's approval of Closeout submittals specified in Section 01 7800.
5. Completion of punch list with Engineer's approval.
6. Completion of all Change Orders.
7. Submittal of Affidavit of wages paid for Contractor and subcontractors.
8. L&I release.
9. Sign-off of all required permits.
10. Posting of Certificate of Occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED
END OF SECTION
01 20 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 21 00
City of Renton PREVAILING WAGE RATES
Project No. CAG-18-062 Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01 2100 - PREVAILING WAGE RATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This project, located in King County Washington, is subject to the payment of prevailing wages to all workers. It is
the contractor's responsibility to determine and use the applicable rates for the appropriate area of the state, as
published by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. These rates are available on the web at
https://fortress.wa.qov/Ini/waqelookup/prvWaqelookup.aspx.
1. Contractor must include these provisions in all subcontracts for work performed under this Contract.
B. Based in the bid submittal deadline for this project, the applicable effective date for prevailing wages for this
project is December 1, 2018. Upon written request, the Owner will mail a hard copy of the applicable prevailing
wages for this project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 21 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administration and supervisory personnel.
B. Communication procedures.
C. Project meetings.
D. Preconstruction meeting.
E. Site mobilization meeting.
F. Progress meetings.
G. Coordination procedures.
H. Submittal Types.
I. Submittals for review and information.
J. Number of copies of submittals.
K. Submittal procedures.
L. Daily Progress reports.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 1000 -Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy.
C. Section 01 3216 -Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules.
D. Section 01 1400 -Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
E. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
F. Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
G. Section 01 9113 -General Commissioning Requirements: Additional procedures for submittals relating to
commissioning.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone
numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel.
B. Coordination drawings.
C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel as
required for proper performance of the Work.
01 30 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 6
3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES
A. General
1. Address all Project correspondence through Owner. Do not contact Owner subconsultants directly,
unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the Owner, Engineer,or
Engineer's subconsultants.
2. Owner will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be recognized.
Owner will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor.
a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes.
3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project title
and number on all correspondence.
B. Requests for Information
1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Engineer or
Engineer's subconsultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI)to the Owner.
2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner, containing the
following information:
a. Project name and number.
b. RFI number(three digits, beginning with 001).
c. Date of request.
d. Date of required response.
e. Subject title.
f. Initiator of request.
g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification).
h. Location on site.
i. Description of issue.
j. Contractor's proposed solution, if known.
k. Cost impacts, if known.
I. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply.
3. Provide only one question per RFI.
4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence.
5. Allow 10 working days for Owner to issue response.
6. Owner reserves the right to void any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract
Documents.
3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Meeting
1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed.
2. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Engineer and selected consultants.
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, QAM, and major site related
subcontractors.
d. City Parks, Facilities, and Development Services staff.
e. Lessee's representatives.
3. Agenda:
a. Distribution of Contract Documents.
b. Designation of project personnel.
c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments,
proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout.
d. Scheduling, early occupancy.
e. Working hours.
f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
01 30 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 6
g. Construction related air quality control procedures.
h. Safety.
i. Security.
j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability.
4. Engineer will record minutes and provide copies to Owner and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
B. Progress Meetings
1. Attend progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of
applications for payment.
2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings.
3. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent.
d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers, Manufacturers
Representatives, Consultants.
4. Agenda:
a. Safety Report.
b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve.
c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3)week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule
coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule.
e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions.
f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for impeding planned
progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
g. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction.
h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
i. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
j. Review Requests for Information status.
k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions.
I. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress schedule.
m. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
n. Other business relating to Work.
5. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
o. Required performance results.
p. Protection of construction and personnel.
3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work, with
due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation, connection,
and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate
accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others.
B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved,
describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their work is required.
C. Coordination Meetings: Superintendent will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress and
pre-installation meetings.
1. Required Attendees:
a. Superintendent
01 30 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 6
b. Subcontractors
c. Suppliers
d. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities.
2. Agenda:
a. Scheduling.
b. Interface requirements.
c. Off-site fabrication.
d. Access requirements.
e. Site utilization.
f. Temporary facilities and controls.
g. Quality standards.
3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable,
manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions; factory
installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance with
recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to identify
applicable products, models, options, and other data.
B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings,
dimensions (field and factory), roughing-in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination
requirements, and other project-specific information.
C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of available
features, options, colors, textures, and patterns.
D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and aesthetic
characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual finishes in selected
colors, textures, and patterns.
E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features of the
Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 3216.
H. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or person.
I. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer,
manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on AWS or
WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of
materials or products for compliance with requirements.
K. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting inspection
results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project.
M. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's
tests and inspections.
N. Project Record Documents, Operation & Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: Combination of
submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 7800.
O. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner.
P. Others as indicated.
01 30 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 6
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR OWNER'S REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
5. Schedules.
6. Qualification Data.
7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals, etc.)
specified in individual Division 1 sections.
B. Submit to Owner for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and
the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and
for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 -CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Permits.
6. Other types as indicated.
B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Owner. Access to the
document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop Drawings
may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy.
At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage device
acceptable to the Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and one physical copy of all project submittals,
organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs, titles, and edge identification.
B. Superintendents Daily Report
1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report concerning
events at the Project site as follows:
a. List of subcontractors on site.
b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities.
c. Equipment on site.
d. Material deliveries.
e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
f. Accidents.
g. Meetings and significant decisions.
h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below.
i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
j. Emergency procedures.
k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented.
m. Change Orders received and implemented.
n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same.
01 30 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 01 30 00
City of Renton ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 6 of 6
o. Services connected and disconnected.
p. Equipment or system tests and startups.
Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner on every-other week basis.
2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or
not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the Owner within one day
of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response by Contractor's personnel,
evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner in advance when these events
are known or predictable.
END OF SECTION
01 30 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 01 32 16
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 01 3216 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, and other Division 0 and
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: For work sequence, Owner occupancy, and Owner-furnished items.
C. Section 01 20 00 Payment Procedures: For schedule of values.
D. Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with AGC (CPSM)-Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual;Associated General Contractors
of America; 2004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a preliminary schedule at the Pre-Construction Meeting
B. Provide a critical path schedule Construction Progress Schedule: Indicate complete construction sequence,
from Notice to Proceed through Final Completion.
1. Submit within 7 days of Notice to Proceed.
2. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule.
3. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each
element of construction.
1. Break down work so that no activity is longer than 21 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. List submittals, materials and installation as separate line items.
3. List all permit submittals showing submittal and anticipated issuance dates
3. List all Owner supplied material delivery dates on schedule
4. List all Work by Owner completion dates on schedule
B. Identify each activity by specification section number.
C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the
first day of each month.
D. Indicate procurement activities for long-lead and major items, including submittal, approval, and fabrication
activities. See Section 01 0300 for submittal review durations.
E. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 0100— 1.02.
F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification, and concurrent with its submission, prepare
a time-impact analysis using the current approved schedule to demonstrate the effect of the proposed
change on the overall project schedule.
01 32 16-1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 32 16
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 2 of 2
3.2 BAR CHARTS
A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.
B. Identify the first work day of each week.
3.3 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE
A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.
B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.
C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 5 days.
3.4 UPDATING SCHEDULE
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.
C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes.
E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
G. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report
corrective action taken or proposed and its effect.
3.5 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to General Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers,
and Architect/Engineer.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules.
END OF SECTION
01 32 16-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 40 00
City of Renton QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control.
B. Mock-ups.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Testing and inspection agencies and services.
F. Control of installation.
G. Tolerances.
H. Manufacturers'field services.
I. Defect Assessment.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 01 4000—Quality Requirements.
C. Section 01 4216 - Definitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 4000—Quality Requirements.
A. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution
of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed construction
complies with requirements.
B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution
of the Work used to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work comply with requirements.
Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 -ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures.
B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the
organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that
materials, products, workmanship, on-site and off-site fabrication, construction, and operations are in
compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar
work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function as
a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will
include the following:
1. Qualification Data: For Contractor-provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report
performed by a recognized authority.
2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular form
and include the following:
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Description of test or inspection.
c. Identification of applicable standards.
01 40 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 40 00
City of Renton QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 5
d. Identification of test and inspection methods.
e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required.
f. Time schedule (or time span)for tests and inspections.
g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
h. Requirements for obtaining samples.
i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.
3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section.
C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-weekly intervals.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with
standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are
specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated performance
and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of authorities having
jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required submittals, submit a
statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system
specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that
the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include the
list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of
Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers,
fabricators, specialists, or factory-authorized service representatives, provide entities with the following
qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production
capacity to produce required units.
4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be
performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
5. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction
materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the
drawings.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to schedule any tests required to show contract and permit
compliance. Provide adequate notification to the testing agency so testing does not delay the schedule.
Confirm with the testing agency the definition of adequate time.
01 40 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 40 00
City of Renton QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 5
C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing test
results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency, Contractor
shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing agency services.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency
with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner
before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location and
size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to
demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be
employed during the construction at Project.
C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
D. Obtain Owner's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
1. Owner will issue written comments within seven (7)working days of initial review and each
subsequent follow up review of each mock-up.
2. Make corrections as necessary until Owner's approval is issued.
E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to
remain, protect from all damage.
G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Tolerances will not be cumulative.
B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
01 40 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 40 00
City of Renton QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 5
3.04 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date of test or inspection.
2. Description of Work tested or inspected.
3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
4. Test or inspection results.
5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Owner's reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for
Payment.
3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of
services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or
products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner.
6. Attend preconstruction meetings.
7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
C. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
2. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
3. Schedule tests and inspections with Testing Agency. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior
to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.
4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,
tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by
Contractor beyond specified requirements.
D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the
same agency on instructions by Owner.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum.
3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and
installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions.
01 40 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 40 00
City of Renton QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 5
3.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an
appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
C. Maintain a Log of Non-conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution.
3.08 SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS
A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s)
approved by Owner. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and
quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non-Conforming
Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they impact
quality assurance or quality control.
B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports. Verification shall include a statement that all materials
and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as
noted.
C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting.
END OF SECTION
01 40 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 01 42 16
City of Renton DEFINITIONS
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 01 4216 - DEFINITIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. In case of conflict, the General
Conditions will take precedence.
B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.
1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT
A. Specifications Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the
Construction Specifications Institute's 2016 Master Format.
B. Specification Content:
1. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of
certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions
are explained as follows:
a. Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes incomplete
sentences.
1) Abbreviated word and terms shall be interpolated as sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable to the context
indicated.
b. These specifications are written in imperative mood. This imperative phraseology is directed to the
Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise.
c. The terms "Shall", "Shall be", "Will", and "Will be" and similar words and phrases are defined to have
compulsory meaning.
2. Assignment of Specialists:
a. The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists
who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialist must be engaged for
those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or
option. However, the responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.
b. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and similar
regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional
settlements and similar conventions.
c. Use of titles such as"carpentry" in not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of
the corresponding generic name.
d. The term "Installer"shall be used to refer to all specialists.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Terminology-Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as follows:
1. Addenda: Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete, or
add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents.
2. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Owner's response or submittals, requests, applications,
inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning will be held to the limitations of the Owner's
responsibilities and duties as specified in Section 00 7200, General Conditions of the Contract.
014216- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 42 16
City of Renton DEFINITIONS
Page 2 of 2
3. Confirm: Confirm or verify dimension or condition and notify Owner of findings prior to proceeding with the
work.
4. Construction Documents:All of the written and graphic documents prepared and assembled by the Owner
for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the following
categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, specifications, drawings,
addenda and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with "contract documents".
5. Contract Documents: The legally enforceable requirements which become part of the contract when the
agreement is signed. Including the bid package, project manual and all related documents including
construction documents. See "construction documents"above.
6. Contract Modifications-After agreement has been signed, any additions, deletions, or modifications to the
work are accomplished by supplemental instructions or change order.
7. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected",
"approved", "permitted", "required", and "accepted" mean "directed by the Owner", "requested by the
Owner", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility
into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.
8. Drawings: Graphic representations of the work.
9. Furnish: To supply and deliver to project site, unload, and inspect for damage.
10. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, anchor,finish, cure, protect, clean,start up, protect, and
similar operations and make ready for use.
11. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the
performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections, applications,
and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized experts in the work
they are engaged to perform.
12. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not
materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into
the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment.
13. Project Manual: The book-sized (8 1/2 by 11-inch format and bound)volume that includes the
procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications.
14. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in
conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site is shown
on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the project is
built.
15. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
16. Record Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes, including nature
and location of concealed work.
17. Shop Drawings: Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe
fabrication and installation of elements of the work.
18. Specifications: Define the qualitative requirements for products, materials and workmanship upon which
the contract is based.
19. Supply: Same as Furnish.
20. Testing Agency:An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, both at
the project site or elsewhere, and to report and, if required, to interpret the results of those inspections or
tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED
END OF SECTION
014216-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 50 00
City of Renton TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc.
E. Security requirements.
F. Vehicular access and parking.
G. Waste removal facilities and services.
H. Field offices.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.Allow other entities
to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,
Engineer, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities for use during construction operations. Do not use public facilities.
1.06 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas,to prevent access to
areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties
from damage from construction operations and demolition.
C. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.07 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll-up type fencing is allowed.
B. Provide 6 foot(1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with
locks. Install fencing around Ivar's deck Phases I and II as designated for both portions of project when under
construction. Provide fence as needed to maintain safe access for visitors and Lessee employees on the
perimeter of Ivar's deck.
1.09 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plant for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and erecting all
Work required under the Contract. Maintain plant and equipment in safe and efficient operating condition.
01 50 00-1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 50 00
City of Renton TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 2 of 3
Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective plant and equipment and uses made thereof.
B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning signs,
steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work.
Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations.
1.10 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or
theft.
1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park roads and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access
for emergency vehicles.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking areas, park
roads, and city streets.
D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations.
E. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to existing
pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Minimize heavy vehicle traffic to and from site during peak traffic hours (11:00
a.m. to 3:00 p.m.). Do not park vehicles in traffic lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic control signs and
devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries. Storage of materials
adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless authorized by the Owner.
1.12 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible
containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction per Section 01 5813
1.15 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire
exposure.
1.16 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1.17 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building code requirements
2. Health and safety regulations
3. Utility company regulations
01 5000-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 50 00
City of Renton TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Page 3 of 3
4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules
5. Environmental protection regulations
B. Standards:
1. General: Comply with the following:
a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations".
b. ANSI-A10 Series standards for"Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition".
2. Recommendations: Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services"
prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations.
3. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical
service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70).
C. Inspections:Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use.
Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.18 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions of Use:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient
manner.
2. Take necessary fire prevention measures.
3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's and Lessee's operations.
4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or persist on
the site.
1.19 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan:Show temporary facilities, utility connections,staging areas and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and
termination of each temporary utility provision.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED
END OF SECTION
01 5000-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 56 00
City of Renton Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
Page 1 of 4
DOCUMENT 01 5600 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes, but is not limited to:
1. Install and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation control facilities through project
completion and site stabilization.
2. Managing staging and stockpiling areas.
B. Related sections include but is not limited to:
1. Section 31 10 00—Site Preparation
2. Section 31 12 00— Earthwork
1.2 REFERENCES
A. WSDOT-Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edi-
tion; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit the following:
1. Catch basin insert used for inlet protection product information.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 TRIANGULAR SILT DIKE
A. Triangular silt dike shall be per the project documents.
2.2 INLET PROTECTION
A. Provide catch basin inserts for inlet protection as shown on the drawings. Insert shall be ap-
propriately sized for the structure in which it is installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
2.3 PLASTIC SHEETING
A. In accordance with WSDOT Section 9-14.5(3)for 6 mil clear plastic covering.
2.4 SAND BAGS
A. Provide '/to 1 cubic foot capacity sand bags constructed of UV stabilized synthetic woven
material of sufficient strength to support the weight of the bag capacity in mineral aggregate.
August 1, 2018 01 56 00-1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 56 00
City of Renton Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
Page 2 of 4
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The implementation of the Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control (TESC) plans and the
construction, maintenance, replacement and upgrading of these facilities is the responsibility
of the Contractor until all construction is approved and the site is stabilized. All work shall be
in accordance with the City of Renton Surface Water Design Manual and the plans. The
TESC facilities shown on the plan must be constructed in conjunction with all clearing and
grading activities, and in such a manner as to insure that sediment laden water does not en-
ter the drainage system or violate applicable water standards.
B. The TESC facilities shown are the minimum requirements for anticipated site conditions. Dur-
ing the construction period, the erosion control facilities shall be upgraded (e.g. additional
sumps, construction of ditches and silt fences, etc.) as needed. Contractor shall pay for all
costs associated with the construction, maintenance, upgrading and removal of the erosion
control system throughout project duration.
C. The Contractor shall provide ground-cover measures, access roads, and staging areas to
maintain a workable site. To the maximum extent possible the Contractor shall use the exist-
ing pavement or provide temporary gravel working pad for construction staging. The contrac-
tor shall be prepared to implement and maintain the required measures to reduce the amount
of exposed ground. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall provide a site mainte-
nance plan in the event storm water turbidity measurements are greater than the Ecology
standards.
D. All TESC measures for a given area to be graded or otherwise worked should be installed
prior to any activity within that area. The contractor shall sequence construction within a given
area to install sediment storage facilities and establish perimeter flow control prior to starting
clearing and grading.
E. During the wetter months of the year, or when large storm events are predicted during the
summer months, each work area should be stabilized such that if showers occur the work ar-
ea can receive the rainfall without excessive erosion or sediment transport. During the winter
months, areas that are to be left un-worked for more than 2 days shall be mulched or covered
with plastic. During the summer months minimum stabilization measures shall be to seal-
rolling the subgrade. The Contractor shall create and maintain temporary storm water con-
veyance channels through work areas to route runoff to the approved treatment facilities.
F. All disturbed areas shall be revegetated as soon as possible or covered with straw mulch
treated with a tackifier if outside of the growing season.
G. Soils that are to be reused around the site shall be stored in such a manner as to reduce ero-
sion from the stockpile. Protective measures should include, but are not limited to, covering
with plastic sheeting, the use of low stockpiles in flat areas, or the use of straw bales/silt
fences around pile perimeters. During the period between October 1st and March 31st, these
measures are required.
H. Provide wheel cleaning stations to clean wheels and undercarriage of trucks before leaving
site, as necessary to prevent dirt from being carried onto public roads. If roads are fouled,
they must be cleaned immediately in conformance with City of Renton requirements.
August 1, 2018 01 56 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 56 00
City of Renton Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
Page 3 of 4
I. Provide inlet protection in all existing catch basins in and adjacent to work area. Provide
catch basin insert in all new catch basins and area drains immediately following installation,
until site is stabilized.
J. Keep streets and site drains open for drainage at all times. TESC facilities shall be inspected
daily during periods of rain, otherwise inspected weekly. Clean streets thoroughly at the end
of each day. Remove sediment with a method approved by the Owner's Representative, and
transport sediment to an approved sediment disposal area. Street washing will be allowed
only as a last resort, and after the above method has been completed.
K. Clean out catch basin sumps prior to placement of catch basin inserts. Conform to manufac-
turer's recommendations regarding maximum allowable amount of sediment in catch basin
insert. Remove sediment buildup or replace the catch basin insert. Clean out catch basins af-
ter completion of construction. Do not flush sediment-laden water into the downstream sys-
tem with cleaning operation.
L. Inspect and repair erosion control measures weekly at a minimum and daily if necessary.
Contractor shall be aware of the weather forecasts and shall inspect before, during and after
storms and prior to weekend and holidays. Contractor shall inspect the entire system to en-
sure proper operation.
M. Refer to TESC notes in drawings for additional information.
3.2 DRAINAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE
A. Surface runoff and discharge shall be controlled at all times during and following develop-
ment. Under no circumstances shall the contractor allow concentrated discharges over
slopes.
3.3 PLASTIC SHEETING
A. Overlap joints minimum of 24". Overlap joints in the direction of drainage and to prevent wa-
ter from draining onto material being protected.
B. Secure plastic sheeting as necessary to prevent movement and damage.
C. Provide sandbags at 2.5 foot spacing and tie sandbags together with rope on slopes greater
than 3:1.
3.4 PROTECTION OF STOCKPILES
A. Protect stockpile areas from stormwater run-on from upstream areas and from release of
sediment downstream. Cover stockpiles at all times while not in use to keep stored material
dry. Surround materials stockpiled on pavement by two rows compost filter sock or triangular
silt dike with joints staggered.
3.5 REMOVAL
A. Remove stabilized construction access as quickly as possible following the conclusion of
transport of bulk materials and demobilization of heavy equipment, with prior approval of the
Owner's Representative.
B. Remove temporary silt fences at the direction of the Owner's Representative, but in no case
August 1, 2018 01 56 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 56 00
City of Renton Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
Page 4 of 4
prior to establishment of the Contract as Substantially Complete. The Owner reserves the
right to take ownership and control of temporary siltation control facilities following thorough
maintenance by the Contractor and immediately prior to acceptance of the Contract as Phys-
ically Complete.
C. Complete site restoration as directed by the Owner's Representative as part of removal oper-
ation.
O LPD Engineering, PLLC 2018
August 1, 2018 01 56 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 58 13
City of Renton TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 01 5813 - TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project identification sign.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr(80 km/hr)wind velocity.
B. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years.
C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm)thick,standard
large size
to minimize joints.
C. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality,two coats; sign background of white color.
D. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, contrasting colors.
2.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. (1) One painted sign, 4'x8', bottom 6 feet (2 m) above ground. Locations to be directed by Owner.
B. Content:
1. Project title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Name of Architect.
3. Name of Prime Contractor.
4. Contract Value.
5. Project Schedule.
C. Graphic Design, Colors, Style of Lettering: See Appendix
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed.
B. Erect at designated locations, as directed by Owner.
C. Install sign surface plumb and level, with buttjoints. Anchor securely.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.
END OF SECTION
015813-1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation
of hazardous materials and toxic substances.
C. Pre-installation meetings.
D. Cutting and patching.
E. Surveying for laying out the work.
F. Cleaning and protection.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division
1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.
C. Section 01 7419 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste
removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.
D. Section 01 7800—Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at completion.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor (if used)
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.
1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work
are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit digital record survey for the project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building, site
improvements, benchmarks, and utilities.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
6. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.
f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
g. Date and time work will be executed.
D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 01 7800
00 70 00- 1
1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 7
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner. Submit
evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.
B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project,
licensed in Washington.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hydraulic Project Approval: Follow all provisions and requirements of HPA Permit Number 2017-4-898+01.
C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide
positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.
D. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction
operations.
G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.
Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. See Section 01 1000 for occupancy-related requirements.
B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient
and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for
accommodating items installed later.
C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of
work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied or
attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication,to minimize waste due to
over-ordering or mis-fabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting
performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any
new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
007000-2
2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 7
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to
commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C. Notify Owner four days in advance of ineeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.
E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of
changes in grades or other reasons.
F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior
written notice to Owner.
G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
H. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record
locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.
I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations,
slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
J. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
007000-3
3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 7
3. Provide openings for penetration of inechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill:
1. To complete the work.
2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work.
3. To remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of inechanical and electrical, and other services.
6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work.
7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to
receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.
E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight
exposed surfaces.
F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated
material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element or as otherwise
required.
I. Cutting:
1. Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed
procedure(s)with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations.
2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic hammering
and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval.
J. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are durable
and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous surfaces, refinish
to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained
work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching.
3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work.
4. Match color, texture, and appearance.
5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to
patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote
spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate
dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do
not burn or bury.
007000-4
4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 7
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to
prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other
surfaces from traffic, dirt,wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet
materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain
recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.
3.09 CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION
A. See Section 01 1000 for occupancy-related requirements.
B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient
and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for
accommodating items installed later.
C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building
utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting
to, and placing in service, such equipment.
E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of inechanical and electrical work that are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as
closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize
accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
3.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions
B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to
complete each item and anticipated dates of completion.
1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollar value of Work remaining, and
reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Submit substantial completion checklist.
3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and
utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
007000-5
5
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 6 of 7
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of
changeover in security provisions.
7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with Division 1 Section "Commissioning Requirements."
8. Submit tesUadjust/balance records.
9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,
and similar elements.
10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
11. Complete final cleaning requirements.
12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During inspection,
Engineer will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as necessary to form the
Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List. The Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List will
subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on the Contractor's Punch List or the
Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be
issued.
1. Re-inspection: If, following Engineer's inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not granted,
request re-inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless
waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all Substantial
Completion re-inspections.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion Checklist
(attached to this section) MUST be complete.
3.11 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete
the following:
1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications,
and similar documents.
2. Submit copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification by the
QAM stating that every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where
impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all
accessory keys.
6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in Division 1 Section "Commissioning Requirements."
7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and certification.
8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems.
9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications according
to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Engineer will
either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will certify Application
for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before certificate will be issued.
007000-6
6
Sign Shop Expansion 01 70 00
City of Renton EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Page 7 of 7
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete
is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be
executed for Final Completion re-inspections greater than one in number.
C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist(attached to
this section) MUST be complete.
3,12 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST)
A. General: The QAM shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name and
identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items
needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list.
3.13 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and
material being cleaned.
E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
F. Remove waste, surplus materials,trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal
manner; do not burn or bury.
END OF SECTION
00�o 00-�
�
Sign Shop Expansion 01 7419
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART1GENERAL
1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.
B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage,
mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.
D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration:
1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.
2. Corrugated cardboard.
3. Wood pallets.
4. Treated wood.
5. Metals,including packaging banding, metal studs,sheet metal,structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars,and
other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and
bronze.
6. Glass.
7. Plastic sheeting.
E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements.
F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.
2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements,
including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166 codified in King
County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction
and demolition waste materials.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports,
submittal procedures, and project documentation.
C. Section 01 5000-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection
and removal facilities and services.
E. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to
demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like.
B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging,trash,
debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations.
C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively, toxicity or
reactivity.
D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively,
toxicity, or reactivity.
007419- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 7419
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 2 of 4
E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.
F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured
into a new product for reuse by others.
G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product
for reuse by others.
H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded
materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or
thermally destroying waste.
I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.
L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off
water.
M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time
they become waste.
N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes
salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information:
1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle,
including types and quantities.
2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)where trash/waste will be
disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project
trash/waste in the landfill(s).
3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or
recycling.
4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling,
salvage, reuse, and disposal.
5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be
protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation
procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging.
6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e.
whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers,or whether mixed materials
will be collected by a waste hauler.
C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals,with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of
disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.
1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay
payment.
2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.
3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in
landfills.
007419-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 7419
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 3 of 4
c. State the identity of landfills,total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards(cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of
salvage or recycling each material.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.
5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters).
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal
method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports,submittal procedures, and project
documentation.
B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and
services.
C. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching,
installation, protection, and cleaning.
3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and
documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor,
Owner, and Engineer.
C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and
return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-construction meeting.
2. Regularjob-site meetings.
E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage, reuse, return,
and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.
1. Provide containers as required.
2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.
3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid
contamination of materials.
F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations.
G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to
prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely
pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.
I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
007419-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 7419
City of Renton CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 4 of 4
END OF SECTION
007419-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 78 00
City of Renton CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1
specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and
samples.
C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial
Completion and Final Completions Checklists.
D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner with claim for final Application for Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before
requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Engineer will review draft and return one copy
with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by
Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned after
final inspection, with Owner/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to
final submission.
4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's
permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for
Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future items.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within
10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets,
"PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda changes on
the applicable drawing sheet or specification section.
01 78 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 01 78 00
City of Renton CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 2 of 5
2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown
originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer,
subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or
measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to,the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Changes made by Change Order.
d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction.
e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical
conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the
Contract Drawings.
5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original
Drawings.
7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar
identification, where applicable.
B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where
Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual
installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate,
substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical
installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record
Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate sheet numbers.
C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create
organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets and tabs.
3.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of
selections made.
1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.
B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in
Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed.
3.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted and
approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition.
01 78 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 01 78 00
City of Renton CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 3 of 5
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written
instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.
4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit
marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.
3.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and
submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an organized and
tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each.
3.05 O&M MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Provide PDF files that are organized by section and file and fully tabbed and labeled. Provide files in original
size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save files at a
resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file sizes. Where
operation and maintenance documentation includes information furnished by multiple sources, assemble and
coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant, inapplicable, or unnecessary
information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation. The QAM is responsible for final
assembly of manuals.
B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract
Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of
Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include a
section in the directory for each of the following:
1. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual.
2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. I nclude references to O&M Manuals that
contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification Sections in which each
system or subsystem is addressed.
3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of
equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and
subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall
contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals.
F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of
the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
01 78 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 01 78 00
City of Renton CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 4 of 5
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,
include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,
subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of
one system into a single binder.
1. Files: File type and format as approved by Owner. Documents shall be PDFs in 8-1/2-by-11-inch
format.
a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each into
groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if necessary to
provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each file," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number
for multiple-volume sets. Use layout supplied by Owner in electronic format approved by Owner.
2. Dividers: Reinforced heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to
indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the
section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software media
for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing sheet.
Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files.
3.07 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS
A. Content: Organize digital PDF inanual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties
and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match
manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier
and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that
would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
01 78 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 01 78 00
City of Renton CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Page 5 of 5
3.08 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service
schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond
information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by
product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification
Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that
would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
3.09 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers,within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with
Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is
determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm)three D side ring binders with durable
plastic no-print-transfer-type covers.
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name,
address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company
principal.
G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed,in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual,with each item
identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or
work item.
H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full
information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with
name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION
01 78 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 1 of 2
SECTION 02 41 13 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Description: Work includes, but is not limited to the following:
A. Selective Demolition of Base
1.02 Related Sections: In addition to the Sections listed below, all work of the Contract shall be
performed in compliance with the requirements of this Section.
Section 01 50 00—Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 56 00 -TESC
Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Material & Disposal
1.03 Existing Conditions:
A. Underground utilities and elements: Locate all underground utilities and elements prior to
digging and/or driving stakes. Take care,to neither disturb nor damage any existing above
ground or underground utilities or elements. The Contractor shall call Utility Notification
Center @(811)or(800)424-5555 or click www.callbeforevoudiq.orq for utility location
at or near the Public Rights-of-Way/Property Lines, and can also call Locating, Inc.@
(425)392-6412, CNI @(206)255-8650 or Applied Professional Services @(425)313-
1034 for location of utilities within the site. (Note: these firms will charge for services
rendered). The Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility
disconnect, capping of lines and meter removals required within the Public Rights-of-
Way.
B. The Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to verify location of utilities with the
Contractor's location services Utility Shutoffs: Coordinate all work with other Division
01 requirements. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Keep streets,
sidewalks and site clean and free from debris at all times. Keep both street and site
drainage systems open for free passage of runoff at all times. Provide siltation control
and catch basin protection as required by Best Managements Practices and Drainage
Codes as required and/or directed by the Engineer.
C. Encountering Unexpected Contamination or Hazardous Materials: Owner investigation
did not identify contamination or hazardous materials on this project. Should the
Contractor encounter contamination or suspect hazardous materials during selective
demolition, excavation or other construction activities, they shall immediately stop work
and notify the Engineer for direction on how to proceed.
D. Note that there is an existinq storm water line and an existina underpround electrical
service line in the location of the buildinp addition. These services must be protected
and maintained durinp demolition.
PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01 Protection of Facilities: Protect all drainage structures, utilities, trees, and other facilities during
demolition work.
August 1, 2018 02 41 13- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Page 2 of 2
3.02 Demolish Asphalt Paving:
Identify areas of existing AC paving to be removed for approval of the Engineer prior to
commencing this work. Provide a clean, sawn edge, and completely remove AC paving,
including base rock, as necessary for concrete key installation.
3.03 Disposal of Materials: The Contractor, in a manner consistent with all government regulations,
shall dispose of the refuse resulting from demolition. In no case shall refuse material be left on
the project site, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. All effort shall be
made to recycle materials whenever possible. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any
debris resulting from work of this Section.3.03. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air
hammers, back-up alarms and other noisy equipment as much as possible. The Contractor
shall comply with daytime limits established in the City's Noise Ordinance and procure and
comply with a Temporary Noise Variance should their construction go into nighttime or weekend
hours.
END OF SECTION
August 1, 2018 02 41 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 16
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILDING DEMOLITION
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 02 4116 - BUILDING DEMOLITION
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building for disposal.
B. Removal and salvage of existing radio antenna for reinstallation by general contractor.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Selective Deconstruction: Disassembly and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
B. Salvage: Removal of disassembled building materials for the purpose of reuse or recycling.
C. Demolish: Remove and legally dispose of off-site.
1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, deconstruction waste becomes property of the Contractor.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Deconstruction Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of deconstruction and removal work, with starting and ending dates
for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of stairs.
5. Locations of proposed dust-and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress.
6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of material removal from
building.
B. Deconstruction Photographic Documentation: Photograph existing conditions of interior and
exterior surfaces and all conditions which may be affected by the work.
C. Antenna: Photograph existing conditions of radio antenna which is to be relocated.
D. Submit deconstruction plan and photo documentation for approval prior to start of work.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
August 1, 2018 02 41 16- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 16
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILDING DEMOLITION
Page 2 of 4
A. Deconstruction Firm Qualifications: Company(ies)experienced and specializing in performing the
Work of this Section with documented experience in similar types of deconstruction work.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Comply with noise and dust regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Pre-Deconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to deconstruction including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of building to be deconstructed.
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
3. Review and finalize deconstruction schedule and verify availability of materials,
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by deconstruction operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
6. Review method for removing materials from the site.
7. Review staging area for materials on the site.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hazardous Materials: A hazardous materials assessment has been completed for the building.
While the assessment can be considered comprehensive, it is unknown whether additional
hazardous materials will be encountered or exposed during the course of the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Contractor must become familiar with the hazardous material assessment and provide
appropriately trained personnel and take necessary precautions to protect both workers
and building occupants during work. For any known hazards that require abatement,
certified abatement contractors must be provided.
B. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during deconstruction operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during deconstruction operations.
1.08 DECONSTRUCTION PLAN
A. Material Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of materials to be salvaged,
recycled, and disposed of. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of
measure throughout.
B. Procedure: Describe deconstruction methodology, sequencing, and materials handling and
removal procedures. Include the anticipated final destination of each material.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
August 1, 2018 02 41 16-2
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 16
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILDING DEMOLITION
Page 3 of 4
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
deconstruction required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or videotapes.
3.02 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during deconstruction operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct deconstruction operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to workers and damage to salvageable materials.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of workers around deconstruction area.
2. Provide weather protection for existing building operations before, during and after
deconstruction.
3.04 DECONSTRUCTION
A. General: Deconstruct and remove existing construction in accordance with the materials
identified for removal in the deconstruction plan. Use methods required to complete the Work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing, prying or grinding, not
hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily
cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
August 1, 2018 02 41 16-3
Sign Shop Expansion 02 41 16
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILDING DEMOLITION
Page 4 of 4
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Salvaged Items:
1. Protect the radio antenna from damage during removal and store in a protected manner
pending future reinstallation.
C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during deconstruction activities.
3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain the Engineer's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Waste Management and
Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by deconstruction
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before deconstruction operations began.
3.07 SALVAGED MATERIALS FOR REINSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR
A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: As directed by Engineer, and as necessary for
access and upgrade work.
End of Section 02 41 16.13
August 1, 2018 02 41 16-4
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 13
SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including: formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. This Section includes the cleaning, patching, repair and finishing of existing concrete.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 50 00— Metal Fabrications
B. Section 07 92 00—Joint Sealants
C. Division 22— Plumbing
D. Division 26— Electrical
E. Section 31 00 00— Earthwork
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Conform with requirements of the following Specifications as referenced or as modified and
supplemented hereinafter.
1. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete,ACI 301-05.
2. ACI Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork, ACI 347-04.
3. ACI Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete, ACI 613.
4. ACI Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306.
5. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605.
6. State of Washington Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal
Construction 2008. Hereinafter called WSDOT.
7. ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318-05.
8. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301-05.
9. AWS (American Welding Society) Reinforcing Steel Welding Code, D1.4-05.
10. ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures, ACI 315-
99.
11. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standard Specification for Deformed
and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, A615-08b.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 13
12. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)Specification for Welded Steel Wire
Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement, A185-07.
1.04 REGULATIONS
A. Conform with code requirements of as it pertains to structural cast-in-place concrete and concrete
reinforcement except as supplemented and modified herein.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Submit design mixtures for each concrete mixture to Engineer for approval. Do not proceed
without Engineer's written approval.
C. Records: Maintain record of all concrete placement; indicate exact mix proportions, list time,
date, location in the project, weather conditions at the time of placement and the source of the
concrete supply. Make records available to Engineer at any time during the course of
construction and submit at end of concrete placement phase of project.
D. Provide mix submittal highlighting the extent of fly ash replacement, including dollar value.
E. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit manufacturer's published literature for
specified products and accessories as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications,
physical characteristics and performance data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's
instructions and directions for application if not included in manufacturer's published literature.
F. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement placement drawings to Engineer for approval.
Provide material test reports.
G. Provide manufacturer's published literature for devices to be cast into concrete.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Special Inspection: Notify Engineer at least 48 hours before inspection will be required;
inspection will be required immediately prior to any intended pours or placement of concrete.
B. Inspection by Other Trades: Where items, such as reglets, anchors, fastenings, conduit, piping
and other items are supplied by other trades and specified elsewhere in these specifications, in
the forms, obtain approval of their placement prior to placing any concrete.
C. Formwork for walls exceeding 6' in height from immediate adjacent grade or structure shall be
designed by a licensed engineer. Such formwork design shall be submitted to the Engineer with
engineer's stamp prior to construction of such form work. Cost of such design shall be born by
the Contractor.
D. Concrete Work: Concrete work where indicated to be exposed is architecturally finished
concrete; special care must be taken to provide specified, finished surfaces without gravel
pockets, and other defacements.
1.07 HANDLING
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 13
A. Protection of Forms: Withdraw projecting nails or other objects from contact surfaces before
reusing; clean and completely recondition all forms prior to reuse; repair any damage to forming
surfaces caused during previous usage. Formwork with patches or repairs affecting appearance
of the concrete surfaces will not be permitted.
B. Precautions: Contractor is responsible for the strength and suitability of the formwork.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMS
A. For unexposed surfaces: Formboards of Standard grade Douglas fir, T&G or shiplap, not wider
than 8", S1 S2E.
B. For exposed concrete, interior of shafts, and walls to be covered with veneer; Plywood; HDO
Plyform EXT-APA, Simpson Formguard, or approved; minimum 3/4"thick; omit mill oiling; at the
Contractor's option, standard or high-density overlaid plywood forms may be used in lieu of form
boards.
C. Steel Forms: Approved type steel forms may be used in lieu of wood and plywood, at
Contractor's option.
2.02 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Snap Ties: Burke Concrete Accessories, Superior Concrete Accessories, or approved. Standard
wire snap tie assembly consisting of high-strength wire with flattened breakoffs; breakbacks and
lengths as approved for the conditions of the installation.
2.03 ANCHORS & INSERTS
A. See the Structural drawings for hold down requirements.
B. Anchor Bolts: Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel bolts, 5/8" diameter unless otherwise indicted, length
as required for attached items as indicated. Set into forms in accurate location and spacing noted
with bolt, head set into concrete and threaded end extending.
C. Sleeves: Where sleeves are required for penetration of the concrete work by the work of other
trades, provide heavy gage galvanized pipe or tubing; sizes as required to accommodate conduit
or pipe. Coordinate location with other trades as required.
D. See mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications for additional components to be cast
into the concrete.
F. Trench Frames and Grates: provide Heavy Duty Trench Frames with Grated Covers, Neenah
Foundry, model R-4990-AX with Type A covers for 8"wide trench.
2.04 FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Burke Concrete Accessories Burke-Release, Nox-Crete Co. Form Coating, Industrial Synthetics
Corp. Synthex, or approved. Release agent with non-staining and no-interference characteristic
with bonding capabilities of paints, plasters, or other surface coatings.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 13
2.05 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Bars: ASTM A615; types, sizes and grades as indicated and noted on drawings; all bars free
from rust and loose scale at time of delivery.
B. Deformed Welded Wire: ASTM 497
C. Tie-wire: 16-gauge double annealed wire. Provide galvanized tie wire for exposed concrete.
D. Reinforcement Chairs: Plastic or stainless steel.
2.06 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Aggregates
1. Standard: ASTM C33.
B. Cements
1. Provide cements obtained from same course or of same brand for concrete in same
element or portion of the work.
2. Standard Portland Cement: Columbia, Ideal, Kaiser, Lone Star, standard gray Portland
cement conforming with requirements of ASTM C150; use type I, II or type III.
C. Admixtures
1. Use only one brand of admixtures.
2. Water-Reducing Admixture: Master Builders Pozzolith 344-N, or approved. Chemical
admixture conforming to requirements ofASTM C494, Type A.
3. Retarder-Densifying Admixture: Master Builders Retarding Pozzolith, or approved;
ASTM C494, Type B.
4. Accelerator: Chemical admixture designed to accelerate set on concrete but not corrode
reinforcing steel; ASTM C494, Type C.
5. Air Entraining Agent: Conform to requirements of ASTM C260.
6. Contractor shall verify in writing that all admixtures used are compatible.
D. Bonding Agents: Grace Construction Materials Daraweld C, Master Builders Concresive Liquid
(LPL), or approved. Emulsion-type additive of plasticized high polymer resins designed for
bonding of concrete.
E. Adhesives/Post Installed Anchors
1. Simpson "SET-UP-XP'- ISS ESR 2508, or approved alternate for anchorage into
concrete.
2. Grout for exposed surfaces shall be non-staining.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 13
3. Primers and Sealers: As recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
F. Other Ingredients: Provide other ingredients as noted on drawings or as required by Code or the
Specifications.
2.07 REQUIREMENTS
A. FLY ASH: Reference Structural General Notes.
2.08 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Omit underslab vapor barrier.
2.09 CURING MATERIALS
A. Method of curing interior architectural concrete floors shall result in no discoloration of concrete
and interfere with application of concrete sealer. The following methods of curing are acceptable:
1. Water: Potable.
2. Sheet Membrane Curing: Meet or exceed ASTM C 171, Type 1.1
a. Fortifiber Orange Label Sisalkraft 280, specified for type and quality. Two sheets
of reinforced kraft paper cemented together with bituminous adhesive with one
white reflective surface, non-staining, moisture retentive.
1) Website: http://www.fortifiber.com
b. McTech Group, UltraCure NCF (natural cellulose fabric). Cellulose fabric with 3
mil clear impervious coating applied to one side. White reflective surface,
nonstaining, moisture retentive.
1) Website: www.mctechgroup.com
3. Polyethylene Sheet: Not allowed at exposed to view architectural concrete floors.
2.10 EXPANSION JOINTS IN SLABS
A. Filler for saw-cut, weakened plane expansion joints: as specified in Section 07 92 00, or shown
on drawings.
B. Joint Filler: Preformed non-extruding resilient material, as specified in 07 92 00.
C. Joint Sealer: Self-leveling polyurethane, as specified in 07 92 00.
2.11 SEALER
A. For non-formed surfaces: Burke Spartan-Cote Cure-Seal-Hardener, Sonneborn Kure-N-Seal,
West Floor Treatment, Stonetop CS9, or approved. Transparent curing agent complying with
requirements ofASTM C309, Type 1.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 13
B. For vertical surfaces: Clear, penetrating, non-gloss sealer, guaranteed and shown on site not to
etch adjacent surfaces with overspray. Provide sample on cast wall and obtain approval of
Engineer before proceeding.
C. For interior floors: Sealer compatible with floor wax. Provide samples of in-place product and
obtain approval of Engineer before proceeding.
2.12 NON-SHRINKING GROUT
A. Hallemite Por-Rok cement, or approved special non-shrinking grout mix; apply in strict
accordance with manufacturer's directions; take care to protect adjacent finished surfaces from
defacement. Provide for sleeves, and where indicated.
2.13 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Quality of Concrete
1. Assumed Compressive Strengths: 3000 psi.
2. Admixtures
a. Add in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
b. If approved,water-reducing retarder may be used when the temperature of the
concrete, as placed, exceeds 65 degrees F.
c. If approved, accelerator may be used when temperature of concrete is less than
40 degrees F.
d. Use retarder-densifier when placing concrete in warm weather conditions or
when ambient temperature exceeds 65 degrees F.
e. Air-entrain all concrete subjected to freezing temperature after curing.
B. Mix Design
1. Determine mixes in accordance with the following; maximum water/cement ratio as noted
on drawings.
2. Proportions and Tests: Conduct determination of proportions and tests in accordance
with basic relationships and procedures outlined in ACI 211.1 and 211.2.
3. Certificates: Submit certification of previously tested mix designs.
2.15 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Standard Concrete
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 13
1. On-Site Mixing: Job-mixed concrete may be used in lieu of ready-mixed concrete at the
option of the Contractor providing that the concrete meets the requirements of these
specifications.
2.16 FLOOR WAX
1. Provide floor wax compatible with sealer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
A. Erect forms to conform accurately to the shapes, dimensions, locations and profiles indicated; fit
joints between adjacent assembled panels and components tightly. Inspect all contact surfaces
prior to concrete placement; verify that surfaces are clean, smooth and free from foreign matter or
imperfections affecting appearance of finished concrete.
B. Joint Seal for Exposed Concrete: Apply double face tape, not more than 1/16"thick to edges of
form panels holding back from form surface at least 1/16"; apply continuous bead of clear silicone
sealant for the length of the joint; tool smooth and flush with adjoining contact surfaces. Wipe off
all excess sealant. Fill all holes and imperfections in forming surfaces with sealant and smooth.
C. Openings for Installation of Work Specified Elsewhere: Form openings in concrete work to detail
for the installation of various items of work indicated as installed in formed and unformed concrete
surfaces. Construct temporary openings in forms for cleaning and inspection; arrange such
openings in sides of forms where concrete surfaces will be concealed by other materials or
construction.
D. Construct all formwork to the shapes, lines and dimensions of concrete members with specified
tolerances.
3.02 SHORING
A. Contractor's Responsibility: The adequacy, strength, and arrangement of shoring and reshoring
is the Contractor's responsibility; at no time shall the safety of the structure or personnel be
endangered by faulty formwork or support for it; modify shoring and reshoring as required to meet
conditions ofthe work and to insure safety.
B. Design and erect shoring and bracing for form-work to transmit loads from successive parts of the
structure directly through falsework to adequate support without creating bending and shearing
stresses in concrete. Arrange shoring and formwork so that forms and shoring may be removed
without disturbing adjacent shoring and formwork; leave shores in place until concrete being
supported has reached 28-day strength.
3.03 FORM TREATMENT
A. Before erection of forming, plug and seal all cracks, holes, slits, gaps and other"telegraphing"
imperfections in contact surfaces. Treat contact surfaces as follows:
B. Board Forms
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 8 of 13
1. For unexposed surfaces: Keep wet previous to placing concrete; wet thoroughlyjust
prior to the placing of concrete.
2. For exposed surfaces: As specified for plywood contact surfaces.
C. Plywood or Steel Contact Surfaces: Bleach high-density overlaid forms with lye. Spray release
agent to contact surfaces uniformly. Apply before each use at not less than the following
coverages; for steel or high-density plywood forms, 1 gallon per 3,000 square feet; for medium
density plywood form, 1 gallon per 1,500 square feet; for standard plywood forms, 1 gallon per
1,000 square feet.
3.04 FORM REMOVAL
A. Formwork designed for easy removal without damaging or marring finished surfaces of the
concrete; take particular care in removing forms from exposed concrete surfaces. Prying against
face of concrete will not be permitted; where mechanical means are necessary to release forms,
use wood wedges only, and then only if approved by the Engineer.
B. Removal Strength: Formwork for beam soffits, slabs and other parts that support the weight of
concrete shall remain in place until concrete has reached its required 28-day strength, unless
otherwise noted or approved.
Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams and joists, and other parts not supporting the weight
of concrete shall remain in place until concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from
the removal operations. Determine concrete removal strength based on test cylinders, field cured
under the most unfavorable conditions prevailing for any portion of the work represented.
Do not backfill against walls until concrete has attained 28 day strength.
C. Early Removal: Where formwork may be removed prior to attaining 28-day strength of the
concrete it shall be left in place until concrete has attained at least 80% of the required strength
based on test cylinders and must be reshored afterward. No early removal will be permitted
without the approval of the Engineer.
D. Reshoring: If early form removal is approved, reshore in such manner that at no time will large
areas of new construction be required to support their own weight; allow no live loads on new
construction while reshored; tighten reshores to take loads taking care not to overtighten. Leave
reshoring in place until concrete has attained 28-day strength.
3.05 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.06 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel bar reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as shown and placed as indicated.
B. Bending and Straightening: Form bars accurately to detail, other kinks or bends will not be
permitted; conform with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 7. Make bends cold around pin with
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 9 of 13
diameter at least 6 times bar dimension; heating of reinforcement will be permitted only if entire
operation is approved. No bending of reinforcement after partial embedment in concrete will be
permitted unless noted on drawings.
C. Splices: Obtain approval of all splices not indicated on drawings. In general avoid splices at
points of maximum stress. Saw, shear, or flame-cut bar ends; straighten ends of sheared bars;
chip and wire brush ends of flame-cut bars. Wire brush splice area to remove burrs, paint, oil and
other foreign matter before splicing. Conform to Class B, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welding: Where welding of reinforcement is indicated and required, provide welds in accordance
with AWS D1.4; include bar splices, connection devices, inserts, anchors, and anchorage details
where noted or required by drawings.
3.07 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcing bars free from loose rust, mud, oil and other foreign matter affecting or reducing
bond using approved portable sandblasting equipment. Accurately position bars in accordance
with approved placement drawings and secure against displacement. Lap at intersections as
indicated or as directed; extend reinforcement through, and lap beyond, construction joints.
C. Displacement: If bars are displaced, or if it is necessary to move bars to avoid interference with
other reinforcing or embedded items, and if bars are moved to exceed tolerances, obtain approval
of resulting arrangement prior to placing concrete.
D. Miscellaneous: After cutting tie wire, turn wires to the inside of the section and bend in such
manner that concrete placement will not force ends to be exposed at concrete surfaces.
E. Cover: Allowable cover for reinforcement is indicated or noted on drawings.
3.08 CONSTRUCTION AND CONTROL JOINTS
A. Form all joints perpendicular to main reinforcement, or as shown on drawings. Unless otherwise
noted on drawings, continue all reinforcing acrossjoints; provide longitudinal keys at least 1-1/2"
deep at all joints in walls and between walls and slabs or footings. Remove keyforming inserts
and thoroughly clean surface of concrete at all joints before placing next lift using approved
portable sandblasting equipment.
B. Bond for Hardened Concrete: Roughen surface of concrete atjoints to obtain bond before
placing next lift; if use of keys is impractical due to congestion or inaccessibility or if it is
inadvisable to disturb surface before it has hardened, use only wet sandblast method for
preparing surface. Dampen hardened concrete ofjoints between footings and walls,joints in
unexposed walls, and all others not specifically mentioned hereinafter, and roughen by air-water
cutting. Dampen hardened concrete ofjoints in exposed work and roughen by air-water cutting;
thoroughly cover joint surfaces with neat cement mortar of similar proportions to mortar in
concrete; apply mortar as thick as practicable on vertical surfaces and minimum of 1/2"thick on
horizontal surfaces; place next lift before mortar has reached its initial set.
C. In Slabs: Refer to Drawings for Details. Form or saw-cut to true, straight lines, maximum
variance from true line of 1/4" in 10' and no irregularities across joint in excess of 1/8"; extend
November 15, 2018 03 30 00-9
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 10 of 13
reinforcing steel through and lap beyond joints. Provide construction or control joint where
indicated or not more than 20' o.c. each way, preferably under partitions.
3.09 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide in earth-supported structures wherever exterior slabs abut vertical surfaces; at
intersections of new concrete pavement and walks with old; elsewhere indicated on drawings.
Run no reinforcement or other metal trim continuous through joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 605
3.11 FINISHES FOR FORMED SURFACES
A. As-Cast Finishes
1. Rough Form Finish: Provide for surface of subgrade walls, foundation walls and footings.
2. Smooth Form Finish: Provide for exposed surfaces, including painted surfaces, unless
otherwise specified.
3.12 FINISHES FOR UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Screed all slabs, for whatever finish, to true levels or slopes, work surfaces only to the
degree required to produce the desired finish; do no finishing in areas where water has
accumulated, drain and re-screed; in no case use cement and sand sprinkling to absorb moisture.
Carefully finish all joints and edges with proper tools, unless otherwise specified. Strike smooth
tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to
formed surfaces after concrete is placed or as indicated on drawings; float to a texture consistent
with that of the formed surface and continue finishing of formed surface uniformly across these
related unformed surfaces.
B. Screed Finishes
1. Rough Screed Finish: Consolidate, level and screed surfaces to obtain evenness and
uniformity; remove all surplus concrete after consolidation by striking off with sawing
motion against guide strips.
2. Provide for top horizontal surfaces of footings and foundation walls.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00- 10
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 11 of 13
C. Float Finishes
1. Consolidate, level, and screed surfaces to obtain evenness and uniformity; remove all
surplus concrete after consolidation by striking off with sawing motion against guide
strips. Float surface smooth with power-driven equipment to true plane within a tolerance
of 1/4" in 10' as determined by a 10' straightedge placed anywhere on slab in any
direction. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared from surface and/or when
mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power floating equipment; use hand
floats of wood or cork in locations inaccessible to power-driven equipment. Recheck
trueness of surfaces; cut down any high spots and fill any low spots as required to form,
smooth, granular texture, free from screed marks and defects.
2. Provide for surfaces scheduled or noted on drawings and slabs where no other finish is
specified or noted. (FF)
D. Troweled Finish
1. Consolidate, level, and screed surfaces to obtain evenness and uniformity; remove all
surplus concrete after consolidation by striking off with sawing motion against guide
strips. Float surface smooth with power-driven equipment to a true plane within a
tolerance of 1/8" in 10' as determined by a 10'straightedge placed anywhere on the slab
in any direction. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared from surfaces and/or
when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit use of power floating equipment. Recheck
trueness of surface; cut down any high spots and fill any low spots as required to achieve
trueness within specified tolerances; refloat surface to uniform, smooth, granular texture,
free from screed marks and defects.
2. Provide at all interior surfaces.
E. Broom Finish: Provide broom finish at exterior concrete surfaces.
Where applicable:
1. Float finish, except score surface to provide a broom finish just after initial set. Score
surface uniformly and perpendicularly to traffic, unless otherwise directed.
2. Prepare test samples of scoring textures for Engineer's selection of finishes prior to
beginning work.
F. Applied Treatments
1. Finish slabs as specified hereinbefore and apply surface treatment where scheduled or
specified.
2. Sealer-Hardener: Coat newly finished slabs as soon as surface water has disappeared
and upon completion of finishing operation. Apply 1 additional coatjust prior to
acceptance of the project.
G. Defective Work: Remove and replace when directed by Engineer, surfaces which show
excessive shrinkage cracks.
November 15, 2018 03 30 00- 11
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 12 of 13
3.13 NON-SHRINK GROUT
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's direction; protect adjacent finished surfaces from
defacement. Provide for sleeves, and where indicated.
3.14 APPLICATION OF CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Concrete must be allowed to cure a minimum of 7 days prior to application of liquid sealer.
C. All surfaces to be treated must be clean and sound. Remove all membrane forming curing
compounds, sealers, oil, grease, dirt and other contaminants. For best results, remove any
concrete laitance and patch or fix all cracks and damaged areas in method acceptable to
Engineer.
D. Apply sealer with low-pressure spray equipment at application rate recommended by
manufacturer. The floor should be completely saturated with material. Normally this will require a
1 st coat application at the rate of 200 square feet per gallon. The application rate may vary due to
the porosity of the floor. More porous floors will require additional material.
E. If a second coat is required, immediately apply it in a same manner as the first coat. Do not allow
the surfaces treated to dry between applications.
F. Apply one coat of wax to interior surfaces after sealer is dry, per manufacturer's
recommendations. Buff with floor polisher.
3.15 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold
temperatures; maintain minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for necessary
hydration time and proper hardening of concrete. Do not use curing agents for concrete that will
receive fluid applied waterproofing or pedestrian traffic topping.
B. Duration of Curing: In addition to overnight initial curing, continue final curing operations until the
cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which
temperature of the air in contact with concrete is above 50 degrees F. equals 7 days; if high-early
strength concrete has been used continue final curing operation for 3 days total calculated as
before. Take care to prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. If early removal of
forms is approved and forms are removed during the curing period apply one of the curing
methods specified in Standard Specifications and continue curing for the remainder of the
required curing period.
3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Immediately after removal of forms, cut back ties; inspect surfaces for defects; repair or patch
defects only after defects are inspected by Engineer and then only with his permission. Do all
cutting and repair within 48 hours after removal of forms; cure repairs same as new concrete.
B. Defective Areas: Where patches are allowed, repair and patch areas; must match surrounding
areas in color and texture so as to be indistinguishable after completion, including curing and
November 15, 2018 03 30 00- 12
Sign Shop Expansion 03 30 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 13 of 13
finishing. Determine mix for color by trial mixes before patching; after initial cure, dress patch or
repair area mechanically or by hand for texture match.
C. Preparation for Repair: Repair all defective and damaged concrete, including honeycombed,
sandstreaked or fractured concrete, voids and gravel or air pockets; chip defective material out to
a 1-inch minimum depth and square edges with surface; no "feathered" edges will be permitted.
Clean prepared areas, dried patch areas and adjoining areas for at least 6 inches around patch
free from dust, and keep wet for at least 3 hours prior to application of patch material; allow
surfaces to surface dry before applying patch material.
D. Bonding Grout: mix bonding grout for patching using approximately 1-part cement and 1-part fine
sand passing No. 30 mesh sieve mixed with only enough water to provide a mixture of thick
cream consistency. After mixing brush, bonding grout onto surfaces to be patched.
E. Patching Mixture: Mix patching material of approximately same materials as concrete, except
damp loose volume. Add no more water than is necessary for proper handling and placing; mix
mortar in advance, and allow to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of
water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.
F. Application: When surfaces of patch area are surface dry, thoroughly and uniformly brush bond
coat into surfaces. When bond coat starts to dry and has lost its sheen, apply premixed patching
mortar to area and consolidate mortar; strike off patch area slightly higher than surrounding
surface; leave patch undisturbed for at least 1 hour to permit shrinkage; finish area to match
adjacent surfaces and keep damp for curing for at least 7 days.
G. Tie Holes: Below grade, clean and dampen as specified for preparation of patched area; fill holes
solid with patching mortar and cure as specified hereinbefore. Above grade, tie holes to be
placed 24"o.c. in each direction, in similar pattern, as approved by Engineer. Clean hole and
cover metal insert with dab of silicone sealant.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engineer will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
End of Section 03 30 00
November 15, 2018 03 30 00- 13
Sign Shop Expansion 05 50 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide miscellaneous metal items as required for completion of the work; include all bending,
forming, cutting, welding and drilling of such items as necessary for installation and completion.
Provide miscellaneous items as shown on drawings and as required.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast in Place Concrete
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWS Code: Conform with American Welding Society Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1.
B. Conform to the following Specifications as supplemented and modified herein.
1. Steel Fabrication and Construction: Manual of Steel Construction by American Institute of
Steel Construction.
2. Welded Connections: Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings, and Specifications for the Design of High Gage Cold Formed Steel
Structural Members, Section 4.2.1, issued by the American Institute of Steel Construction.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval; show details of fabrication and erection; indicate dimensions,
shapes, and connections of all items.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics, and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricator: Experienced in the fabrication and working of inetal including cutting, bending,
forming, and finishing; must be approved by Engineer.
B. Welders: Certified by Washington Association of Building Officials, WABO; for structural welding,
submit qualification test reports and bearing witness certification of independent laboratory and
inspection service. If welder has not been engaged in welding process for a period of 3 or more
months, requalify before permitting him to do structural welding work.
1.06 HANDLING
August 1, 2018 05 50 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 05 50 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 2 of 3
A. Shipping and Storage: Ship, store, and handle all items so as to protect all items from rust,
misuse, and abuse; no bent or otherwise deformed items will be accepted; repair shop treatment
as required before installation.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Wide Flange and other Shapes: ASTM A992-GR50.
B. Pipe:ASTM A53.
C. Tubing: ASTM A500.
D. "Best" Commercial quality mild steel for steel not otherwise specified.
E. Primer: As specified in Section 09 91 00.
F. Bollards: Fabricate per drawings. Hot-dip galvanize.
G. Supports for Relocated Antenna
2.02 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Form to accurate sizes and shapes with sharp lines and angles; punch and shear to leave
clean surfaces. Weld or rivet permanent connections; grind exposed welds flush and
smooth.
2. Provide holes and connections for work of other trades. Detail joints and fastenings for
ample strength and stiffness; conceal wherever possible. Where exposed to weather,
form to exclude water.
3. Mill machine joints to a close fit. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, brackets for a neat
substantial assembly.
B. Welding: Perform welding by use of electrical arc welding process. In making welded joints and
joining component parts, use types of welds and filler metal shown on drawings. For details of
joints, technique ofwelding employed, appearance and quality ofwelds made, and the methods
used in correcting defective work, conform to referenced standards. All exposed welds to be
continuous, filled and ground flush with adjacent surfaces.
C. Galvanizing: Comply with ASTM A123 for zinc coating applied on products fabricated from rolled
or pressed steel shapes, plates, bars and strips. ASTM A386 for zinc coating on assembled steel
products. Weight of coatings per Table I for class and thickness of material to be coated. Except
for bolts, nuts, do galvanizing after fabrication.
D. Shop Finishes of Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, remove all rust, scale,
grease, and oil; wire-brush or chemically clean as approved. Touch-up damaged areas in
August 1, 2018 05 50 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 05 50 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 3 of 3
galvanized coatings where required with Galv-Weld or Galvicon. Prime all ferrous metal surfaces,
except surfaces to be field welded in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of bollards with concrete formwork and cast in place concrete.
End of Section 05 50 00
August 1, 2018 05 50 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 06 10 53
City of Renton Public Works Shops ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 06 1053 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood construction with sawn lumber.
B. Wood construction with plywood.
C. Wood blocking as necessary for surface-mounted items.
D. Wood construction with plywood webbed joists (TJI's).
E. Parking Guardrails.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Plywood for interior finish walls is in Section 06 20 20.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Grading Rules: Provide lumber and plywood graded in accordance with official grading rules of
association having jurisdiction; furnish official certification of inspection, if and when requested.
1. Softwoods: Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumberofthe Western Wood
Products Association.
2. Plywood: American Plywood Association.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Materials: Provide lumber with moisture content of no more than 19%, furnish moisture content
certificates if requested.
B. TJI's : These products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the
National Evaluation Service, Inc., (NES) Report No. NER-200.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Rough Hardware/Connections: Provide shop drawings of all connectors, connections, and rough
hardware which must be specially fabricated. Provide catalog of all standard items.
C. Samples of all fasteners to be substituted for common nails shall be submitted for approval with
test reports and manufacturer's certification per the specifications. All fasteners shall be stored in
the manufacturer's original packaging till installed. Any fastener not stored in the manufacturer's
packaging shall be removed from the site.
D. PSL, TJI
August 1, 2018 06 10 53- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 06 10 53
City of Renton Public Works Shops ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 2 of 4
1. Shop drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and
placement in the building.
2. Production: Do not proceed with fabrication and/or cutting until Shop Drawings and
Design Calculations have been reviewed by the Engineer.
1.06 HANDLING
A. Shipping and Storage: Ship and store lumber and all other materials to protect from damage and
exposure to moisture. Do not let materials sit in the rain. Do not let installed products be
exposed to the rain.
PART 2— PRODUCTS AND ASSEMBLIES
2.01 ROUGH LUMBER
A. Beams & Ledgers up to a 4x12 size: Douglas Fir No. 2.
B. Blocking: Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction.
2.02 PLYWOOD
A. Exterior grade veneer core plywood graded in accordance with rules of the American Plywood
Association; exterior type glue; sizes and thicknesses as indicated on drawings or as specified
hereinafter.
B. Sturdi-Floor at the deck above the ceiling of the mechanical room in Bid Alterrnate 2.
C. Oriented Strand Board (OSB), Particleboard, and Waferboard are not allowed.
2.03 TJ I's
A. TJI's shall be by Trus Joist Macmillan or approved equivalent. Flange members, web
members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions of NES Report No. NER-200.
B. Fabrication: The TJIR joists shall be manufactured in a plant approved for fabrication by
the building code and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection agency.
C. Tolerances
Depth: + 0" - 1/16"
Flange Width: ± 1/32"
D. Identification: Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist type, NER
report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and the independent inspection
agency's logo.
2.04 PARKING GUARDRAILS
A. Refer to WSDOT manual on Traffic Barriers 1610.04 for design guidance:
http://www.wsdot.wa.pov/publications/manuals/fulltext/M22-01/1610.pdf
B. All posts and blocks shall be 8x8 treated timber.
August 1, 2018 06 10 53-2
Sign Shop Expansion 06 10 53
City of Renton Public Works Shops ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 3 of 4
C. Rail shall be Type 1.
D. Refer to drawings for connections, spacing, and specific design criteria.
2.04 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide all necessary spikes, nails, screws and bolts for proper installation of rough carpentry;
sizes and quantities as indicated; where not indicated, provide sizes and quantities as required by
Code or as directed; galvanized.
1. Nails and Spikes: Common, as indicated or in accordance with Chapter 23 of the IBC.
2. All fasteners shall be stored in the manufacturer's original packaging till installed. Any
fastener not stored in the manufacturer's packaging shall be removed from the site.
B. Provide all necessary hardware. Unless otherwise noted, all framing hardware called for on
drawings shall be by Simpson Strong-Tie. Note that some connectors are not standard shapes or
sizes. See drawings for locations and/or details. Hardware shall be attached per manufacturer's
recommendations using all specified fasteners. Equivalent IBC approved products by other
manufacturers may be substituted, upon approval by Engineer but appearance must be the same.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Provide all incidentals and accessories, tools, fastenings, and equipment necessary for the
complete installation of rough carpentry.
2.06 GALVANIZING
A. All metal accessories which are to be exposed to weather, or which are adjacent to wet use
areas in the facilities, shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plywood per the structural details.
B. Locate blocking to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Erection and Installation of PSL's:
1. The ParallamR PSL, if stored prior to erection, shall be protected from the weather. It
shall be erected and installed in accordance with the Plans, and any Trus Joist MacMillan
drawings and installation suggestions which may be provided. Temporary construction
loads which cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. Holes, cuts or
notches not previously approved by Trus Joist MacMillan engineering shall not be
permitted.
2. Connections: Lateral nail holdings and withdrawal area as provided in the code for
Douglas fir sawn lumber. Nails installed parallel to the glue lines on the narrow face shall
not be spaced closer than 4 inches for 10-penny common nails and 3 inches for 8-penny
common nails. Nails installed perpendicular to the glue lines on the wide face shall be
August 1, 2018 06 10 53-3
Sign Shop Expansion 06 10 53
City of Renton Public Works Shops ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 4 of 4
installed in accordance with the code. Holding power of bolts installed perpendicular to
the glue lines is as provided in the code for dense Douglas fir.
3. Inspection: The Contractor shall give notification to the Trus Joist MacMillan
representative prior to enclosing the ParallamR PSL to provide opportunity for inspection
of the installation.
End of Section 06 10 53
August 1, 2018 06 10 53-4
Sign Shop Expansion 06 20 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of doors and hardware
B. Installation of interior plywood walls used as finished surfaces
C. Installation of base trim
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 53 - Rough Carpentry
B. Section 08 11 13—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
D. Section 09 91 00 - Painting
1.03 REGULATIONS
A. Grading Rules: Provide lumber and plywood graded in accordance with official grading rules of
association having jurisdiction; furnish official certificate of inspection, if and when requested.
1.04 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Conform with requirements of"Quality Standards"of the Architectural Woodwork Institute,
hereinafter called AWI, as supplemented and modified herein.
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Custom Grade quality.
B. Materials: Provide kiln-dried finish wood of not more than 9% moisture content for hardwoods
and 12% for softwoods when delivered to the project; furnish moisture content certificate, if and
when requested.
C. Fabricator: Fabricator of finish carpentry items must have plant and facilities adequate to
fabricate required items; must be regularly engaged in the production of similar type work and
able to show examples of his work satisfactory to the Engineer; must be approved by the
Engineer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
August 1, 2018 06 20 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 06 20 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 2 of 3
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval; show layout of plywood panels; show connections to
adjacent construction and materials or work of other trades.
C. Samples: Submit samples of proposed wood solids and veneers; show color, grain pattern, and
finish. Obtain approval of samples prior to fabrication of any work.
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
1.07 COLOR AND FINISH STANDARDS
A. Colors and patterns of plastic laminate and other materials as selected by Engineer.
1.08 HANDLING
A. Shipping and Storage: Take care to protect finish woodwork from damage at all times up until
acceptance of the work by the Engineer. Store finish woodwork, scheduled for installation of the
interior of the project, in warm, dry place; maintain temperature and humidity conditions of
storage at conditions approximating conditions anticipated in the finish project.
B. Precautions: Delay installation of finished woodwork until fabricated items have acclimated to
conditions of temperature and humidity in the project; warped or distorted items will not be
accepted. Install no finished woodwork until project is dry so as to prevent any damage due to
excessive moisture contact changes.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish to the Engineer complete description, including list of materials and methods, of
recommended procedures to be followed for care and maintenance of all finishes and materials.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 PLYWOOD
A. Interior exposed plywood wall.
1. A/C Fir or Hemlock Plywood
2. Install with GRK low profile cabinet screws, #8 x 1 'h".
2.02 BASE TRIM
A. Base material at exposed plywood wall and at GWB walls on curbs
1. Clear hemlock, 1 x 4
PART 3 -EXECUTION
August 1, 2018 06 20 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 06 20 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops FINISH CARPENTRY
Page 3 of 3
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing prior to beginning work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's recommendations, and
details indicated on drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Installation of Finish Hardware
1. Finish hardware for doors is specified elsewhere, but installed herein. Install finish
hardware on doors and frames using only experienced personnel and skilled craftsmen;
install to operate freely, without binding or sticking, to the Engineer's satisfaction. Install
with all horizontal edges level, all vertical edges plumb, and all edges parallel with
adjacent lines of construction. After installation protect all finished hardware during
remaining construction period using wrapping supplied by hardware manufacturer or
other approved means.
2. Locations: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, conform to SDI recommendations.
B. Installation of Doors
1. Doors are specified elsewhere, but installed herein. Hang doors scheduled on drawings
in accurate locations as indicated.
2. Hanging: Hang doors to 1/8" clearance at tops and edges. Provide 1/8"from bottom of
door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Verify clearances required for carpeting
and make no jobsite fitting cuts unless approved. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4"from bottom of door to top of threshold. Hang pairs of doors as
specified, but with 3/32" clearance at meeting edges.
3. Demonstration: Upon completion of hanging, demonstrate that doors operate freely
without binding, and when closed with moderate force will latch properly.
4. Adjusting: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, touch up marred or abraded finished surfaces and wipe down
surfaces to remove fingerprints and markings, and leave in clean condition.
End of Section 06 20 00
August 1, 2018 06 20 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 21 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops INSULATION
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 07 2100 - INSULATION
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Thermal rigid insulation.
2. Fibrous Building Insulation
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 51 00 - Built-Up Bituminous Membrane Roofing
B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Materials: Furnish only materials of tested and certified thermal resistance and performance
characteristics.
B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty for Banded Liner Systems: Manufacturer's standard warranty
against defects in materials for a period of 10 years commencing on the date of final completion
and acceptance. Provide written warranty on completion of project.
1.04 THERMAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Insulation R-Value of 38 for installed roof system.
B. Insulation R-Value of 21 cavity installed wall system at Framed Building.
C. The installed roof and wall systems shall provide a continuous vapor barrier.
D. Insulation R-Value of 10 for rigid insulation at foundations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type and class of insulation, complete with fastenings and
adhesives proposed for use; obtain approval before proceeding
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
August 1, 2018 07 21 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 21 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops INSULATION
Page 2 of 3
1.06 HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation materials in original cartons or containers with manufacturer's labels thereon;
see that each label clearly states thermal resistance and conductance and manufacturer's name;
do not remove labels or open cartons until Engineer has been asked if inspection is necessary.
B. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and
other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions
for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBROUS BUILDING INSULATION: Type A
A. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
Insulation shall be formaldehyde-free
B. Faced Mineral-fiber blanket insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil-scrim
vapor retarder membrane on one face. Maximum perm rating of.5.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: CertainTeed, Owens Corning, Johns Mansville.
2.02 RIGID INSULATION: Type B
A. Thermal Rigid Insulation:
1. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation at exterior foundation walls at below-grade
locations and out the outside face of new plywood exterior walls as shown on drawings:
a. Acceptable Products: Owens Corning Foamular, Dow Styrofoam or approved
equal.
b. Materials/Properties:
1) Provide thickness required to achieve indicated R-value as indicated on
Drawings. Conform to referenced ASTM C518 for aged R-value per inch
of thickness.
2) Minimum Compressive Strength: ASTM D1621, 25 psi.
3) Maximum Water Absorption: ASTM C272, 0.3% by volume.
4) Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, 1.1 perm (max)for one inch of
product.
5) Insulation board to meet physical property requirements of referenced
ASTM C578, Type IV.
6) Edges: Square edged.
c. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.03 RIGID INSULATION: Type C
August 1, 2018 07 21 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 21 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
A. Thermal Rigid Insulation:
1. Polyisocyanurate D on the new roof areas shown on drawings:
a. Acceptable Products by: Hunter, Atlas, Rmax or approved equal.
b. Materials/Properties:
1) Provide thickness required to achieve indicated R-value as indicated on
Drawings. Conform to referenced ASTM C518 for aged R-value per inch
of thickness.
2) Edges: Square edged.
c. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure that building structure including any bracing and any concealed building systems are
completed and approved before installing insulation.
3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL
A. Type A: Batt or Blanket Insulation: Cut insulation in as long lengths as practicable and secure to
construction; tape edges where two lengths abut. Take care to see that total area is covered and
that batts are accurately placed for complete insulation. Install where indicated.
B. Type B: Rigid Insulation at exterior foundation walls: Install where indicated on drawings with
liquid waterproofing as an adhesive to the exterior wall. Types as recommended by the insulation
man ufactu re r.
C. Type C: Rigid Insulation at roof: Mechanically fasten per the drawings.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt from vapor barrier fabric using a soft cloth with soap and water or non-abrasive
household cleaner. Solvent-based cleaners and abrasive pads should be avoided.
3.04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. Installation contractor must have a site-specific safety plan and comply with all OSHA applicable
local rules and regulations when installing this system.
End of Section 07 21 00
August 1, 2018 07 21 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 25 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 2500 - WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide and install new weather resistive barrier(WRB)at all exterior wall sheathing.
B. Provide and install flexible membrane flashing at all openings and penetrations in wall sheathing.
C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any conflicts that may result between specified
design or performance criteria and any specified product.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06 10 53 Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07 46 40 Fiber Cement Siding
C. Section 07 51 00 Built-Up Modified Asphalt Membrane Roofing
D. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal flashing and Trim
E. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
C. International Code Council Acceptance Criteria (ICC-ES-AC)
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements
B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data, and installation instructions of
manufacturer equaling or exceeding those specified.
C. Shop Drawings: If installation varies from details in the drawings, provide 1-1/2"scale drawings
showing relationship of inembrane to:
1. Framing or blocking members
2. Sheathing
3. All exterior cladding and corner conditions
4. Door and window frames
5. Sill pans, head flashing, any other window flashings
August 1, 2018 07 25 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 25 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
Page 2 of 5
6. Through wall metal flashing
7. Pipe, conduit, and duct penetrations
D. Samples:
1. 8-1/2 x 11 inch square of each weather resistive barrier membrane.
2. Tapes—single and double sided
3. 12" long section of sill pan and in actual width to be installed
4. Sample of batten 6" long by'h" depth
5. Provide materials and fasteners for mock-up
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide manufacturer's instructions showing the recommended
procedures and sequence of installation of inembrane and accessories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer with successful experience in the installation of air barrier/secondary weather
resistant barriers.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all materials through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1. Review requirements for membrane, including surface preparation specified under
other sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, temporary weather protection, forecasted
weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and
inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
D. Install job mock-up using specified air barrier/secondary weather resistant and air barrier with
system of fastening and taping seams as per manufacturer's instructions. Obtain Engineer's
approval of system for appearance and workmanship standard.
E. Manufacturer's Product Warranty for Weather Resistive Barrier: Manufacturer's standard
warranty against defects in materials for a period of 20 years commencing on the date of final
completion and acceptance. Provide written warranty on completion of project.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, and product brand name.
B. Store rolls under cover, on a clean, level surface, either flat or upright.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
August 1, 2018 07 25 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 25 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
Page 3 of 5
2.01 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (WRB)
A. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products or
approved equal:
WrapShield SA: Orange , distributed by VaproShield LLC, Phone (866)731-7663,
www.vaproshield.com, Tyvek, or HardieWrap
B. Physical Properties:
1. Color: Exterior Orange to weather side, White on interior
2. Thickness and weight: 0.020 inches thick and 5.014 oz./sq. yd.
3. Tensile Strength: ASTM D882, Pass
4. Dry Breaking Force: ASTM D5034, Pass
5. Water Resistance (control and weathered specimens): AATCC 127, Pass
6. Water Resistance (Ponding): ASTM D779, Pass
7. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Pass
8. Low Temperature Bend: AC38, Pass
9. Air Permeance of Building Materials: ASTM 2178, Pass
10. Air Leakage Through Wall Systems: ASTM E 283, Pass
11. Air Retarder Materials &Systems: ASTM 1677, Pass
12. Flamespread Index: ASTM E-84, Pass
13. Smoke Development Index: ASTM E-84, Pass
14. Water Resistance (UBC Flashing Requirements): ASTM 2112, Pass
C. Tape:
1. Single-Sided Tape:
a. 3"VaproTape (single-sided)20 mil., for use to secure WrapShield to itself and to
substrates.
2. Double-Sided Sealing Tape:
a. 1"VaproTape (double-sided)30 mil., for use to seal Wrap Shield to itself and to
substrates.
b. 1" wide butyl rubber tape, subject to approval of the Engineer.
D. Caulks and Sealant: As approved and recommended by membrane manufacturer
E. Fasteners: Plywood Sheathing Application
1. Minimum No. 12-gage (.0129 inch-shank diameter(2.11 mm))corrosion resistant steel or
stainless steel nails having a minimum 3/8" diameter head.
OR
2. No. 14 gage (.083 inch-shank diameter (2.11 mm))corrosion resistant galvanized steel or
stainless steel nails having a 1" diameter cap
OR
3. Minimum No. 16 gage (.065 inch-leg diameter(1.65mm))stainless steel or galvanized
staples having minimum 7/16" (11.1 mm) crowns
2.02 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE FLASHING
August 1, 2018 07 25 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 25 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
Page 4 of 5
A. Flexible membrane flashing for all window, door, and other wall openings to be Blueskin SA, self
adhesive Air/Vapor barrier membrane, by Henry, or VaproFlashing by VaproShield, or approved
equal. Install at locations and widths as shown on drawings.
2.03 ROOF UNDERLAYMENT
A. See Roofing Section 07 51 00 for underlayment details.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Correct conditions detrimental to timely
and proper completion of work. Contractor is responsible for condition of substrate.
B. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide
clean and dry substrate to breathable membrane application.
C. Ensure items which pass through WRB are properly and rigidly installed, substrate is free of
projections and irregularities which may be detrimental to proper installation of WRB.
3.02 PENETRATIONS
A. Pipes and Conduit: Install manufactured penetration sleeves sized for the penetration and
installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations:
1. Install sheets to lay smooth without folds or bunches of material.
2. Seam Overlap: As recommended by manufacturer for specific weather resistive material
and application indicated.
3. Sealing: Seal edges and items projecting through vapor retarders and vapor barriers.
C. Inspect and repair WRB prior to application of finish material over WRB; tape tears, perforations,
and similar damage.
3.03 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Flashing Penetrations:
1. Cut a piece of WrapShield to act as a "skirt" around counter flashed penetrations.
Distance from penetration to edge of barrier"skirt" minimum of 12 inches.
2. Make four cuts to form a star shape and place over penetration snugly.
3. Extend "ears"of material along vertical penetration and seal with VaproTape (single-
sided).
4. Tape top edge of"skirt"to wall using VaproTape (single sided). Do not tape bottom edge.
August 1, 2018 07 25 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 07 25 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
Page 5 of 5
5. Ensure WrapShield is slipped under bottom edge of penetration "skirt" and shingled over
taped top edge.
6. Seal top and sides with VaproTape (double-sided).
7. Ensure whole "skirt" assembly is flashed appropriately with metal.
C. Weather Resistive Barrier Installation:
1. Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions over exterior sheathing.
Secure the membrane so that the subsurface is protected from weather until cladding can
be installed.
a. First, apply flexible membrane flashing at all openings per manufacturer's
recommendations and as and detailed.
b. Next, starting from the bottom, unroll membrane, orange side out, mechanically
fastening top and bottom, 2 feet on center. Place a continuous bead of non-
skinning butyl sealant or butyl tape on foundation wall and seal WrapShield to it.
c. Extend 6"over starting corner.
d. Fasten at top and bottom of roll at 2"from edge of WrapShield to center of
fasteners.
e. Shingle next layers of WrapShield, ensuring minimum 6" horizontal and minimum
12" vertical laps. Ensure minimum 6" horizontal and minimum 6" vertical laps if
taped with VaproTape (single-sided)at vertical laps. Do not place vertical laps
above windows.
f. Seal against jambs of openings with 1"VaproTape (double-sided tape). Vertical
laps shall be a minimum of 6"with taped joints or 12"without tape. Horizontal
laps shall be a minimum of 6".
D. Protection:
1. Protect weather resistive barriers from damage during construction and ultraviolet light,
harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.
2. Repair torn breathable membrane as follows: Insert a full height piece of inembrane
extending 12" horizontally beyond the damage and extend up and under the membrane
above. Mechanically attach membrane to substrate top and bottom.
End of Section 07 25 00
August 1, 2018 07 25 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 07 46 40
City of Renton Public Works Shops FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 4640 - FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cementitious express/reveal jointed panel with accessories. (James Hardie HZ10 Hardie
Reveal Panels.)
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 53— Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07 21 00— Insulation.
C. Section 07 25 00 Weather Resistive Barriers.
D. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing.
E. Section 09 91 00 Painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AATCC127-Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
B. TAPPI —T460 -Air Resistance of Paper(Gurley Method).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Installation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Manufacturer's best practice guide.
4. Technical data sheet.
5. Standard CAD drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of
cladding junctions and penetrations which are outside the scope of the standard details
and specifications provided by the manufacturer.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by
6 inches (100 by 150 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are
approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
August 1, 2018 07 46 40- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 46 40
City of Renton Public Works Shops FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page 2 of 5
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping.
Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide Hardie HZ10 Reveal Panel Limited Product Warranty,
with 30-year limited product warranty against manufacturing defects.
1. Application Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years.
PART II -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located at: 231
South LaSalle Street Unit 2000, Chicago, IL 60606. ASD. Toll Free Tel: 866-274-3464;
Tel: 312-705-6000; Email: request info (info@jameshardie.com); Web:
http://www.jameshardiepros.com/Products/Hardie-Reveal-Panel-System
B. Requests for approval of equal substitutions will be considered in accordance with
provisions of Section 01 42 00.
2.2 CLADDING
A. Cement Cladding Panels: Hardie Reveal Panel as manufactured by James Hardie
Building Products, Inc. 7/16 inches thick, 3 feet 11.5 inches (1206 mm)wide by 7 feet
11.5 inches (2426 mm) long. Product shall be engineered for climate conditions.
1. Manufacturer's Climate Zone Product: HZ10 for hot humid and wet climates with
a yellow tint primer.
B. Code Compliance Requirement for Siding Materials:
1. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II.
2. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 136 as a noncombustible material.
3. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index= 0, Smoke
Developed Index= 5.
4. Fiber-cement siding, complies with ASTM E 119 1 hour and 2 hour fire resistive
assemblies listed with Warnock Hersey.
5. Fiber-cement siding, tested to ASTM E330 for Transverse Loads.
6. Intertek Warnock Hersey Product Listing.
7. Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet.
2.3 WEATHER BARRIER
A. Weather Barrier: James Hardie HardieWrap and HardieWrap Flashing and Seam Tapes
or Equivalent.
August 1, 2018 07 46 40-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 46 40
City of Renton Public Works Shops FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page 3 of 5
B. Code Compliance Requirement for Weather Barrier:
1. Thickness, 11 mil sheet.
2. Breathability in accordance with ASTM E96.
3. Tear strength in accordance with ASTM D1117.
4. Water resistance in accordance with AATCC127.
5. Air Penetration in accordance with TAPPI —T460.
6. HardieWrap Weather Barrier ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-2258.
2.4 FURRING (STRAPPING)
A. Rainscreen Cavity: Install Hardie Reveal Panels on a drained and vented rainscreen
cavity,with a minimum 3/8 inch (19mm) air cavity. Selection of cavity vent materials shall
be incorporated into the design to prevent insect and pest entry.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Trims: RevealT"' Trims manufactured by Custom Aluminum of Elgin, IL in the following
profiles supplied by James Hardie. Aluminum alloy 6063-T5 with a minimum thickness of
0.050 inch. All reveal trims are 8 feet in length.
1. Recess horizontal trim.
2. Recess vertical trim.
3. Recess horizontal edge trim.
4. Recess vertical F-trim.
5. Recess outside corner trim.
6. Recess drainage flashing.
B. Finishes of Reveal Trims:
1. Primed for field painting; coating tested to ASTM D3363, ASTM D3359, D2794,
D4585, D523, and D1308.
2. Clear anodized; conforming to ASTM B244 and ASTM B136.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: For attaching Hardie Reveal Panel to a rain screen provide the following:
1. Wood Framing, Exposed Screws: No. 10 by 0.472 inch head diameter by 1.5
inch long.
2. Wood Framing, Countersunk Screws: No 8 by 0.39 inch head diameter by 1-5/8
inch long.
3. Fasteners shall be of high quality stainless steel to ensure resistance to
corrosion. For field painting, fasteners shall be treated to accept paint adhesion.
a. Alternatives must be approved by the architect. e.g. decorative screws,
nails, bugle head screws, and similar items.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer.
August 1, 2018 07 46 40-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 46 40
City of Renton Public Works Shops FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page 4 of 5
1. Primer: Factory applied sealer/primer by James Hardie. Apply flat sheen finishes
to panels.
2. Topcoat: Refer to Section 09900 and Exterior Finish Schedule.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If framing preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Ensure that drainage plane in intact and all penetrations are sealed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Wood Framing: Stud 16 inches maximum framing complying with local building codes,
including the use of water-resistive barriers and/or vapor barriers where required.
Minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)face and straight, true, of uniform dimensions and
properly aligned.
1. Install water-resistive barriers and claddings to dry surfaces.
2. Repair any punctures or tears in the water-resistive barrier prior to the installation
of the siding.
3. Protect siding from other trades.
B. Furring: Install furring on a minimum 3/4 inch (19mm) rainscreen cavity, or in accordance
with local building code for rainscreen requirements.
C. Installation: Install materials and fill exposed fastener locations in strict accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended materials.
1. Fastening Method: Hidden
2. Place fasteners no closer than 3/4 inch (9.5 mm)from panel edges and 2 inches
(51 mm)from panel corners.
3. Use fasteners as specified in the James Hardie Tech Data sheet and in the
Hardie Reveal Panel Installation Instruction.
4. Install panel using 1/2 inch (13 mm)spacers at horizontal joints. Leave bottom
edge of panel above all horizontal trims exposed, no caulking shall be placed at
this overlap of Horizontal Reveal Trim. Factory primed edge shall always be
used.
5. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the bottom edge of siding and any
other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions
and as determined by James Hardie Zone.
6. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
7. Specific framing and fastener requirements - refer to the applicable building code
compliance reports.
August 1, 2018 07 46 40-4
Sign Shop Expansion 07 46 40
City of Renton Public Works Shops FIBER CEMENT SIDING
Page 5 of 5
3.4 FINISHING
A. Finish factory primed siding with a minimum of one coat of high quality 100 percent
acrylic exterior flat grade paint with flat finish within 180 days of installation. Follow paint
manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions.
B. Field cut edges shall be coated during the installation process using an exterior grade
primer/sealer that is compatible with the type of paint to use on project.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
End of Section 07 46 40
August 1, 2018 07 46 40-5
Sign Shop Expansion 07 51 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILT UP MODIFIED ASPHALT
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 5100 - BUILT-UP MODIFIED ASPHALT MEMBRANE
ROOFING
PART1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
Roofing to consist of coverboard and hot asphalt built-up roof over the nailed basesheet.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 62 00—Sheet Metal flashing and Trim
B. Section 07 92 00—Joint Sealants
C. Section 11 24 29— Fall Restraints
D. Division 22— Plumbing
E. Division 23— Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Product data, Roofing System: Submit the name of the manufacturer and specification numbers
and product names of all materials proposed for use in the work. Include in submittal installation
instructions and general recommendations for each principal roofing system product required.
Include data substantiating that the materials comply with requirements, including certificates and
delivery logs for bulk materials.
C. Manufacturers: Provide primary products, including each type of roofing ply, and flashing, as
specified from one manufacturer. Provide secondary products, which are acceptable to, and
approved by, the manufacturer of the primary products. Fire rating of system to be U.L Class C,
or as approved by other recognized laboratory.
D. Provide the Engineer with a 10 year NDL (no dollar limit)workmanship and material system
replacement guaranty from the manufacturer that includes repair of blisters, and does not exclude
traffic expected on a roof.
E. Provide the Engineer with a 2 year workmanship and materials guaranty from the contractor.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Installer Responsibility: A single installer(contractor)shall perform the work, including
sheet metal work, as required by this specification; and shall be a firm specializing in roofing
system work who has been in business under the same name and ownership for at least 5
years, capable of showing successful installations similar to the work required for this project.
The roofing contractor shall be certified as an approved applicator contractor by the manufacturer
of the roofing system. EVIDENCE OF SAID CERTIFICATION SHALL BE WRITTEN TO THE
ENGINEER AND SIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER.
B. Contractor: Notify Engineer and Roofing Consultant 24 hours (one full working day) prior to
commencement of work. The Engineer may provide special inspection of the roofing application.
Such inspection will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for proper completion of the work.
August 1, 2018 07 51 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 51 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILT UP MODIFIED ASPHALT
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 2 of 5
C. Contractor: Provide and install primary products, including each type of roofing ply, and flashings,
as specified from one manufacturer. Provide secondary products, which are acceptable to, and
approved by, the manufacturer of the primary products. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Pre-roofing conference: Prior to the installation of the roofing system, meet at the project site with
the roofing contractor, the Engineer, Roofing Consultant, and other entities interested in the
performance of the roofing system. Review the requirements (contract documents), submittals,
proposed installation schedule, location and storage of materials, requirements for inspections
and testing or certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing regulations, insurance
requirements, proposed installation procedures, and any other items that may be required for
completion of the project. If ineeting ends with substantial disagreement between parties,
determine how disagreement will be resolved, and set date for reconvened meeting.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Material shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers
and in quantities sufficient to allow continuity of application.
B. Storage: Obtain permission of Engineer for roof top storage. If roof top storage of materials is
used, do not exceed the allowable load for the structure. Materials shall be stored out of direct
exposure to the elements. Roll goods shall be stored on end for built-up roof products, on side for
single ply roof products, or as appropriate, on a clean, flat surface. Material shall be protected
against moisture so as not to allow moisture to penetrate the cover or condensation to occur
beneath the cover. Materials shall be secured in such a manner during storage and installation to
prevent movement by the wind.
C. Handling: Material shall be handled in such a manner as to preclude damage and contamination
with moisture or foreign matter.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. At ambient temperatures of 40°or less, including wind chill, precautions must be taken to ensure
that cements and adhesives maintain the minimum acceptable temperature at the point of
application as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer.
B. Roof deck shall be clean and dry before any roofing work proceeds. Roofing shall not proceed
during precipitation, nor when moisture from dew is present, or if precipitation or other moisture
source is expected.
C. Protection against staining and mechanical damage shall be provided for adjacent surfaces as
required during application of roofing. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and
deterioration until the date of Substantial Completion.
D. Verify that concrete used in the roof drain areas is cured before applying roofing materials.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE BID MATERIALS
A. Base Bid Roofing to consist of:
Layer Product/Membrane
Coverboard Fiberglass Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: (DensDeck): Fiberglass mat with
non-asphaltic coated boards with the following characteristics: Thickness: 5/8
August 1, 2018 07 51 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 51 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILT UP MODIFIED ASPHALT
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 3 of 5
inch. Width: 4 feet. Length: [4 feet] [8 feet]. Weight: 2.5 Ib/sq. ft. Surfacing:
Fiberglass mat with non-asphaltic coating. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM
C473): 100 Ibf, minimum. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches. Permeance
(ASTM E96): greater than 17 perms. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.67.Water
Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weigh. Compressive
Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 900 pounds per square inch.
Surface Water Absor tion ASTM C473 : Not more than 2 rams.
Base Sheet over One ply lightweight SBS modified base sheet, nailed on the wood deck at
Wood Deck or 6 inches on seams and 12 inches staggered pattern on the wood deck,
Coverboard and set in hot Type IV asphalt where over the coverboard: Malarkey 501,
or equivalent by Johns Manville or GAF.
Two-P/y Midply Two Plies fiberglass set in hot Type IV asphalt: Malarkey Type IV
Premium, or equivalent by Johns Manville or GAF.
Provide a squeegee glaze coat of hot asphalt if the capsheet will not be applied
in the same day.
Capsheet One ply lightweight SBS modified granular surface cap sheet, with
fiberglass or polyester reinforcing set in hot Type IV asphalt: Malarkey
601 SBS Cap sheet, or equivalent by Johns Manville or GAF.
Flashing P/y Sheet Glass-reinforced asphalt lightweight SBS modified base sheet set in hot
Type IV asphalt: Malarkey 501, or equivalent by Johns Manville or GAF.
Flashing Surface One ply SBS asphalt elastomer glass or polyester reinforced sheet
Sheet granular surface set in hot Type IV asphalt, color white: Malarkey
Panoply Cap Sheet, or equivalent by Johns Manville or GAF.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Mechanical Fasteners for Securing Basesheet Layer to Deck: Round Top Steel Cap Nails by
National Nail, or comparable. Dimpled up square head nails are not acceptable.
B. Sealant to be a high-grade urethane-based product, such as Sonneborn NP-1, ChemCalk 900, or
Vulkem 921. Provide temperature sensitive sealant as necessary for heated stack vents.
C. Cant strips to be three (3) inch perlite, unless otherwise specified, as manufactured by BMCA
(GAF).
D. Provide 4 Ib/sf lead flashing and caps for soil stacks and conduit penetrations. Pre-prime with
asphalt primer and set in cold adhesive as detailed in manufacturer's instructions. Where soil
stacks exceed height of lead flashing, provide uncured EPDM boot, stainless steel clamping rings,
and sealant.
E. Roof protection pad material to be composed of modified bitumen with polyester reinforcing and
granular surfacing. The materials shall be manufactured in roll form with a width of 30 inches and
a minimum thickness of 217 mils, type Paratread, as manufactured by Siplast, or equal.
F. Asphalt primer to be ASTM D-4173, or as approved by the system manufacturer.
G. Asphalt shall be certified for full compliance with the requirements for Type IV asphalt listed in
Table 1, ASTM D-312. Each container, or bulk shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous
temperature (EVT), the finished blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point(FP). Use Type
asphalt as instructed by roofing materials manufacturer.
H. Plastic cement shall be asphalt cutback, reinforced with non-asbestos fibers.
I. Provide 4 Ib/sf lead sheets in cast iron drain sumps, 30"square, both sides primed and set in
August 1, 2018 07 51 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 51 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILT UP MODIFIED ASPHALT
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 4 of 5
mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. A pre-construction conference including the Owner, Contractor, Engineer, Consultant, and roofing
materials manufacturer's representative shall be conducted prior to the application of roofing
material.
B. Contractor shall verify that work penetrating the roof deck, or which may otherwise impact or affect
the roofing, has been properly completed.
3.02 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Installation of inechanical equipment curbs, vents, roof drains, overflow drains, and concrete
setting beds for the drains to be completed by others, but work is to be directed, approved, and
accepted by roofer.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. General: All surfaces shall be swept clean prior to commencement of roofing.
B. Roofer to remove existing roofing and insulation and all existing roof top mounted devices and
prep roof for new roofing system.
C. The decking shall present as smooth a surface as possible onto which the insulation can be
applied.
D. The insulation shall present a smooth surface to accept the roof inembrane. No more insulation
shall be installed than can be covered with roofing membrane, at least through the two-ply
application, in the same day.
3.04 APPLICATION —COVERBOARD OVER INSULATION
A. General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and
the following requirements. Application of roofing shall immediately follow application of
coverboard as a continuous operation. Should manufacturer's specifications and owner's
specifications conflict, use the more stringent of the two.
B. DensDeck Coverboard: Adhered or Mechanically Attached: As recommended by roof system
and/or adhesive manufacturer or as required by FM or UL guidelines for wind uplift resistance.
Refer to the current"Product Catalog" Georgia-Pacific Gypsum for Manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.05 APPLICATION —BASESHEET OVER WOOD DECK
A. Nail the basesheet at 6 inches on seams and 12 inches staggered pattern on the wood deck.
3.06 APPLICATION -ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and
the following requirements. Should the manufacturer's and these specifications conflict, use more
stringent. Application of roofing shall immediately follow the coverboard as a continuous
operation.
B. Roofing Membrane: All layers (including basesheet over coverboard)shall be laid free of wrinkles,
August 1, 2018 07 51 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 07 51 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops BUILT UP MODIFIED ASPHALT
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 5 of 5
creases, or fishmouths and shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck. Sheets shall be
laid directly behind the hot asphalt applicator. All moppings shall be approximately 25 pounds of
asphalt per square, and shall be total in coverage, leaving no breaks or voids. Lap seams in the
base sheet, ply sheet, and capsheet shall not coincide with each other. Courses will be staggered
a minimum of 12"to prevent stacked laps.
C. Kettles and tankers shall be equipped with accurate, fully readable thermometers. Asphalt shall
not be heated to or above its Flash Point. Avoid heating at or above the Finished Blowing
Temperature; should conditions make this prohibition impractical, and exception is granted by the
roofing consultant, heating above the FBT must not be done for more than four(4) hours.
Application temperatures must be not more than aft(ac) below the EVT nor more than 25°F
(14°C)above the EVT. If EVT information is not provided, the following asphalt temperature limits
shall be observed: Maximum heating temperature shall be 525°F. Minimum application
temperature shall be 425°F. Cutting or alteration of bitumens will not be permitted.
D. Baseflashing Membrane:
1. The flashing ply sheet reinforcing shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself
and shall extend a minimum of four(4) inches beyond the toe of the cant and up the
parapet wall, under the metal counterflashing, or wrapping the top of the wall to below the
nailer on the outside face. The reinforcing sheet shall be adhered in an application of hot
asphalt and mechanically attached to the wall or top of the nailer at the leading edge.
2. The flashing capsheet shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself and shall
extend a minimum of six(6) inches onto the heavyweight capsheet surface and extend up
under the sheet metal counterflashing. Lap seams in the reinforcing layer shall not
coincide with lap seams in the capsheet flashing layer. The flashing capsheet shall be
applied in hot asphalt over the reinforcing layer and mechanically attached to the wall at
the leading edge.
E. Prime metal flanges as required with a uniform coating of asphalt primer. All flanges shall be set
in a smooth even bed of asphalt cement.
F. Install 4 Ib/sf lead for flashing. Pre-prime with asphalt primer and set in mastic as detailed in the
manufacturer's instructions. Field solder conduit and support post flashing as necessary. Provide
draw band hose clamps, uncured EPDM boots (6" batten seam cover tape), and sealant closures
at the top of lead flashing on conduit.
G. Overnight seals: Exercise care that moisture does not enter beneath completed section of the
roof. Temporarily seal edges of the membrane daily and when weather is threatening. Night seals
can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, and constructed to withstand protracted periods
of service. Night seals must be completely removed, all felts removed, prior to the resuming
roofing.
H. All exposed capsheet edges at waste stacks, vent stacks, etc., shall receive mastic and granules.
I. All conduit penetrations, insulated pipes, soil stacks, vents, and curbs shall be a minimum of 8
inches above the finished roof surface. Place conduit on new pressure treated wood blocking
placed on protection pad. Adhere traffic pad to block, and not to roofing.
J. Contractor to be responsible to assure drains are free draining upon completion of roofing work.
K. Install 4 Ib/sf lead sheets in cast iron drain sumps, 30" square, both sides primed and set in
mastic.
End of Section 07 51 00
August 1, 2018 07 51 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 07 62 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 1 of 5
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes flashing, trim, miscellaneous "Break Metal"shapes, downspouts, coping,
and scuppers.
B. Provide cleats, seams, connections and methods as applicable for proper expansion/contraction
and to prevent distortion/"oil canning".
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07 25 00: Weather Resistive Barriers
B. Section 07 51 00: Built Up Modified Asphalt Roofing
C. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants
D. Section 09 91 00: Painting
1.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Conform with the requirements of the following standard specifications as the Architect judges
them applicable and as modified and supplemented hereinafter.
1. Sheet metal fabrication: Architectural Sheet Metal Specifications issued by Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association hereinafter called SMACNA.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricator: Must be experienced in the fabrication of custom sheet metalwork using materials
specified, performing highest quality work; must be approved by Architect.
B. Work specified under this Section must be performed by the same subcontractor as that
supplying the adjacent roofing system.
C. Materials: Materials shall be provided by the same manufacturer as that supplying the metal
siding and roofing for each building with metal roofing and siding.
D. Special Inspection: Notify Architect at least 48 hours before commencing sheet metalwork.
E. Guarantee: Sheet metal items that form a part of roofing systems shall be guaranteed for 10
years.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval for all items specified in this section; show details of
fabrication, materials,joints, fasteners, and anchorages and installation methods; indicate
connections and fastenings with adjacent materials and construction.
August 1, 2018 07 62 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 62 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 2 of 5
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: Copper bearing base metal sheet; 24-gauge, unless otherwise specified or
indicated; conforming with requirements ofASTM A525; 1.25-ounce commercial class coating.
B. Prefinished Metal Flashing: 24 ga. minimum by supplier of inetal roofing/siding material, of same
material and with same finish as roofing and siding. Color typically to match adjacent work, but
color to be selected by architect from standard prefinished colors. Use for all break metal
shapes, unless otherwise specified or indicated.
C. Fasteners: Types fabricated from same or galvanically compatible metals; use galvanized steel
for galvanized steel work. Color to be matched for exposed work. Provide sample of fasteners
for architect's approval.
D. Scuppers: Fabricate of 22-gauge galvanized steel to the architectural profile shape shown on the
drawings. Fasten to wall with fasteners of proper type after approval by architect. Finish to be
standard color selected by the Architect.
E. Exposed Downspouts: Provide downspouts as shown on drawings.
1. Where shown, provide round, 4" diam. 24 ga. downspouts, from the same material as the
g u tte rs.
2. Vendor to provide support brackets for downspouts at spacing no greater than 6'
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Collection Boxes: Provide new 24-gauge collection boxes, per the drawings.
G. Roof penetrations: Fabricate vent pipe and roof drain flashings of lead; 12" minimum base
flange for roof drains; 4" minimum base flange for other locations.
H. Counter-flashings and Flashing Receivers: Form separate counter-flashings as detailed; provide
widths to overlap base flashings by at least 4"; shop-form all joints, angles and corners; provide
matching joint covers where required; make provisions for expansion and contraction. Fabricate
from prepainted, metallic coated steel.
I. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to
extend as shown in drawings beyond wall openings. Form sill flashings with soldered end dams
and fabricate from stainless steel.
I. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections, but not exceeding 10-foot long sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
August 1, 2018 07 62 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 62 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 3 of 5
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal,
and solder or weld watertight.
1. Fabricate copings from the following material:
a. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated steel
b. Finish Color: Match material, gauge, and finish of inetal wall panels or as selected by
architect.
J. Fasteners: Nails shall be hot-dip galvanized for galvanized steel. Bolts, and nuts, power
driven fasteners, screws, washers, etc., shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.
Screws shall be a high-dome, neoprene gasketed, hex head type, or incorporate a
washer with a laminated neoprene gasket.
K. Butyl tape: Provide butyl tape 1/4x1.5 to be placed between surface mount reglet and
masonry wall.
L. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being
installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
M. Other Materials
1. Provide all incidental accessories, tools, and methods required for complete fabrication and
installation of sheet metalwork.
2. Plastic Cement: Carey Johns-Manville, Flint Kote, Pabco, or approved, without asbestos,
suitable for intended use.
N. All finishes
1. All material shall be finished with kynar or tnemic paint.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate units to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, material, metal
thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated.
B. Fabricate units that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance
once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet
metal.
C. Form exposed sheet metal without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder.
E. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces
at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
August 1, 2018 07 62 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 62 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 4 of 5
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application
but not less than thickness of inetal being secured.
H. Gutters to be formed on site from continuous rolls of material, with no joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. See that surfaces to receive sheet metalwork are clean, level, smooth, sound, dry and free from
defects affecting installation or fit; correct any such deficiencies prior to installation. Form, cut, fit
and drill work as required to accommodate work of other trades. Provide all accessory items
required for complete and satisfactory fabrication and installation of work, whether or not
mentioned in these specifications. Execute joints between sheet metal and other construction or
material in watertight manner. Thoroughly clean soldered surfaces.
B. Workmanship: Only the very best, first class workmanship will be accepted. Wavy, dented or
misaligned work will be required to be replaced. All work must present perfect alignment with full-
length members wherever possible within lengths available. Lay outjointing symmetrically.
C. General: Shop-fabricate items in accordance with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
standards and methods, unless otherwise approved. Accurately form shapes, sizes, and profiles
to dimensions as indicated on drawings; verifyjob dimensions where critical for acceptable fit.
Make all lines, angles, edges and moldings straight, sharp, and true; reinforce as required for
stiffness and rigidity; form and finish joints and seams neatly.
D. Erect, install and fasten all sheet metalwork indicated on drawings; erect plumb and true,
securely anchored to building construction; allow for expansion and contraction of construction
without damage to sheet metalwork. Make all exterior work permanently waterproof. Install work
with surfaces free from buckles and waves.
E. Protection: Protect adjacent dissimilar metals from electrolytic action by two heavy coats of zinc-
chromate primer to contact surfaces.
F. Flashings and Counterflashings
1. Provide where indicated or required for weathertight constructions; shop-form and solder
corners and e�end at least 12" either side of intersection, unless otherwise indicated.
Use concealed fastenings wherever possible. Install flashings and counterflashings in
straight, true lines, level and plumb; securely anchor and fasten reglets to building
construction. Seal joints with polysulfide sealant as specified in 07 92 00.
2. Flashings: Provide miscellaneous flashings as detailed on drawings; include all
fastenings and accessory items noted.
G. Fabricate all items in maximum length and keep the number ofjoints to a minimum.
H. Cooperate with other trades in installation of work. Deliver items to be installed by others
in time to avoid delay of project.
I. Make proper allowances for expansion and contraction of materials in all work.
August 1, 2018 07 62 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 07 62 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 5 of 5
J. Fabricate coping with standing seam joints and corners. Outside face of coping to extend
4 inches minimum, and held in place with continuous clip. Inside face dimension to be 3
inches minimum. Hem edges. Fasten inside face with gasketed cap screws spaced at 2
feet on center. Top fastening not permitted.
K. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as
hinged units to swing open for cleaning gutters.
L. Gutters to be formed on site from continuous rolls of material with no joints.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of inetal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim
work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering
at the time of Substantial Completion.
***END OF SECTION***
August 1, 2018 07 62 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 1 of 8
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Elastomeric joint sealants and backer material.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 21 00— Building Insulation
B. Section 07 62 00- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM C719 Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint
Sealants Under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle)
2. ASTM C834 Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds.
3. ASTM C919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications
4. ASTM C920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
5. ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use ofJoint Sealants.
6. ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold
Liquid Applied Sealants
7. ASTM D5893 Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically
Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Pavements
B. Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (SWRI), Tel. (816)472-7979. Fax: (816)472-7765,
Email infoCa�swrionline.orq /Web Site http://www.swrionline.orq
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Exterior and interior joint sealant systems installed with pressure gun.
B. Backer rod as required for hourglass shaped geometry at open joints subject to water
penetration. Not required at bedding for thresholds, sheet metal lap seams, paintable interior
joints using latex sealants, concealed sealants at gypsum board.
C. Precompressed foam joint sealant backup sealant at exterior joints.
D. Sealing of vertical and horizontal construction joints, making air and watertight.
E. Definitions:
1. Joint Sealant: Includes terminology including "joint sealer", "joint sealant", and "caulking".
Regardless of terminology used by Contract Documents, use specified sealer
continuously to seal entire area and assembly.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 2 of 8
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Product Data: Joint sealant and backer material types, chemical characteristics,
performance criteria, limitations, and color availability.
C. Cohesion and Adhesion Test Reports for Exterior Sealants: Test reports with test results forjoints
between adjacent assemblies of construction materials specified for this project.
1. Test to ASTM C719 by SWRI independent testing laboratory.
2. Indicate whether primers are required.
3. Where test data is unavailable for specific substrates, submit letter from manufacturer
representative with procedures required to confirm suitability.
D. Color Samples:
1. Manufacturer's standard selection: Submit on joint sealer material. Reproductions not
accepted.
2. Custom color samples: Submit additional custom color samples as directed by Engineer.
E. Backer Material Samples: Backer rod and pre-compressed foam joint sealant.
F. Manufacturer's Certification: Written certification, signed by authorized manufacturer's
representative. Indicate that exteriorjoint sealants have been reviewed by manufacturer and are
suitable for intended use and conditions of use.
G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation requirements, limitations, compatible materials,
and joint types suitable for each product.
H. Sample Warranty: Meet or exceed provisions specified by this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCES
A. Manufacturer: Make tests determining compatibility of exterior silicone sealants with substrates as
necessary to conform to manufacturer's Warranty provisions.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Conform to manufacturer's instructions.
B. Store and handle to protect from freezing and contamination.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Do not install sealants when the temperature is 40 degrees F or below, except
where manufacturer's instructions permit lower temperatures.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 3 of 8
B. Moisture: Do no work when moisture is present or when surfaces to be sealed are wet.
C. Do not install solvent curing joint sealants in enclosed building spaces.
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Exterior Joint Sealants: Standard 5 year materials warranty against failure and 5 years for
polyurethane joints at horizontal paving.
2. Interior Joint Sealants: Standard 5 year Warranty against failure of material.
B. Contractor: 1 year labor Warranty of exteriorjoint sealants against failure.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. DOW Corning
2. Pecora Corporation
3. Tremco Sealant/Weatherproofing Division
4. Sika
5. GE Silicones
B. Pre-compressed Foam Joint Sealant:
1. Emseal Joint Systems, Inc.
2. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company.
2.02 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS—VERTICAL
A. Exposed Exterior Joints and Cracks:
1. Reference Standard: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, and O.
2. Single Component Polyurethane Sealant: Type S
a. Sika, Sikaflex15LM.
b. Vulkem: 921.
c. Tremco Dymonic FC.
3. Single-Component Silicone Sealant: Type S
a. Dow Corning 756 SMS.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 4 of 8
4. Joint Movement Capabilities:
a. Polyurethane: Minimum 100 percent expansion and 50 percent compression in
accordance with ASTM C719.
b. Silicone: Minimum 50 percent extensions and 50 percent compression in
accordance with ASTM C719.
5. Verify compatibility with coating system.
2.03 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS -HORIZONTAL
A. Recessed Joint Fillers: Asphalt impregnated joint filler for paving and other horizontal surfaces.
B. Exterior Paving Joint Sealant Over Joint Filler:
1. Reference Standard: ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
2. Single Component Silicone Sealant: Type S, ASTM D5893
a. Dow Corning 890 SL.
b. Dow Corning Parking Structure SL.
c. Tremco Parking Structure Sealant GG (Gun Grade).
2.04 EXTERIOR BEDDING SEALANT AT HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL JOINTS
USE AT OVERLAPPING FLASHING JOINTS
A. Bedding and Threshold Sealants Concealed from UV:
1. Non-Skinning Butyl Bedding Sealant:
a. Tremco Acoustical Sealant or Tremco Curtainwall Sealant.
b. Pecora BA-98.
c. Sikaflex 511
2. Consistency for use with gun or knife without paint finish, light gray color.
2.05 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
A. Exposed Joint Sealants - General Use:
1. Reference Standard: ASTM C834.
2. Paintable Siliconized Acrylic Latex Joint Sealant:
a. Pecora AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex.
b. Tremco Acrylic Latex 834.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 5 of 8
c. Sonneborn Sonolac, acrylic latex.
d. DAP Acrylic Latex.
2.06 BACKER MATERIAL
A. Backer Rod: Non-adhering, closed cell polyethylene foam or skinned open cell polyethylene foam
(soft rod)and as instructed by joint sealant manufacturer.
1. Diameter: 1/3 greater than width ofjoint where it is to be installed.
2. Polystyrene foam and open cell rods not accepted.
B. Precompressed Foam Joint Sealant: Self expanding, polyurethane foam tape joint sealant. Size
as appropriate for plus and minus 50 percent elongation and compression ofjoint.
1. Emseal Joint Systems, Inc., BACKERSEAL, acrylic impregnated urethane foam.
2. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation, Polytite B, polyurethane foam impregnated with a
waterproof polymer sealing compound and have a release agent on the exposed surface.
3. Sandell Manufacturing Co, Inc., Polyseal.
4. Illbruck, Willseal.
C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape/plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, as
needed to prevent bonding ofjoint sealant to substrate where backer rod cannot be used.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by joint sealant manufacturer forjoint surfaces.
B. Joint Primers: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer, for joint surface conditions encountered.
2.08 COLORS AND FINISHES
A. Colors of Integrally Colored Joint Sealants: As selected by Engineer, including following:
1. Joints Separating Materials of Same Color.
2. Joints Separating Materials of Different Color.
3. Joint Sealants between Glass and Non-Porous Materials.
4. Structural Sealant between Glass and Glass and between Glass and Metal.
5. Joint Sealants between Natural/Unfinished Metals.
6. Colors of Joint Sealants to be painted.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 6 of 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions ready to receive work of this Section, conforming to manufacturer's instructions,
before beginning.
B. Verify surfaces clean and dry before proceeding.
C. Verifyjoint size and substrate suitable forjoint sealant.
D. Verify that back-up material and release tapes are compatible with joint sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates, conforming to ASTM C1193 and as instructed by manufacturer.
B. Thoroughly clean joints to remove loose debris, foreign matter, and other bond breaking
materials.
C. Prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, prior to installation of backer rod,
precompressed foam sealant, and bond breaking tapes.
D. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces.
E. Take measures to prevent intrusion of dust, moisture, and other harmful substances into joints
during installation.
F. Apply masking around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from defacement and staining during
sealing operations.
G. Existing Joints: Remove existing debris and joint sealant, clean with solvent, and prime for new
joint sealants as necessary to achieve permanent bonding of new joint sealant as instructed by
manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to ASTM C1193, manufacturer's instructions, and provisions of Contract Documents.
B. Seal interiorjoints to make watertight and exteriorjoints to make watertight and weathertight.
Refer to requirements of individual Sections. Include:
1. Around windows, relights, doors, wall louvers, and other openings in walls.
2. Joints between dissimilar materials.
3. Horizontal joints, including exterior paving joints over joint filler.
4. At joints in sheet metal, flashing, and trim.
3.04 BACKER ROD AND PRECOMPRESSED FOAM JOINT SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Backer Rod Joint Depth Ratio: Force backer rod into joint to proper depth for sealant as
instructed by manufacturer. Where not otherwise instructed, conform to following:
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 7 of 8
1. Where more than 3/4 inch wide install backer to within 1/2 inch ofsurface.
2. Where less than 1/2 inch wide install backer to within 1/4 inch of surface.
3. Where less than 1/2 inch deep, apply bond breaker tape to bottom ofjoints to prevent
adhesion of sealant to bottom ofjoint.
B. Precompressed Foam Joint Sealant: Install behind backer rod and joint sealant at exteriorjoints.
Install in sizes to expand and tightly fitjoint.
C. Install backing materials in continuous lengths as long as practicable.
1. Use suitable tools for installation that will not damage backing material. Do not insert
with sharp objects.
2. Do not puncture backer material.
D. Bond Breaker Tape: Where backer rod cannot be installed behind joint sealant, install bond
breaker tape
1. As necessary to prevent joint sealant from adhering to backing, forming three sided
adhesion.
2. As separator over backing materials subject to bleed-through.
3. As separator over asphalt impregnated joint compound and other conditions, where
backer rod is not applicable for sealant conditions.
3.05 JOINT SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Joint Sealant Width to Depth Ratio- General Sealant: Verify following with manufacturer's
instructions
1. Joint Sealant Bite: Install between 1/4 inch and 1/2 inch deep, except minimum 1/2 width
of joint.
2. Narrowest Dimension at Joint Sealant Profile: Minimum 1/8 inch thick at center of profile.
B. Tool joint sealant into joints to make neat, smooth, concave configuration.
C. Take measures to provide positive contact ofjoint sealants both sides ofjoint surface. Seal joints
before final coat of finish is applied to adjacent surfaces.
3.06 BEDDING SEALANT AND THRESHOLD SEALANT AT CONCEALED JOINTS
A. Install one or two beads of sealants to make watertight joints at flashing and other metal overlaps.
B. Install two beads under metal thresholds prior to setting in place.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace joint sealant where determined by Engineer to be non-conforming or
otherwise defective.
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 07 92 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops JOINT SEALANTS
Page 8 of 8
B. Remove and replace joint sealant from joints where joint sealant is not fully adhered and where
joint sealant contains bubbles, foreign matter, and where other defects are evident.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Remove excess joint sealant material.
B. Remove and dispose of masking materials.
C. Leave installations clean and free from residue and debris from work of this Section.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Take measures to protect sealed joints during initial set-up and cure, minimum 12 hours.
End of Section 07 92 00
August 1, 2018 07 92 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 1 of 7
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 20 00 — Finish Carpentry
B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Standards:
1. ANSI/SDI-100 — Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames
2. ASTM-F 476— Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Doors
Assemblies
3. HMMA 862 — Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames
4. SDI-105— Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
5. SDI-107— Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application)
6. ANSI-A250.4— Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance
7. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
B. Codes:
1. NFPA-101 — Life Safety Code
2. IBC 2009 — International Building Code
3. ANSI-A117.1 —Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities
4. ADA—Americans with Disabilities Act
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
August 1, 2018 08 11 13- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 2 of 7
B. Product Data
1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel
doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door and
frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details
of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for
details and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings
should include the following information:
a. Material thickness and/or gauge.
b. Door core material.
c. Mortises and reinforcements.
d. Anchorage types.
e. Locations of exposed fasteners.
f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings.
g. Mounting locations of standard hardware.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute
(SDI).
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site; direct factory shipments are not
allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and
schedules with the contractor.
B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and
jobsite storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any factory-finished
doors. Mark all doors and frames with opening numbers as shown on the contract
documents and shop drawings.
C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the
Engineer. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed.
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 3 of 7
D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place.
1. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking.
2. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity
chamber.
3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately.
4. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final
completion and acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard hollow metal doors and
frames by one of the following:
1. Ceco Corporation
2. Curries Company
3. Fleming Company
2.02 MATERIALS
A. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per
ASTM-A366 and A568 general requirements; galvanized to A60 or G60 or galvannealed
to A40 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-A924. Internal reinforcing may be
manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM-A569.
B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18-gauge sheet steel,
galvanized where galvanized frames are used.
C. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot
dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM-A153, Class C or D as applicable.
D. Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base
for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces on Steel Doors and Frames."
2.03 DOORS
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-3
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 4 of 7
A. Provide 1 3/4" thick doors of design indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without
visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867 and ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Interior poors: Level 2, Model 2 - Seamless
a. Interior doors shall be a minimum 18-gauge galvanized or
galvannealed steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door
intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of
door. The top of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a
16-gauge screwed-in top cap.
1) Ceco: - Legion-18
2) Curries: 707-18
3) Flemming: D-18
2. Exterior poors: Level 3, Model 2 —Seamless, Flush Panel
a. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16-gauge galvanized or galvannealed
steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filled
and ground smooth the full height of door. Exterior doors shall be
insulated with foamed in place polyurethane. The top of all doors shall be
closed flush by the addition of a 16-gauge screwed-in top cap and sealed
to prevent water infiltration. The bottom channel shall include weep-holes.
1) Ceco: Trio-E Series, 16 gauge
2) Curries: 777E Trio Series, 16 gauge
B. Core Construction: Steel stiffened laminated core with fiberglass filler with no stiffener
face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 "Laminated Core". 22 gage steel- stiffeners at
6 inches on-center and internally welded at 5" on center to integral core assembly, No
stiffener face welding is permitted.
C. All doors shall be reinforced for hardware as shown below where necessary to preclude
the use of thru-bolts.
1. Exit Devices: 14-gauge
2. Door Closers: 12-gauge
D. All doors shall be beveled 1/8" in 2" and shall have top and bottom channels of not less
than 16-gauge, flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets. Doors shall have a full
height 14-gauge hinge rail reinforcement channel, or individual 7 gauge hinge
reinforcements.
E. All doors to conform to ANSI-A250.4 Level "A" criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000
operating cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level "A" doors is to be submitted
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-4
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 5 of 7
with approval drawings by supplier upon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge
of door not having been tested and passed these criteria.
F. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, assemblies fabricated as
thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or
ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-values as shown on the drawings.
2.04 FRAMES
A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of types and styles as shown on the drawings and schedules. Conceal
fastenings unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16-gauge
a. Ceco: SQ Series
b. Curries: M Series
c. Fleming: F Series
2. Exterior Frames: 14-gauge, galvanized or galvanealed
a. Ceco: SQW Series
b. Curries: WM Series
B. All frames over 36" in width shall be 14 gauge.
C. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re-prime at the welded
areas. All welds to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts.
D. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements with an additional high
frequency 12-gauge hinge reinforcement welded to the top hinge, 14-gauge lock strike
reinforcing, and 12-gauge closer reinforcing.
E. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames.
F. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike
jambs of single frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames.
G. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, assemblies fabricated as
thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or
ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-values as shown on the drawings.
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-5
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 6 of 7
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from
defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to
assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.
1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8" at jambs and heads except between non
fire rated pairs of doors which may be no more than 1/4." Not more than 3/4" at
the bottom of the doors.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units,
from only cold-rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings
from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval
heads for exposed screws and bolts.
F. Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-
reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to
ASTM E 413.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound
ratings of 33 or better.
G. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to
final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements of SDI-107 and ANSI-A115 Series specifications for door
and frame preparation for hardware.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements
for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices.
I. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the
Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
J. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel or 0.040-inch- thick
aluminum.
K. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-6
Sign Shop Expansion 08 11 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 7 of 7
L. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in
doors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified.
B. Comply with provisions of SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door
Frames," unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board
assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and
ceilings.
2. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening
anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding
heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts
and masonry anchorage devices.
3. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors perjamb at hinge and
strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
C. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in
ANSI/SDI 100.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer
B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
End of Section 08 11 13
August 1, 2018 08 11 13-7
Sign Shop Expansion 08 36 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 3613 - OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish and install overhead sectional doors and operators where shown on the drawings or as
specified herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
B. Section 09 90 00 Painting
C. Division 26: Electrical
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Conform to requirements of International Building Code. Provide U.L. labels for doors and
frames, where and of class noted.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor to provide written guarantee that new doors will operate trouble free for a period of 1
year after acceptance.
B. In accordance with accepted quality assurance guidelines for motor-operated doors, both the
door and electric operator shall be manufactured by a single-source producer of door systems; as
by Overhead Door Corporation.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval; show reinforcements, cutouts,joints, welds, anchors,
provisions for hardware and other pertinent items.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics and performance
data. Submit at time of acceptance complete instructions on the care and maintenance of doors;
include parts lists.
D. Certificate: Furnish letter from manufacturer stating that doors and frames delivered to the
project conform with the Contract Document requirements.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS AND OPERATORS
November 15, 2018 08 36 13- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 08 36 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
Page 2 of 3
A. Overhead sectional doors shall be by Northwest Door, Overhead Door, Wayne-Dalton, Raynor or
approved equal.
B. Doors are specified by Northwest Door designations. Equal and approved doors by other
approved manufacturers shall be acceptable.
C. Provide Model 920 Doors. Section profile will be ribbed. Sections will be 24-gauge for the roll-
formed galvanized steel exterior. Sections will have a nominal thickness of 2" (51 mm). Doors
will have rabbeted meeting rails to form weathertightjoints and provide full-width interlocking
structural rigidity. Back cover will be minimum of 30-guage steel.
D. Doors to be insulated with a maximum U value of 0.60.
E. Center and end stiles will be 16-guage steel, formed and fastened as integral structures with the
rolled sections. End stiles will be channel-shaped to 2" deep.
F. Use high cycle springs, 100,000 cycles.
G. Hinges and fixtures will be galvanized steel. Hinges to be 11 ga. Full-floating ball-bearing rollers
will have hardened steel races. Roller sizes will be adequate for design requirements and
limitations.
H. Tracks are to be 3" angle mounted.
I. Supplier shall provide doors, tracks, weatherstripping, channels, brackets, controls, switches,
electric operators, motors and all miscellaneous parts as necessary for a complete and operable
installation. Provide safe edge at bottom of doors with cut off and reversal command and coil
cord. Bottom weatherstrip will be flexible PVC and held in place by a retainer that also provides
additional reinforcement.
J. Doors shall match the appearance and size as shown on the drawings and schedules. Provide
rows of full view insulated double strength glazing where shown on the drawings. Provide
factory white polyester or epoxy finish suitable for field painting. Doors to be field painted by
division 9 per colors selected by architect.
K. Doors are to be individually operated. Controls are to be mounted on the interior, next to the
door. Provide one exterior, key operated control operator.
L. The electric door operator shall be the hoist type operator for high-lift sectional doors. Track style
to be lift clearance or follow-the-roof type. Provide solenoid brake.
M. Motorto be 1/2 HP 240/120 VAC single phase motors, side-mounted, with chain drive. Provide
reduction gears running in oil bath. Provide auxiliary hand chain for manual operations. Provide
photoelectric sensing protection per UL325. Provide (1) 36" light curtain for additional protection.
N. Door widths and heights, described in the drawings, represent clear opening dimensions. Actual
door size shall be as necessary to provide tight seal at all edges.
PART III - EXECUTION
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Install overhead sectional doors in accordance with instructions and standards provided by the
door manufacturer.
November 15, 2018 08 36 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 08 36 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS
Page 3 of 3
B. Install tracks in accurate locations as indicated on drawings, plumb, rigid and in true alignment;
brace tracks to retain position. Install doors accurately with proper clearances. Adjust hardware
as required.
C. Provide low voltage wiring and connect door controls from power provided at motor location to
door control switches in conduit and boxes provided by electrical. Power to be provided by
Division 16 00 00.
D. Provide and install coil cord operator to bottom bar, with cut off or reversal command.
End of Section 08 36 13
November 15, 2018 08 36 13-3
Sign Shop Expansion 08 51 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes provision of aluminum window systems, including sash and glazing.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
B. Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants
C. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Conform with the requirements of the following specifications, as supplemented and modified
hereinafter.
1. Architectural Metal Finishes Manual, issued by National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricator/Installer: Must be experienced in the fabrication and working of architectural metalwork
of the highest quality; must have plant, facilities and personnel adequate for the satisfactory
production of required components; must be approved by Engineer.
B. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Window frame fabrication and glazing shall be guaranteed
for 10 years.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval; show full size detail of sections, complete details of
fabrication and erection; sizes and types of fastenings and anchors, and locations or spacing of
same; show clearances with rough openings or with other items or work. Shop Drawings shall
indicate factory coating and finish.
C. Samples: Submit samples of inetal members formed for sections; full size by 24" length showing
profiles and finishes. Obtain approval of samples prior to fabrications.
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics, and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
August 1, 2018 08 51 13- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 08 51 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 2 of 4
1.06 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Labels: Each prime window unit shall bear the AAMA Quality Certified label warranting that the
product complies with AAMA 101-93.
B. Certification Option: Window units without Quality Certified labels shall be tested and inspected
for conformance with AAMA 302.9. Submit test reports from independent testing laboratory for
approval before commencing delivery ofwindow units.
C. Provide certification acceptable to the City Building Dept that systems meet U-values described
below.
1.07 CHANGES
A. Contractor responsible for weather and water-tightness for structural adequacy of assembly, and
for proper functioning of all parts of installation. Should modification be necessary, call
Engineer's attention to each change and obtain Engineer's approval before fabrication.
1.08 COLOR AND FINISH STANDARD
A. Aluminum: For exposed aluminum surfaces, Clear Anodized finish.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Extruded shapes of 6063-T5 alloy and temper with a minimum wall thickness of
.062".
B. Sealants and Gaskets: Provide sealants, tapes and gaskets as required.
C. Thermal Performance: System U-value with glazing to be 0.38 maximum.
D. Other Materials: Provide all accessory materials, equipment and tools required
for complete installation and operation of windows.
2.02 WINDOWS
A. Shapes shown are representations of design, function and required profile. Window schedule
represents nominal sizes. Field verify all openings for actual size.
B. Fixed —Marlin Thermally Improved Series 1505
1. Frame:
a. 1505 AT-4 Series, 2 1/4"frame depth, H-Bar type frame suited for compensating
channel.
b. 1505 AT-17 Series, 2 1/4 "frame depth, nailing fin
2. Finishes:
August 1, 2018 08 51 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 08 51 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 3 of 4
a. Frame and Sash Color: Clear Anodized Exterior Finish. Provide AA-M12 C22-
A31 C/ass II C/ear finish, minimum 0.4 mils thick, e/ectrolytically deposited color
anodized finish.
C. Operable— Marlin Thermally Improved Series 3500
1. Finishes:
a. Frame and Sash Color: Clear Anodized Exterior Finish. Provide AA-M12 C22-
A31 C/ass II C/ear finish, minimum 0.4 mils thick, e/ectrolytically deposited color
anodized finish.
All frame and sash members shall have thermal breaks and mechanically joined corners.
2.03 GLAZING
A. For the Fixed windows: Insulated Glass Units, 1" thick overall, complying with Section 08 80 00 -
Glazing.
1. Glazing Type: Solarban60, argon gas filled.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Workmanship
1. Fabricate and construct members, and assemble parts to present neat, workmanlike
appearance, to meet performance test standards, and to be weather and watertight.
2. Fit and assemble component parts in the shop insofar as practicable; fit, assemble, mark,
and disassemble work that cannot be permanently assembled in the shop to assure
proper fitting in the field; mark assembled components to correspond with shop drawings
for placement location and erection on the site.
3. Form all exposed exterior joints with concealed fastenings; miter exposed perimeter
corner joints and butt other exposed exterior joints. Form all exterior joints to hairline
machine accuracy; seal from back permanently water and weatherproof unless otherwise
approved; match adjoining surfaces for continuity of line, profile, and finish; all surfaces
flush.
2.05 SHOP CLEANING & PROTECTION
A. Before shipping components from shop, remove and clean all foreign material from surfaces,
including all fabrication lubricants. Protect surfaces to be exposed during fabrication,
transportation and erection against scratches, splashes of mortar, paint, welding, or other
defacement; cover surfaces with tape, or other approved coating prior to shipment to job site.
2.06 PROTECTION OF ALUMINUM
A. Apply zinc-chromate primer to contact surfaces of aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry.
Provide 2 heavy coats of zinc-chromate primer to contact surfaces of aluminum in contact with
dissimilar metals; 1 coat may be applied to each surface at Contractor's option; paint is in
August 1, 2018 08 51 13-3
Sign Shop Expansion 08 51 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 4 of 4
addition to shop coat on steel; where isolating or gasketing tape is indicated, or where factory-
applied coating is applied on aluminum, primer may be omitted.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows level, plumb, square, and true to line, in correct relationship with the work of other
trades and with established lines and elevations as noted; maintain required clearances and
tolerances as specified or as approved on shop drawings.
B. Set windows carefully into place; shim as necessary for plumbness and adjustment into required
locations. Leave frames completely installed and ready for glazing as specified elsewhere,
unless option for shop glazing is exercised.
C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture
migrating within windows to the exterior.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action
at points of contact with other materials.
E. Sealant for installation is specified in Section 07 92 00 - Sealants, but installed herein. Inspect all
surfaces to receive sealant; remove protective coatings; apply sealant in continuous beads where
indicated and as required to seal all joints between frames and adjacent construction.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Immediately after installation of windows, clean glass and all aluminum surfaces, inside and out;
polish and leave completely clean, read for acceptance of the work by the Engineer. Avoid
damaging protective coatings and finishes.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance of
glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
End of Section 08 51 13
August 1, 2018 08 51 13-4
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 1 of 15
SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards-A156 Series
2. UL10C—Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 2 of 15
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.
Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will
be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance
manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as
required in Division 01, CloseoutSubmittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of
documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and
electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 3 of 15
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with
a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical
hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary
materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult
with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door
hardware and keying.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from
a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line
by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),
Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to
instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of
their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and
physical product samples as required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 4 of 15
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 5 of 15
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,
purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
1. Permanent cylinders, cores, and keys to be installed by Owner.
D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other
options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge
for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2"standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3'1"to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 6 of 15
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior poors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior poors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened
into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for
the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA).
b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).
c. Stanley Hardware (ST).
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device
location approximately six feet from the floor.
2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8" in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required
for appropriate installation and operation.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Door Controls International (DC).
b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Stanley Best (BE).
b. No Substitution.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 7 of 15
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
D. Keying System: By Owner.
E. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be
field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA)—8200 Series. [Basis of Design]
b. Stanley Best(BE)—40H-UN Series. [Accepted Manufacturer]
2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
man ufactu re r.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 8 of 15
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test
witnessed and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide
through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted,
heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully
operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to
be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with
adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed
control. Provide non-handed units standard.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU)—DC6000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA)-351 Series.
c. Norton Door Controls (NO)-7500 Series.
d. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA)-4400 Series.
2.8 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDV� on stop side of single doors and 1" LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 9 of 15
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16" above
the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer's
catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop),
fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in
the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
c. Trimco (TC).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and
holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and
jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy
tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper
operation and function.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
August 1, 2018 08 71 00-9
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 10 of 15
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Manufacturers:
1. National Guard Products (NG).
2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).
3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 10
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 11 of 15
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have
been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of inechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation
and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices;
locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on
substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 11
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 12 of 15
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They
are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the
architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a
hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper
application and functionality.
B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option
for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware
sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
C. Manufacturer's Abbreviations:
1. MK- McKinney
2. PE- Pemko
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 12
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 13 of 15
3. MR- Markar
4. RF- Rixson
5. RO- Rockwood
6. AD-Adams Rite
7. SA- Sargent
8. YA-Yale
9. YR-Yale Residential
10. RU - Corbin Russwin
11. MC - Medeco
12.AA-ASSA High Security Locks
13. HS- HES
14. VI -ASSA ABLOY Hospitality
15. NO- Norton
16. BM - Besam
17. SU -Securitron
18.AK-Alarm Controls
19. BE- Best
Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0
Description: SHOP 104
3 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3386 US32D MK
1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNL US26D SA
1 Surface Closer P/S 7500 (7786 as required) 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO
1 Wall Stop 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 271 D PE
1 Gasketing S88BL 17' PE
1 Sweep 315SSN 36" PE
Set: 2.0
Description: EQUIP STORAGE 201
3 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK
1 Storeroom/Closet Lock 70 8204 LNL US26D SA
1 Surf Overhead Hold Open 9-X26 652 RF
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO
3 Silencer 608-RKW RO
Set: 3.0
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 13
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 14 of 15
Description: OFFICE 101
3 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK
1 Office/Entry Lock 70 8205 LNL US26D SA
1 Wall Stop 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Gasketing S88BL 17' PE
1 Door Bottom 411APKL 36" PE
Set: 4.0
Description: PRINT 103, SHOP 104
6 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK
1 Flush Bolt 555 (12"-24" as required) US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNL US26D SA
2 Surf Overhead Hold Open 9-X26 652 RF
1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Gasketing S88BL 17' PE
2 Door Bottom 411APKL 36" PE
1 Astragal 355CS 80" PE
Set: 5.0
Description: PRINT 103
3 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK
1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNL US26D SA
1 Wall Stop 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Gasketing S88BL 17' PE
1 Door Bottom 411APKL 36" PE
Set: 6.0
Description: SHOP 104- Overhead Door
Set: 7.0
Description: OFFICE 102
3 Hinge TA2714 US26D MK
1 Classroom Lock 70 8237 LNL US26D SA
1 Door Stop 445 US26D RO
1 Threshold 151A PE
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 14
Sign Shop Expansion 08 71 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops Door Hardware
Page 15 of 15
1 Gasketing S88BL 17' PE
1 Door Bottom 411APKL 36" PE
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
August 1, 2018 08 71 00- 15
Sign Shop Expansion 08 80 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GLAZING
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section specifies glass and glazing in aluminum frames to be supplied by Section-08 36 13 and
Section-08 51 13.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 36 13—Overhead Sectional Doors
B. Section 08 51 13 -Aluminum Windows
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Conform with requirements in Glazing Manual of the Flat Glass Marketing Association,
hereinafter call FGMA, as the Engineer judges them applicable.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for approval; required information on glass and glazing may be incorporated on
shop drawings, submittal pertaining to frames at Contractor's option; show sizes and
thicknesses of lights, proposed "bites" in frames, blocks, and clips, installation of stops,
edge treatment of glass; note quality, type, and strength of each light.
C. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories as
applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics, and
performance data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions
for application if not included in manufacturer's published literature.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing shall be provided by the Aluminum Window Manufacturer and Overhead Door
Manufacturer, and shall be part of the same warranties.
B. Materials:
1. Maintain original label of each piece of glass, except where cutting makes requirements
impossible; show manufacturer, strength, and quality of glass on labels.
C. Guarantee:
1. Glazing of all exterior openings shall be guaranteed for 10 years.
August 1, 2018 08 80 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 08 80 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GLAZING
Page 2 of 3
2. Insulating glass units shall be guaranteed not to develop material obstruction to vision as
a result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surfaces caused by failure of the
hermetic seal, other than through glass breakage, within a 10 year period following
installation. Any units failing to comply with terms of this guarantee shall be replaced at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 HANDLING
A. Shipping and Storage: Pack glass, brace, and insulate to prevent breakage, cracking, scratching,
or marring of the surface; damaged glass will not be accepted for the project. Deliver other
materials in original cartons or containers, manufacturer's label thereon; do not remove labels or
open containers until Engineer inspects and approves.
B. Precautions: Do no glazing when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. or when dust or
insects are present; do no glazing in wet weather, except under cover.
C. Protection: Do not mark glass surfaces with crayon or other marking pencils; where warnings are
required provide tapes or banners fastened to head framing. Provide masking or other shielding
for glass when performing welding or other construction adjacent to glazed openings; replace
glass damaged by any construction method or technique at no additional cost to Owner. Protect
edges at all times to preserve edge strength; no striking, stoning, nipping seaming, or grinding
will be allowed; protect edges against abrasions, pressure, and impact.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Glass shall be as manufactured by American St. Gobain, Pittsburg Plate Glass, Libbey- Owen-
Ford,or approved equal.
B. Float Glass:
1. Float glass shall be clear, 1/4 inch thick,ordinary glazing quality.
2. Clean cut and seamed edges for buttjoints.
3. Insulated at windows: Provide glazing system as necessary to meet U values defined for
each overall window system in Section -08 43 13 and Section -08 51 13.
C. Safety Glass:
1. Safety glass shall be 1/4-inch laminated safety glass.
D. Tempered Glass:
1. Tempered glass shall be 1/4-inch clear float or plate,full tempered, polished both sides,free
from defects; PPG Herculite, LOF Tuf-Flex,or approved equal.
2. Provide tempered glass where indicated or required by code.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
August 1, 2018 08 80 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 08 80 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GLAZING
Page 3 of 3
A. Block and Shims: Provide neoprene or other resilient type as approved; 90 durometer for setting
blocks and 40 to 50 durometer for shims.
B. Clips: Provide non-corrosive metal types with rounded edges designed for contacting resilient blocks
or shims, not glass.
C. Glazing tape: In accordance with NAAMM SS-1 b, Class A, reinforced; 98%solid content in
accordance with ASTM D898.
D. Sealant: Dow-Corning 732 Silicone or approved.
E. Glazing gaskets: e�ruded neoprene glazing gaskets.
F. Other materials as indicated on drawings and as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Glass shall be accurately cut and installed on setting blocks in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, using standard glazing methods.
B. Preparation for Glazing: Check frames to receive glass for squareness and trueness; see that
perimeter clearances are sufficient to prevent"point loading", that surfaces are dry, clean, and
ready to receive glass and glazing materials, and that protective coatings on framing surfaces
have been removed.
C. Setting Blocks and Shims: Place setting blocks in frames at quarter points at 6"from corners;
install shims continuous allowing for minimum of 1/8" bite on glass.
D. Inspection of Edges: Inspect edges for conformance with specifications.
E. Glazing
1. Interior Locations: Glaze with glazing tape, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
2. Insulating Glass: Glaze in accordance with glass unit manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Butt Joints: Apply continuous bead of silicone sealant to abutting surfaces of glass and
carefully bond for continuous weathertightjoint
3.02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion, remove any excess materials, including sealant; general cleaning and finish
clean-up are specified elsewhere.
End of Section 08 80 00
August 1, 2018 08 80 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 09 29 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GYPSUM BOARD
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum board wall and ceiling systems.
B. Trim accessories, Joint compound, control joints, fasteners, and sealants.
C. Level of finish for gypsum board surfaces.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 53— Rough Carpentry
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Conform to Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board as
published by the Gypsum Association (also published as ASTM C840-07).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for specified products and accessories
as applicable, including manufacturer's specifications, physical characteristics, and performance
data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's instructions and directions for application if not
included in manufacturer's published literature.
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to
prevent sagging.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Co., U.S. Gypsum Co., Kaiser Gypsum Co., Bestwall Gypsum Co., Pabco
Products Co., or approved equal.
2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Wallboard:
1. Edges: Tapered
2. Joints: Butt
3. Thicknesses 1/2" unless otherwise indicated.
August 1, 2018 09 29 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 09 29 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GYPSUM BOARD
Page 2 of 3
4. Moisture resistant: Use in toilet rooms, shower rooms, bathrooms, wet areas, and any
wall within 4'of plumbing fixtures or plumbed appliances.
5. Ceiling Type: 5/8" and manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type
gypsum board.
B. Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum
board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
2.03 SCREWS
A. Screws conforming to ASTM C1002. Bulge or pan head, and lengths as required for securing
materials in place.
2.04 METAL TRIM
A. Drywall Accessories; comply with ASTM C1047, provide the following items fabricated completely
of heavy gage galvanized sheet steel and distributed by the gypsum board manufacturer.
Shapes and sizes, formed from zinc-coated steel conforming to Federal Specification QQS-775,
class D or E, not less than 25 gauge.
1. Corner Bead: Gypsum Association Type CB 114 x 114 having 1-1/4 inch or wider
flanges.
2. Gypsum Association Type LC-58 at all termination edges exposed to view or sized as
necessary to receive board and designed for finishing with Joint Treatment.
3. Gypsum Association Type L-58 at all termination edges abutting another material.
4. Concealed Trim:
a. Paper Faced Metal Bead and Trim: ASTM C1047, electro-galvanized steel with
paper face and flanges, USG Beadex specified for type and quality.
b. Outside corner beads
c. Inside corners
d. L-type edge trim
2.05 JOINT CEMENT AND REINFORCING TAPE
A. As recommended by manufacturer for intended purpose.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION OF WALLBOARD
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C840-07, except as herein modified. Assure that
50-degree F. temperature will be maintained. Provide solid blocking behind all joints not on
framing members.
August 1, 2018 09 29 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 09 29 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops GYPSUM BOARD
Page 3 of 3
B. Placement of Wallboard: Apply board to ceilings before applying to walls. Use full-size sheets of
maximum practical lengths insofar as practicable. Place boards in moderate contact; do not force
into place. Stagger vertical and transverse joints; arrange joints on opposite sides of a partition
so as to occur on different studs. Set boards 1/4" minimum off concrete floors to avoid wicking.
C. Attachment: Use specified screws at 12"o.c. in field of board and 8" o.c. staggered along vertical
edges.
D. Ensure that insulation is properly placed in partitions.
E. Metal Trim: Use metal casings at all joints between wallboard and other materials. Use specified
metal trim on all external corners.
F. Sanding: When sanding use wet sanding procedures or seal off work area from rest of the
building.
3.02 FINISH
A. All exposed walls and ceilings to receive smooth finish, suitable for paint or wall covering.
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT
A. All work shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C840-07 and to the
recommendations of the wallboard manufacturer. All exposed work shall be smooth and free
from defects. Tape and cement all joints; reinforce all corners; fill all exposed fastener heads. Fill
all cracks at electrical outlets and similar for fireproofing. Repeat process as many times as
necessary for appearance. All exposed joints and fastener heads shall be smooth and flush with
surface of board.
3.04 REPAIR
A. After installation of drywall assemblies and before application of finish painting or other scheduled
finish, inspect work for any deficiencies and correct same; leave drywall assemblies complete
with trim as indicated, ready for finish plastering or other finish treatment as scheduled.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. At conclusion of work, leave premises neat and clean, remove all tools, equipment and surplus
materials and legally dispose of all debris off the site.
End of Section 09 29 00
August 1, 2018 09 29 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 09 5100
City of Renton Public Works Shops ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 1 of 4
SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tee grid suspended ceiling system.
B. Acoustical tiles.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Wallboard
0.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
1. Shop drawings: Show field layout indication.
a. Insert and hanger spacing, fastening details, and wall angle -suspension
member detail.
b. Splicing method for main and cross runners.
2. Product data: Submit copies of ICBO Evaluation Report for grid system.
3. Samples: Illustrate color and range of appearance of each type of acoustical materials.
B. MAINTENTANCE MATERIAL
1. Furnish extra materials equal to one percent of each type of acoustic materials supplied,
in original factory containers. Store where directed, and obtain receipt.
2. Submit copy of receipt for maintenance material.
0.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Allowable Tolerance of Finished Ceiling Systems: Level within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
B. Fire Hazard Classification @ Acoustical Ceiling System: Flame spread 0-25 (Class A)with UL
label on each carton.
C. Design and construct ceilings to resist lateral forces. Comply with IBC and install under permit in
accordance with such design. Include loads contributed by partitions terminating at ceiling and
light fixtures. Provide bracing above ceiling as required by the Seattle Building Code; compute
and brace for each direction separately. Provide all structural drawings and calculations as
required by the City of Seattle Building Department.
August 1, 2018 09 51 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 09 5100
City of Renton Public Works Shops ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 2 of 4
0.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels
indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness and fire classification, legible and intact.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Acoustical Tile Suspension Systems, General:
1. Comply with ASTM C 635 Structural Classification as Intermediate Duty Systems.
Provide fire rated systems at rated ceiling conditions. See Reflected Ceiling Plan for
locations.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armstrong.
3. Provide major components of each system from one manufacturer.
4. Provide main, cross, and concealed members of cold-rolled steel, minimum thickness of
0.020 inch, electro-zinc-coated.
5. Edge Molding: Channel or angle shaped, with exposed flange width of 15/16 inch,
factory painted low sheen satin white finish.
B. Exposed Suspension System: Provide 15/16 inch exposed flange, with factory painted low
sheen satin white finish.
C. Attachment Devices: Type recommended by suspension system manufacturer for attachment or
anchorage of ceiling hangers to structure above ceiling, sized for not less than 5-times the
hanger design load for the structural classification indicated; ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung.
D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1,
coating; provide not less than 10 gage (0.135 inch)wire.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Acoustic Panels at New Ceilings
1. Acceptable Products: Armstrong Prelude XL
2. Nominal Size: 24" x 48'
3. Color: White
August 1, 2018 09 51 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 09 5100
City of Renton Public Works Shops ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 3 of 4
4. Conform to ASTM E 1264 (similar to FS SS-S-118)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended acoustic units and soffits for unevenness,
irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.
B. Verify clearance above ceiling plane. Allow other trades to adjust materials within 5 inches of
face of grid system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install suspension systems in accord with ASTM C 636 and the NACA Specification
except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
2. Install rated ceilings in accordance with requirements of applicable UL Fire Resistance
Directory design number.
B. Where "equal" is shown instead of dimensions, provide two or more equal lengths, with a
tolerance of 1/4 inch per running foot.
C. Rough Suspension: Center on room with no unit under half size except as indicated.
1. Hangers:
a. Space hanger wires at 4 foot intervals along main runners.
b. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member, at light and 6
inches from vertical surfaces.
c. Do not splay wires more than 3 inches in a 4 foot vertical drop.
2. Main and Cross Runners:
a. Space as indicated.
b. Level and square to adjacent walls.
c. Wrap hanger wire at least three times.
3. Wall Molding: Avoid joints in runs under 4 feet long.
a. Install wall molding at intersections of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.
August 1, 2018 09 51 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 09 5100
City of Renton Public Works Shops ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Page 4 of 4
b. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect.
c. Attach to vertical surfaces with mechanical fasteners.
4. Fit members together with no joints over 0.020 inch.
5. Paint exposed fasteners, including "Pop-Rivets"to match grid.
6. Do not allow partition bracing from suspension system (install ceiling after walls are
finished).
D. Acoustical Units
1. Install in level plane in straight line courses.
2. Place materials to bear all around on suspension members.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.
B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.
C. Remove and replace damaged, or improperly installed units.
***END OF SECTION***
August 1, 2018 09 51 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 09 65 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops RESILIENT BASE
Page 1 of 3
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient base at all areas except at plywood wall and on top of concrete curbs as indicated on
drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide cove base complying with ASTM F-1861-02, Type TP, Group 2.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product data.
C. Detail Drawings: Mounting details with the appropriate adhesives for specific project substrates.
D. Samples: Verification samples of cove base 5" (127mm) long, of each type and color indicated.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Printed installation instructions for resilient base.
F. Maintenance Information:
1. Methods for maintaining installed products
2. Precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes
and performance.
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite.
B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified product has been received.
C. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Finishing Operations: Install resilient wall base after finishing operations, including floor covering,
painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard
warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights
Owner may have under Contract Documents.
August 1, 2018 09 65 13- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 09 65 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops RESILIENT BASE
Page 2 of 3
1. Warranty: 5 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials in original factory containers and store where directed.
1. One roll of rubber wall base.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flexco Corporation or approved equal.
1. Standard cove base profile
2. Dimensions: 6" height at walls with concrete curbs, 4" height typ. elsewhere. 1/8" thick
roll typ.
3. Length: 120 feet rolls
4. Finish: Low Gloss, satin (matte)
5. Corners: Factory made corners
6. Shall be manufactured from chemical and stain resistant flexible rubber.
7. Color of cove base to be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Adhesive: use adhesive recommended by resilient base manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTUER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer's requirements as published in installation instructions.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Confirm substrate conditions are acceptable for product installing
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect
materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage while
installing.
B. Substrate Preparation: Prepare substrate to be smooth, rigid, flat, level, permanently dry, clean
and free of foreign materials such as paint, dust, grease, oils, solvent, old adhesive residue, vinyl
August 1, 2018 09 65 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 09 65 13
City of Renton Public Works Shops RESILIENT BASE
Page 3 of 3
wall coverings, non-porous surfaces and all other contaminants that may interfere with adhesive
bond.
C. Concrete Moisture Testing: Conduct moisture tests in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations prior to installation. Do not proceed until test results are submitted to the
Engineer. If the test results exceed limitations, the installation must not proceed until the problem
has been corrected.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for specific resilient wall base detailed
specifications on installing.
1. Lay out base material and cut to as long lengths as practicable. Carefully match edges at
all seams or double-cut adjoining lengths. Arrange with joints so as to be practically
invisible. Adhere base material securely to substrate, laying material in straight lines with
top edges level and true. Heat treat base and apply sealant behind base.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of substantial completion.
B. Restrict cleaning for first 72 hours.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: See manufacturer's maintenance instructions. Remove temporary coverings and
protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed
products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove
construction debris from project site and legally dispose of.
End of Section 09 65 13
August 1, 2018 09 65 13-3
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 1 of 6
SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section specifies coating systems, surface preparations, and application requirements for
coating systems.
B. All exposed surfaces to be painted by Contractor unless specifically excluded.
C. Wall surfaces at new room in bid alternate.
1.02 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Unless specifically specified otherwise, the following surfaces are not to be painted:
1. Exposed finish metals (aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, copper, chrome).
2. Sealant, interior and exterior.
3. Exterior Concrete walking surfaces and horizontal site concrete, except for striping.
4. Permanently concealed surfaces need not be painted, except for prime coats on metal
and millwork.
5. All exposed interior concrete.
6. Prefinished metal siding, roofing, and associated flashing and accessories from the same
prefinished metal rolls.
7. Equipment with finish coating by Manufacturer.
8. Exposed conduits and electrical panels.
9 Existing Concrete Exterior Panels
10. Interior wall surfaces not disturbed by construction.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrication
B. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
C. Section 07 46 46— Fiber Cement Board Siding
D. Section 08 11 13- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
E. Section 08 36 13—Overhead Sectional Doors
E. Section 09 29 00- Gypsum Board
August 1, 2018 09 91 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 2 of 6
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Architectural Painting Specification Manual, latest edition, published by the Master Painters
Institute (MPI), 4090 Graveley Street, Burnaby, BC, V5C 3T6, (604)298-5183 shall be the
Specifications for this Section.
1.05 COLORS
A. Colors: As indicated or as selected by the Engineer. Do not order paints until all colors are
selected or scheduled. A maximum of 5 exterior and 5 interior colors will be selected.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Procedures.
B. Preparation of Samples: Approximately 4"x 12"size for trim finishes. Approximately 12" x 12"
sizes for all others.
C. Material Lists: Submit list of all products proposed for use for Engineer's approval, complete with
name of manufacturer, trade name or number, and purpose for which material is proposed. Use
same manufacturer's products for all coats of each individual finish unless otherwise approved by
Engineer. Contractor's option to use any one of the named manufacturers for each separate
finish provided exact colors selected by Engineer are available.
D. Manufacturers' Specification, Directions and Recommendations: Conform to manufacturer's
specifications, directions and recommendations for best results in use of each of their products
for each condition. Should they be at a variance with these specifications, report discrepancy to
Engineer for decision.
E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published literature for manufacturer's specifications,
physical characteristics and performance data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturer's
instructions and directions for application if not included in manufacturer's published literature.
F. Color Formula List&Touch-up paint: At time of acceptance of the project furnish to the Owner a
typewritten list of all colors and types of paint installed therein, complete with either the color
formula for duplication or identifying paint manufacturer's number for replacement paint. For
touch-up, supply one quart of each approved paint to Owner. Each quart is to be labeled for type
and color.
1.07 HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage of Materials: Deliver in unopened containers; manufacturer's original labels
thereon. Store and mix material where directed by Engineer.
B. Inflammable Material: Take extraordinary care to prevent fire. Open cans of paint and varnish
only as needed. Keep rubbing cloths and oil rags in tightly closed metal containers or remove
from building at close of each day's work.
August 1, 2018 09 91 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 3 of 6
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise specified, furnish paint, varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer, fillers and related
products for prime, intermediate and finish coats, of a type, brand and manufacturer listed in the
MPI Specifications Manual.
2.02 MIXING AND THINNING
A. Mix according to manufacturer's directions or as directed by Engineer.
2.03 SHEEN
A. Where gloss or sheen is specified or is listed as a standard for approval for the project, the terms
refer to tested luster, shine or sheen of the dry film and for purposes of this specification are
defined as follows, when tested with a 60-degree reflector meter.
1. Flat: 10-degree gloss or less.
2. Eggshell: 11 to 19-degree gloss.
3. Satin: 20 to 30-degree gloss.
4. Semi-gloss: 31 to 74-degree gloss.
5. Gloss: 75-degree gloss or more.
B. Unless otherwise specified provide eggshell sheen.
2.04 TEXTURE
A. Unless otherwise specified, finish of paint to be smooth and free from texture. Use the
appropriate method of applying paint to avoid texturing the surface.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
A. All surfaces must be smooth, dry, uniform in texture, clean and free of all greases, dust, dirt and
other detrimental substances. Remove or protect all hardware, lighting fixtures and similar
finished items; return same to their original state on completion of painting. Determine that
proper temperatures have been attained and will be maintained.
B. Preparation of Surfaces
1. Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Wash with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Clean.
2. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Remove all rust and scale; wash with appropriate solvent; wire
brush all unpainted welds; touch up all bare metal and scratched and abraded surfaces;
recoat all wire brushed surfaces. If necessary to adequately clean surface, blast per
recommendations of paint manufacturer.
August 1, 2018 09 91 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 4 of 6
3. Finished Wood Surfaces: Sand as necessary to obtain perfectly smooth surfaces. See
that all nails are properly set.
4. Plywood wall surfaces: Sand as necessary to remove all splinters and to obtain a smooth
surface.
3.02 APPLICATION OF FINISHES
A. Number of Coats: As specified hereinafter for each type of finish. On shop primed work an
additional prime coat is not intended, except touch-up. If necessary to obtain uniform color or
sheen, add additional coats.
B. Thickness of Coats: Use ample undiluted materials; apply in uniform thickness over entire areas;
do not exceed manufacturer's recommended spreading rate per gallon. Conform to MPI
Specifications Manual.
C. Colors of Coats: Tint prime coats if necessary to obtain uniform finish coats. Vary color between
coats; final coat to exactly match samples.
D. Approval of Successive Coats: Obtain Engineer's approval of each coat before succeeding coat
is applied; without this approval, Engineer reserves right to require an additional coat.
E. Workmanship: Highest quality of skilled workmen to Engineer's satisfaction. Spread material
evenly without runs, sags, thin spots and skips. Cut sharp lines against unpainted surfaces and
other colors. Allow each coat to harden at least 24 hours between coats. Finish surfaces
uniform, free from streaks, blotches and other defects.
F. Touch-up Steel Work: Touch-up abraded spots as soon after erection as possible before other
than very light rusting can occur. Use same material as used for shop coat. Remove all rust
before paint is applied.
3.03 EXTERIOR WORK
A. Paint all ferrous, galvanized and shop-primed metal surfaces, except items specified not to be
painted. Paint all items as specified hereinafter.
B. Iron & Steel
1. 1 coat alkyd primer
2. 2 coats alkyd finish, satin sheen
C. Galvanized Metal where metal is indicated to be painted on drawings
1. 1 coat primer.
2. 2 coats finish, satin sheen.
D. Galvanized Metal which is hot dip galvanized.
1. Do not paint, except bollards
August 1, 2018 09 91 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 5 of 6
E. Bollards
1. 1 coat primer.
2. 2 coats finish, satin sheen.
F. Overhead doors and mandoors
1. 1 coat primer
2. 2 coats finish
G. Cement Fiber Siding
1. At unprimed surfaces, including cuts, 1 coat primer
2. 2 coats finish, satin sheen
3.04 PAINTING OF INTERIOR WORK
A. Paint all ferrous, and shop-primed metal surfaces, except items specified not to be painted. Paint
all items as specified hereinafter.
B. Iron &Steel- Overhead doors, hollow metal doors and frames, and exposed interior structure,
except at rolling surfaces.
1. 1 coat primer
2. 2 coats finish, satin sheen
C. Galvanized Metal where metal is visible
1. Do not paint except where noted to be painted.
D. Gypsum Wallboard
1. 1 coat acrylic primer
2. 2 coats acrylic enamel, eggshell sheen
3. Where gwb surfaces are to be covered with wall covering, provide 1 coat alkyd primer.
E. Plywood at walls
1. 2 coats clear polyurethane varnish
3.05 EXPOSED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Paint the following items 2 coats to match color selected by Engineer.
1. All items which receive prime coat under Mechanical and Electrical specifications.
August 1, 2018 09 91 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 09 91 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PAINTING
Page 6 of 6
2. All piping, grilles, registers, and similar.
B. Paint interior surfaces of ductwork that can be seen through grilles, louvers or registers with 1
coat flat black paint. Coordinate with mechanical.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean paint spatters, spots and stains from finished surfaces. Replace or repair damaged
surfaces which are not satisfactorily cleaned as directed by the Engineer.
3.07 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Contractor responsible, from whatever cause; refinish without extra cost. Repair all work
damaged during construction; leave in first-class condition. Where uniform color and sheen of
surface is not obtained, add additional coats as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to
Owner.
End of Section 09 91 00
August 1, 2018 09 91 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 1 of 7
DOCUMENT 22 0000 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and
Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Division 22.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Design Intent:
B. Provide labor, materials and appliances necessary for satisfactory installation of inechanical
work ready to operate in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of
Division 22 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in the following specification
sections:
22 00 00 Plumbing General Conditions
22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing
22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage
22 15 00 General Service Compressed Air Systems
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over
mechanical installations.
1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)with local amendments.
2. International Mechanical Code (IMC)with local amendments.
3. International Building Code (IBC)with local amendments.
4. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC)with local amendments.
5. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70.
6. Requirements of OSHA and EPA.
7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards.
8. ASME code for construction of pressure vessels.
9. American Gas Association (AGA)Standards.
10. ASTM, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections.
11. Local Sewer District Requirements.
12. Local Water District Requirements.
August 1, 2018 22 00 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 2 of 7
13. Local Health Department Requirements.
14. Washington State Energy Code.
1.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated herein and on drawings are
those upon which mechanical design is based. Other manufacturers with products
considered equal in general quality may be listed without specific model designation.
Manufacturers not listed must be submitted for approval.
B. Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model,
specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a
manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product.
C. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution.
D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and must guarantee
equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to
accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, "or approved" may be assumed for all products in Division 22.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under"Part 2
Products" of Division 22 and all additional products noted on drawings or required for
completion of sequence of operations.
B. Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each Division. Multi-
part submittals will be returned without review.
1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company.
2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item.
3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing
in index.
C. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag)and/or
specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for
use.
D. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that
vendor.
E. Submitted product information shall include (as applicable) but not be limited to the following
information:
1. Product description
2. Manufacturer and model
3. Dimensions
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 3 of 7
4. Performance Ratings (i.e. capacity, rpm, HP, temperature)
5. Construction Materials
6. Ratings (i.e. UL, ASTM, NEMA, etc)
7. Accessories
F. f requested by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any
equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested.
G. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals.
1.6 PLUMBING PERMIT
A. Plumbing contractor shall prepare all documents for plumbing permit application, submit for
and obtain the permit. All costs and fees to obtain the permit shall be paid by the Plumbing
Contractor.
B. Contractor shall not commence work until permit is obtained. Contractor is solely
responsible to insure that the permit application and any revisions are submitted in a timely
manner so as not to impact project schedule.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section
with minimum three years' experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years' experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
B. Protect all equipment, materials, and insulation from weather, construction traffic, dirt, water,
chemicals, and damage by storing in original packaging and under cover. Where original
packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until
installation.
C. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation.
D. Protect piping from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures
on piping and fittings. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
E. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.
F. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting
units.
G. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 4 of 7
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
B. Do not install underground piping or valves when bedding is wet or frozen.
C. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
recommended by manufacturer. Maintain temperature during and after installation for
minimum period of 24 hours.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
B. Verify by field measurements, sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction
and layout.
C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information
furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating,
uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work.
B. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such locations
in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information
furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating,
uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems.
D. Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The
contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate
between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments to
piping as necessary to fit conditions including but is not limited to relocation, offsets, and
transitions.
E. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to
lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping. Starting with the
lowest priority, the HVAC and plumbing contractors shall provide whatever materials,
offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict.
F. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine
which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no
additional cost.
G. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. Costs for
modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor.
H. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater
quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the
Contractor otherwise in writing.
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 5 of 7
I. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the
necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the
Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on
the drawings. Any device or fixture roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied
centerlines or as required by good practice must be repositioned at no cost to the Owner.
J. Where the word `verify' is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the
existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified
conditions without additional cost to the Owner.
K. Coordinate trenching, excavating, bedding, backfilling of buried systems with requirements
of this specification.
L. Coordinate wall openings, piping rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and
electrical rough-in locations to accommodate Work of this Section.
1.12 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING
A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other
trades where necessary for installation of plumbing work. Perform work only with craftsmen
skilled in their respective trades.
B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for
openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of
rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for piping.
C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as
not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without
breaking out around holes.
1.13 SALVAGE
A. Remove excess piping and plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove scrap pipe
and all other excess materials from the site.
B. Comply with contractor's Construction Waste Management Plan
1.14 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout.
1. Execution of Architect's and Engineer's final observation reports (punchlist)
2. Record Drawings
3. Testing
4. Warranty
B. See Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.15 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction
debris, corrosion, etc.
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 6 of 7
B. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other
material from entering and collecting inside of pipe and equipment. Any collection of material
shall be thoroughly cleaned before equipment startup and if necessary again before owner
occupancy.
C. Clean exterior of all exposed pipe and equipment.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit one digital file with all drawings in PDF format.
B. Show location of equipment, location and size of piping. Locate all valves and similar
equipment with tag or label identification. Indicate locations and elevations of exterior pipe
and utility connections. Maintain continuously updated drawings during progress of project.
C. Record actual locations of equipment, clean-outs, controlling devices, and all above grade,
under-floor, and buried piping.
1.17 WARRANTIES AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE
A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating
order at time of delivery to Owner.
B. Furnish one year warranty from date of substantial completion for all systems unless
specifically noted otherwise.
C. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from
date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to
neglect or carelessness of the Owner.
D. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of
equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees that
exceed one year (e.g.: water heaters).
E. Make all necessary balancing and control adjustments during first year of operation.
F. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work.
PART 2 -NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DOCUMENTATION
A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are
required at any time during construction contractor shall submit drawings, review with
authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. Engineer will revise and/or prepare
drawings for submittal.
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 22 00 00
City of Renton Public Works Shops PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 7 of 7
3.2 INSPECTION
A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by
the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor
shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and
approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original
condition.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority
having jurisdiction.
B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code and local
authority having jurisdiction.
C. Test storm drainage piping system in accordance with applicable code and local authority
having jurisdiction.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
C. Use acceptable cleaning products per IAQ Management Plan.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
B. Do not permit use of plumbing fixtures before final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
August 1, 2018 22 00 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 1 of 7
DOCUMENT 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry(MSS)Standards SP-58 and SP-69.
B. Comply with Federal "Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water AcY'—2011. Pipes, pipe fittings,
plumbing fittings and fixtures shall be "Lead Free" meaning not more than a weighted
average of 0.25% lead in wetted surfaces.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section includes products, assemblies and methods applicable to more than one of the
systems specified in the following sections of Division 22.
1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Where two or more units of same class of equipment are required, use products of a single
manufacturer. All equipment shall be new and free from damage.
B. Provide major equipment components with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number
and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place.
C. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,
bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installed products shall have surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke
developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction's requirements and AWS D1.1 for welding
hanger and support attachments to building structure.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
C. Plumbing Piping - DWV: Cast-iron
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
August 1, 2018 22 05 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 2 of 7
6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
D. Secondary Pipe Positioning and Supports:
1. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of scrap
framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means
of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. Hubbard "HOLDRITE"
support systems or approved equal.
2. For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4" and under, use HOLDRITE Stout Bracketsr""
with HOLDRITE Stout Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26).
2.2 HANGER ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded.
2.3 INSERTS
A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with
lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit
threaded hanger rods.
2.4 PIPE ROOF SUPPORT
A. Manufacturers: Erico Caddy or approved equal.
B. General: Pyramid 50, polyethylene closed-cell form, electro-galvanized 16 gauge steel metal
cover pipe clamp support.
C. 1-1/2" and smaller pipe: Pyramid EZ, UV stabilized EPDM, adjustable height.
2.5 ACCESS PANELS
A. Milcor or approved equal.
B. Architectural grade, 14 guage frame and door, painted steel or stainless steel based on
application.
2.6 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, malleable iron, threaded.
2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
3. PVC Piping: PVC.
4. CPVC Piping: CPVC.
B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 3 of 7
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2. PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
3. CPVC Piping: CPVC flanges.
4. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections,
furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or Schedule 80 threaded
PVC pipe (ASTM D2464).
2.7 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage galvanized steel.
C. Lead Flashing:
1. Waterproofing: 5 Ib./sq. ft sheet lead.
2. Soundproofing: 1 Ib./sq. ft sheet lead.
D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.
E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.8 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sealant: Acrylic
D. Size large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous
insulation or installation of fire sealant at fire-rated walls. Note that insulation is
discontinuous at fire walls.
2.9 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers: Allied Tube &Conduit, B-Line Systems, Unistrut or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage steel with holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.10 SUPPORT ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe Alignment Guides: Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit
standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick
insulation, minimum 3 inch travel.
B. Swivel Joints: Bronze body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber(Buna-N)
o-ring seals.
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 4 of 7
2.11 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches high.
B. Metal Tags: Brass, Aluminum or Stainless Steel with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-
1/2 inches diameter with finished edges. Plain English designations.
C. Information Tags: Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or"Warning" and message;
size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
D. Tag Chart: Plain English designations so no chart or index is required.
2.12 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color and Lettering shall conform to ASME A13.1 and UPC. Specific examples are noted in
the table below.
Service Background Letter Color Legend
Color
Waste Black White SANITARY SEWER
Vent Black White SANITARY VENT
Condensate glack White CONDENSATE
Drain
Storm Drainage Black White STORM
Compressed glue White COMPRESSED AIR
Air
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around
pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
D. Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,
minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, imprinted with service type in large letters,
manufactured for direct burial service.
2.13 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.
B. Color code plumbing valves green.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Provide access to existing piping and equipment and other installations remaining active and
requiring access.
B. Extend existing piping installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
installations.
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 5 of 7
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of adhesives or firestopping.
C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
E. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION-CLEARANCE
A. Appliances and equipment shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and
replacement.
B. A minimum of 36"of clearance shall be provided in front of the control side of appliances
and equipment. Provide additional space when required by NEC.
3.4 INSTALLATION —ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for installation at all concealed equipment which requires service,
maintenance or adjustment to include but not limited to equipment, valves, open drains,
control valves and controls.
B. Provide location layout and required size for all access panels to general contractor. Layout
shall be regular and consistent, maintain a uniform wall panel height of 24" centerline above
finished floor, unless noted otherwise.
C. Furnish access panels to general contractor for installation.
D. Paint installed access panels to match wall or ceiling. Verify that panels are not painted
shut.
3.5 INSTALLATION -PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
F. Where piping is parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.
G. Adjust hangers and supports as required to bring system to proper line and grade. Piping
shall be plumb with floor and parallel/perpendicular to building structure.
H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 6 of 7
I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping, or sheet lead packing
between pipe and hanger.
J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation. Insulated piping shall have insulation run continuous through hangers and
supports with use of rigid inserts. Insulation shall be glued to both sides of insert at hangers
and supports, no insulation gaps are allowed. Refer to Section 22 07 00.
M. Support of pipe, tubing and equipment shall be accomplished by means of engineered
products, specific to each application. Makeshift, field devised methods shall not be allowed.
N. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
3.6 INSTALLATION —SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Provide seismic restraints and hangers in compliance with IBC 1613 and ASCE 7.
B. Seismic Bracing: Follow IBC 1613, ASCE 7, SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and the
following.
1. Bracing shall be bidder designed to resist seismic loading in accord with Chapter 16 of
the International Building Code, ASCE 7 or the SMACNA guideline.
2. Provide seismic calculations as required for Ip= 1.5.
3.7 INSTALLATION-PIPING PROTECTION
A. Provide protective shield plates in concealed locations where piping, other than cast-iron or
steel, is installed in studs,joists or rafters. Plates shall be 16 gage steel and cover the pipe
area plus 2". Shields may be omitted if piping is more than 1-1/2"from nearest edge of
structural member.
B. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals, such as copper tubing and steel, by use of
copper-plated, plastic coated, or flexible materials. All supports which contact copper tubing
shall be copper plated.
3.8 INSTALLATION -FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or
waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around pipes penetrating equipment rooms for sound
control.
C. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead
worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet
size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-
flash, and seal.
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 22 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
PLUMBING
Page 7 of 7
D. Seal drains watertight to adjacent materials.
E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above
roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.9 INSTALLATION -SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide
for continuous insulation wrapping.
D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent
work with insulation and caulk or fireproof airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or
escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
3.10 INSTALLATION -IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
D. Pipe Labels: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification on straight runs including risers and drops with spacing not to
exceed 20 feet.
4. Locate adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
E. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of
panel closest to equipment.
F. Equipment and Valve Tag Index: Plain English designations so no chart or index is
required.
3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by firestoppping material installation.
END OF SECTION 220500
August 1, 2018 22 05 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1300
City of Renton Public Works Shops FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Page 1 of 5
DOCUMENT 22 1300 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL— NOT USED
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe & Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I,
Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI)and listed by NSF International.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, long pattern cast iron, hubless.
2. Joints: Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel coupling with all type 304 stainless steel
shield and band assembly, 80 in/Ibs worm drive. ASTM C-564 Neoprene gasket. CISPI
310 and certified by NSF international. Minimum 4 clamps up to 4", 6 clamps for 5" and
larger. Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or approved equal.
B. ABS Pipe: Schedule 40, ABS material, DWV, Cellular Core, bell and spigot style solvent
sealed ends. NSF Standard 14, ASTM F628, ASTM D3965.
1. Fittings: ABS, DWV, ASTM D2661.
2. Joints: Solvent weld. ASTM D2235.
C. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 solid wall PVC, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. NSF Standard
14, ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784.
1. Fittings: Schedule 40, PVC, ASTM D2665.
2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BOTH WASTE AND VENT,ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe & Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301, hub-less. Made in USA by AB&I,
Charlotte or Tyler marked with collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI)and listed by NSF International.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, long pattern cast iron, hubless.
2. Joints: Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel coupling with all type 304 stainless steel
shield and band assembly, 80 in/Ibs worm drive. ASTM C-564 Neoprene gasket. CISPI
310 and certified by NSF international. Minimum 4 clamps up to 4", 6 clamps for 5" and
larger. Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125 or approved equal.
3. Joints: Standard-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel coupling with all type 304 stainless
steel shield and band assembly. ASTM C-564 Neoprene gasket. CISPI 310 and
certified by NSF international. Husky HD 2000, Clamp-All 80, Mission Heavyweight or
approved equal.
August 1, 2018 22 13 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1300
City of Renton Public Works Shops FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Page 2 of 5
2.3 EQUIPMENT DRAINS (CONDENSATE)
A. Copper Tubing: Type L, hard drawn. ASTM B88.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting
range 430 to 535 degrees F.
B. CPVC Pipe: Schedule 40. ASTM D2846. Not for use in air plenum.
1. Fittings: Schedule 40 CPVC. ASTM D2846.
2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. ASTM D2846.
2.4 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or approved equal.
B. General Service: Cast iron body, membrane clamp, adjustable collar, polished nickel
bronze strainer, trap primer connection. Provide funnel where scheduled.
C. Garage: Square top heavy duty parking deck drain with coated cast iron body, gasketed
drain support flange, heavy duty slotted grate, underdeck clamp.
2.5 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Josam, Wade or approved equal.
B. Exterior or interior vehicle areas: Heavy-Duty round coated cast iron body and cover with
bronze plug.
C. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame with bronze gasket
threaded plug and non-skid cover.
D. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and bronze gasket
threaded plug.
E. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Type of ferrule, top and cover as required for the type of floor
construction, finish surface and traffic conditions. Cleanout construction material to match
waste piping with anchor flange, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with
gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in
finished floor areas. For carpet provide marker. For cast iron construction provide bronze
gasket threaded plug.
F. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Cleanout construction material to match waste piping, line type
with round gasket threaded plug, and round stainless steel access cover secured with
machine screw. For cast iron construction provide bronze gasket threaded plug.
G. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on
vertical waste stacks.
2.6 TRAP PRIMER
A. Manufacturers: PPP, Wade, J.R. Smith, Josam, Watts, Zurn or approved equal.
August 1, 2018 22 13 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1300
City of Renton Public Works Shops FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Page 3 of 5
B. Construction: Automatic, bronze body, integral vacuum breaker.
2.7 TRAP SEAL MAINTENANCE DEVICE
A. Manufacturers: Sure-Seal, Jay R Smith or approved equal.
B. Inline floor drain trap sealer, commercial grade, neoprene rubber diaphragm and rubber
sealing gaskets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
B. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
C. Verify and provide required extensions, clamps and drain styles to match floor construction
and finish.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate location of floor drains in mechanical spaces with mechanical contractor
equipment layout.
B. Protect floor drain strainer during construction.
C. Traps:
1. Install trap seal maintenance devices only where called for on plans or approved by
both engineer and AHJ; at all other drain locations provide automatic trap primers.
2. Install automatic trap primers throughout at site drains and floor drains except those
located in showers or provided with trap seal maintenance devices.
3. Provide access panels for automatic trap primers.
4. Adjust automatic trap primer pressure setting for proper operation.
D. Align square floor drains with floor tiles or parallel with walls.
3.3 CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Provide condensate piping for air-conditioning equipment. Coordinate quantity required with
mechanical contractor. Provide minimum 3"deep p-trap at equipment.
B. Determine best routing to nearest indirect waste using minimum 3/4" piping with minimum
1/8" per foot slope. Acceptable indirect waste locations are service sink, laundry sink, floor
drain or air gap fitting into waste pipe. Provide open drain box or access panel for air gap
fitting as approved by local authority. Discharge onto roof or at grade is acceptable if
allowed by local code, provide splash block.
C. If proper slope cannot be achieved advise Mechanical Contractor to provide condensate
pump.
August 1, 2018 22 13 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1300
City of Renton Public Works Shops FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Page 4 of 5
3.4 INSTALLATION -BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Verify connection to existing piping system size, location, and invert are as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Provide connections to site mains as indicated on drawings.
C. Grade piping at 1/4" per foot where possible, but in no case less than 1/8" per foot. Install all
main vertical soil and waste stacks with provisions for expansion and extend full size to roof
line as vents.
D. Install buried ABS piping per ASTM D2321 and ASTM F1668.
E. Backfill trenching with pea-gravel if available at site for other purposes. If pea-gravel is
unavailable, native soil may be used for backfill if all the following conditions are met.
1. All broken concrete and sharp stones (+1"dia.)to be removed from backfill soil.
2. All large stones (3' dia. or bigger)to be removed from backfill soil.
3. Piping shall be bedded on min. 2" thickness of replaced "rock free"soil and then
checked for grade.
F. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 ft of cover.
G. Establish minimum separation from other services piping in accordance with Code.
H. Provide piping layout to satisfy the UPC requirements for suds relief.
I. Route pipe in straight line.
J. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
3.5 INSTALLATION -ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient at 1/4" per foot where possible, but in
no case less than 1/8" per foot. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more
space than necessary.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Install piping on interior side of building insulation.
E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location
through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs,joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from
framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the
piping area within framing plus 2"on each side along framing.
August 1, 2018 22 13 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1300
City of Renton Public Works Shops FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
Page 5 of 5
H. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
I. Provide access panel where valves and fittings are not accessible.
J. Install non-conducting dielectric connections whereverjointing dissimilar metals.
K. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot minimum. Provide 1/8
inch per foot only where necessary and allowed by local jurisdiction. Maintain gradients.
L. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
M. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
N. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 22 05 00.
3.6 INSTALLATION -SANITARY WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS
A. Install sanitary waste and vent piping systems in accordance with ASME B31.9 and local
plumbing code.
B. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
C. Flash and counterflash. Install vents passing through roof with roof flashing and
counterflashing assemblies. 31b. lead soldered joints and seams, 24 x 24 base pad and
counterflashed into pipe.
D. Install automatic trap primers throughout at floor drains. Provide access panel for trap
primers if necessary.
E. Provide cleanouts every 50 feet and install at all locations required by code and to permit
cleaning of all waste piping. Provide cleanouts full size of pipe, but no larger than 4".
Coordinate with Architect when cleanouts are located in finished rooms. Install cleanout
threads with graphite. Locate cleanouts to clear cabinet work and to be easily accessible.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Obtain written approval of local Plumbing Authority prior to covering or concealing any work.
B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system to hydrostatic test of 10 feet head of water.
END OF SECTION 221300
August 1, 2018 22 13 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 6
DOCUMENT 22 1500 GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install air compressor, piping and accessories for a complete compressed air
system.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 black, seamless. Manufactured in the USA.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron Class 150, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding
type, Class 150.
2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper fittings and silver brazed joints.
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K drawn.
1. Copper Press Fittings: Conforming to ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME
B16.22, wrought copper and bronze with EPDM O-ring seals.
2. Joints: Compression type made with manufacturer's tool. 200 psi working pressure.
D. Stainless Steel Piping: Vic-Press Type 304/304L, Schedule 10S, ASTM A312
1. Fittings: Austenitic stainless steel, Type 304/304L, complete with synthetic rubber
HNBR o-rings and pipe stops.
2. Use a Victaulic"PFT"series tool with the proper sized jaw for pressing.
3. Joints: Stainless steel, pressure-sealed, Victaulic Vic Press 304r""
2.2 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, bronze unions with brazed joints.
3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper
solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
August 1, 2018 22 15 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 6
B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, 300 psi CWP, slip-on bronze flanges.
3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers: NIBCO or equal by Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Stockham or approved
equal.
B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, type 316
stainless steel ball, full port, Teflon (TFE)seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded
ends with union, lever handle. Nibco Model 585-70-66.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Mason Industries, Metraflex or approved equal.
B. 2 inches and Smaller: Braided stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel
exterior braiding, maximum working pressure 170 psig. Mason Industries BSS/Braided
Stainless Steel Hose, GU-MN 3�4�� by 10" or approved.
C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel
exterior braiding, Class 150 flanged ends; maximum working pressure 190 psig.
2.5 RELIEF VALVES
A. Relief Valves: Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
pressure actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled.
2.6 COMPRESSED AIR OUTLETS
A. Manufacturers: Lincoln #815 or approved equal.
B. Compressed Air Outlets: Quick Connector: 3/8\ 1/4 inch brass, snap on connector with self
closing valve.
2.7 HOSE REELS
A. Manufacturers: Graco XD, Reelcraft or approved equal.
B. Heavy duty type, steel construction, dual pedestal frame, powder coat finish, spring
retractable, '/2" inlet, '/2"outlet, 300 psi rated.
C. Hose: '/2", 250 psi rated.
D. Accessories:
1. Mounting bracket and stainless steel hardware.
2. Hose ball stop kit.
August 1, 2018 22 15 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 6
3. Hose inlet kit.
2.8 AIR COMPRESSOR
A. Single Stage Air Compressor: rotary screw compressor unit mounted on horizontal ASME
receiver with air-cooled after cooler, dry-type filter silencer, auto condensate drain safety
valve, isolation valve, pressure gauge, motor starter and belt guard. Quincy Northwest or
approved equal.
B. Screw Compressors:
1. Unit: Direct drive, open drive, 3600 RPM, fixed compression, rotary screw compressor
with control panel.
2. Features: Differential pressure oil pump, oil separator and filter, oil charging valve,
compressor bearings with ABMA 9 L10 life expectancy at 100,000 hours.
3. Motor: Open drip proof flange squirrel cage induction, close coupled to compressor.
4. Control Panel: Factory mounted and wired NEMA 250 Type 1 \4 enclosure, with starter
and refrigeration controls including:
a. Non-fused molded-case, disconnect switch.
b. Single point power connection and grounding lug.
c. Anti-recycle timer.
d. Solid state overload relay for compressor.
e. Phase loss-reversal monitor.
f. Cycle counter and hour meter for compressor.
g. Automatic shutdown on compressor overload.
5. Automatic Capacity Reduction: Continuously variable slide valve with infinitely variable
control to 25 percent of full load.
C. Controls:
1. Pressure Switch: Line voltage contactor to break at 100 psi with minimum differential of
20 psi.
2. Compressor Regulation: Lead-lag switch with time delay relay.
3. Electrical Alternation: Operate lead compressor for 12 hour time period. When lead
compressor fails, start second compressor to automatically maintain air pressure.
D. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box.
2.9 AIR RECEIVER
A. Integral to air compressor.
August 1, 2018 22 15 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 6
2.10 FILTER/PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Manufacturers: Amflo, Parker, Norgren or approved equal.
B. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring loaded, manual pressure setting
adjustment, rated for 250 psig inlet pressure.
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGE
A. Manufacturers: Marsh, Trerice, Weiss or approved equal.
B. Gauge: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front
calibration adjustment, black scale on white background.
1. Case: Cast aluminum.
2. Bourdon Tube: Phosphor bronze or Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inch diameter within 7'of floor, 6 inch diameter over 7'.
4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: 1/2 percent.
5. Scale: 0-200 Psi.
2.12 AUTOMATIC DRAIN TRAP
A. Manufacturers: Posi-Drain, Norgren or equal model by compressor manufacturer.
B. Float seal design, self-cleaning, 120 V solenoid, full adjustment of both drain cycle (5sec-
50min) and valve open periods (1-15sec), NEMA 4X enclosure.
2.13 ISOLATORS
A. Mason industries ND-C Green 140-160 pounds 0.50" maximum static deflection.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
3.2 INSTALLATION -ABOVE GROUND PIPING -COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
A. Slope main piping to compressor or additional system low points at 0.5-1.0% grade.
B. Install drip legs at low points of piping system with drain valves. Locate drain values in
accessible locations.
August 1, 2018 22 15 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 6
C. Install take-off to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take off. Slope take-off
piping to outlets.
D. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gauges where
outlets are indicated.
E. Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with
plug.
F. Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
G. Stainless Steel Pipe with press-type Joints: Square cut ends to plus or minus 0.030 inches
tolerance. Remove burrs and clean ends. Fully insert tubing into fitting and mark pipe ends
to ensure full insertion into coupling or fitting during assembly. Press joint using
manufacturer's tool with proper sized jaw.
H. Copper Pipe with press-type Joints: Remove burrs and clean ends. Fully insert tubing into
fitting and mark pipe ends to ensure full insertion into coupling or fitting. Check alignment
against mark to assure tubing is fully inserted. Press joint using manufacturer's tool.
I. Install pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions.
J. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location
through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs,joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from
framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the
piping area within framing plus 2"on each side along framing.
K. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping.
L. Install pipe identification.
M. Except where indicated, install manual shut off valves with stem vertical and accessible for
operation and maintenance.
N. Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves. Install pressure reducing valves
with bypasses and isolation valves to allow maintenance without interruption of service.
O. Install strainers on inlet side of pressure regulators.
3.3 INSTALLATION -EQUIPMENT
A. Install system in accord with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
B. Install air compressor on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6
inches larger than compressor base on each side.
C. Install air compressor unit on vibration isolators. Level, grout, and bolt in place.
D. Install air valve and drain connection on horizontal casing.
E. Install condensate drain piping to nearest floor drain. Determine best pipe routing.
F. Install bypass with valves around air dryer. Use factory insulated inlet and outlet
connections.
August 1, 2018 22 15 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 22 1500
City of Renton Public Works Shops GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED
AIR SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 6
G. Provide bypass with valves, around receivers.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air
piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9.
B. Verify for atmospheric pressure in piping systems, other than system under test.
C. Test entire system with dry compressed air or dry nitrogen at 150 psig for a minimum
duration of 2 hours, prove tight. If loss of pressure occurs, determine cause and remake
joints. Caulking or patching not permitted.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Blow systems clear of free moisture and foreign matter.
END OF SECTION 221500
August 1, 2018 22 15 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 1 of 11
DOCUMENT 23 0000 HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and
Division 01 - General Requirements for all work in Division 23.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Design Intent:
B. Provide labor, materials and appliances necessary for satisfactory installation of inechanical
work ready to operate in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of
Division 23 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in the following specification
sections:
23 00 00 HVAC General Conditions
23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 74 00 Outdoor Air-Handling Units
23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioners& Heat Pumps
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over
mechanical installation.
1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)with local amendments.
2. International Mechanical Code (IMC)with local amendments.
3. International Building Code (IBC)with local amendments.
4. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70.
5. Requirements of OSHA and EPA.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 2 of 11
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)Codes and Standards.
7. ASME code for construction of pressure vessels.
8. American Gas Association (AGA) Standards.
9. ASTM, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections.
10. Local Sewer District Requirements.
11. Local Water District Requirements.
12. Local Health Department Requirements.
13. Washington State Energy Code.
14. SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction—2007 Edition,
and ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999
1.4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated herein and on drawings are
those upon which mechanical design is based. Other manufacturers with products
considered equal in general quality may be listed without specific model designation.
Manufacturers not listed shall be submitted for approval, see Division 01.
B. Substitutions will be evaluated based on product manufacturer only. Specific product model,
specifications, options and accessories will be evaluated during submittals. Approval of a
manufacturer substitution does not constitute approval of the submitted product.
C. Any equipment other than the basis of design is considered a substitution.
D. In selecting substitute equipment, the Contractor is responsible for and shall guarantee
equal performance and fit. Cost of redesign and all additional costs incurred to
accommodate the substituted equipment shall be borne by the Contractor.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, "or approved" may be assumed for all products in Division 23.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide one electronic copy of product data submittals for all products listed under"Part 2
Products" of Division 23 and all additional products noted on drawings or required for
completion of sequence of operations.
B. Electronic: Submittals shall be complete in one PDF file with bookmarks for each
Division. Multi-part submittals will be returned without review.
1. First Page: Name of Project, Owner, Location & Contracting Company.
2. Index Page: List of specification sections with contents by Tag or item.
3. Bookmarks: Electronic bookmark of each specification section corresponding to listing
in index.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 3 of 11
C. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation (Tag)and/or
specification section, as applicable. Indicate selected model and all accessories intended for
use.
D. Equipment vendor cover page with contact information shall precede submittal by that
vendor.
E. If requested by Architect or Engineer, submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions on any
equipment, procedures, or certifications so requested.
F. Do no ordering, fabrication or manufacturing of products until return of approved submittals.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit drawings and/or diagrams for review and for job coordination in
all cases where deviation from the Contract Drawings are contemplated because ofjob
conditions, interference or substitution of equipment, or when requested by the Engineer for
purposes of clarification of the Contractor's intent.
B. By submission of ductwork shop drawings, the Contractor acknowledges that coordination
has been done to ensure that all ductwork fits and that no conflicts exist.
C. The Architect's review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
deviations from the Contract drawings or specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the
attention of the Architect to such deviations at the time of the submission, nor shall it relieve
him from responsibility for errors or omission in such shop drawings.
1.7 HVAC PERMIT
A. HVAC contractor shall prepare all documents for mechanical permit application, submit for,
and obtain the permit. HVAC Contractor shall pay all costs and fees to obtain the permit.
B. Contractor shall not commence work until permit is obtained. Contractor is solely
responsible to insure that the permit application and any revisions are submitted in a timely
manner so as not to impact project schedule.
C. Permit documents may include (but are not limited to)the following:
1. Mechanical Load Calculations (Mechanical Consultant will provide load calculations to
the Contractor).
2. Acoustical Reports. Mechanical Contractor shall obtain the required acoustical reports
from the acoustical engineer for the project.
3. Energy Compliance Forms.
D. Contractor shall retain services of a third party structural engineer to provide support,
anchoring and seismic calculations for all applicable equipment.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9— Building Services Piping for installation of
piping systems and ASME Section IX—Welding and Brazing Qualifications for welding
materials and procedures.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 4 of 11
B. Perform Work in accordance with the International Mechanical Code including State and
local amendments.
C. Provide products requiring electrical connections listed and classified by UL as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
D. Perform Work in accordance with Washington State Energy Code.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years' experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years'
experience.
1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial
Completion.
1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification.
B. Protect all equipment, materials, and insulation from weather, construction traffic, dirt, water,
chemicals, and damage by storing in original packaging and under cover. Where original
packaging is insufficient, provide additional protection. Maintain protection in place until
installation.
C. Inspect all products and materials for damage prior to installation.
D. Protect piping from all entry of foreign materials by providing temporary end caps or closures
on piping and fittings. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
E. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
F. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.
G. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation,
and by storing indoors. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
H. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting
units.
I. Protect indoor chillers from weather by storing under roof.
J. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to
shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system.
K. Comply with contractor's construction Indoor Air Quality(IAQ) Plan.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 5 of 11
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply fire stopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air
is below 60 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum
3 days after installation of fire stopping materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
C. Do not install underground piping, tanks, or tank foundations when bedding is wet or frozen.
D. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range
recommended by manufacturer. Maintain temperature during and after installation for
minimum period of 24 hours.
E. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps,
supports and test plugs.
F. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
G. Maintain water integrity of roof during and after installation of chimney or vent.
H. Do not install condensing unit foundation pad when ground is frozen or muddy.
1.14 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
B. Verify by field measurements, sizes and configurations are compatible with wall construction
and layout.
C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information
furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating,
uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems.
1.15 COORDINATION
A. Visit the site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work.
B. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such locations
in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with information
furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating,
uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems.
D. HVAC drawings are diagrammatic and do not indicate all possible site conditions. The
contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on site and coordinate
between trades to preclude interferences. The contractor shall provide adjustments to
piping or ductwork as necessary to fit conditions including but is not limited to relocation,
offsets, and transitions.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 6 of 11
E. In the event of a conflict with other trades of work, the following priority from highest to
lowest shall be followed: Structural, lighting, HVAC, plumbing/piping. Starting with the
lowest priority, the HVAC and plumbing contractors shall provide whatever materials,
offsets, labor etc. is required to resolve the conflict.
F. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine
which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no
additional cost.
G. Prior to ordering equipment cross-check mechanical and electrical drawings and
specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of connections serving
mechanical and electrical equipment.
H. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. Costs for
modifications due to equipment substitution will be borne by the contractor.
I. Wherever conflicts occur between different parts of the Contract Documents the greater
quantity, the better quality, or larger size shall prevail unless the Architect informs the
Contractor otherwise in writing.
J. The scale of each drawing is relatively accurate, but the Contractor is warned to obtain the
necessary dimensions for any exact takeoffs from the Architect. No additional cost to the
Owner will be considered for failure to obtain exact dimensions where not clear or in error on
the drawings. Any device or equipment roughed in improperly and not positioned on implied
centerlines or as required by good practice shall be repositioned at no cost to the Owner.
K. Where the word `verify' is used on the documents, the contractor shall field verify the
existing conditions and modify the scope of the installation as required to meet the verified
conditions without additional cost to the Owner.
L. Coordinate wall openings, piping rough-in locations, concrete housekeeping pads, and
electrical rough-in locations to accommodate Work of this Section.
M. Coordinate all equipment with building control work.
N. Coordinate installation of
1. Condensing units with concrete pad and roof structure.
2. Air handling units with building structure.
3. Unit installation with roof structure, piping systems, and ceiling for unit access.
4. Roof curbs with roof structure, roof deck and roof inembrane installation.
1.16 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING
A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other
trades where necessary for installation of inechanical work. Perform work only with
craftsmen skilled in their respective trades.
B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for
openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of
rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for ducts and piping.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 7 of 11
C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as
not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without
breaking out around holes.
1.17 SALVAGE
A. Remove excess piping and ductwork, plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove
scrap pipe and all other excess materials from the site.
B. Comply with contractor's Construction Waste Management Plan. Retain and submit all trip
and tip tickets for all construction debris and waste hauling, indicating material content,
tonnage, date hauled and facility to where materials were hauled.
1.18 ELECTRICAL
A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi-
motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 &440.4 and must
include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC)of the electrical circuit
serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment
SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate.
Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the
unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment
with a minimum SCCR of 10kA.
B. Motors:
1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 50 degree C
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load.
2. Starting Capability: Not less than 12 starts per hour.
3. Phase Characteristics: Squirrel-cage induction poly-phase motors for 3/4 HP and
larger, and capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller. At equipment
manufacturer's option, 1/6 HP and smaller may be split-phase type.
4. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
5. Enclosure Type: Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation, and guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to
contact by employees or building occupants. Weather-protected Type I for outdoor use,
Type II, where not housed.
6. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection.
7. Name Plate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, special features and similar information.
8. All motor efficiencies shall conform to Washington State/Seattle Energy Code and
NEMA MG-1.
C. Motor Starters: By mechanical equipment manufacturer where factory mounted controls are
provided. Variable frequency drives by Division 23, all other starters provided by Electrical
Contractor.
D. Power Wiring: By Electrical Contractor.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 8 of 11
E. Control Wiring: Responsibility of Division 23, including all line and low voltage control wiring.
Owner will not entertain additional cost due to lack of coordination between HVAC
Contractor and Electrical Contractor.
1.19 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Completion, submission and approval of the following is required for final project closeout.
1. Execution of Architect's and Engineer's final observation reports (punchlist)
2. Operating and Maintenance Instructions
3. Operating and Maintenance Manual
4. Equipment and Pipe Cleaning
5. Record Drawings
6. Testing
7. Warranty
B. See Division 01 for additional requirements.
1.20 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 01, following initial operation of HVAC
systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services.
B. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to
proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates.
C. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out
requirements for operating, servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. Describe
general system operation and specific equipment functions. Cover all equipment calibration,
setpoint adjustment, safeties and alarms.
D. During demonstrations and instructions include and reference information from maintenance
manuals and contract drawings.
E. Minimum duration of instruction periods:
1. HVAC Systems 4 hours
1.21 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, one PDF and one bound copy of operating and
maintenance manuals to include the following:
1. Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor names, addresses and phone numbers.
2. Schedule and description of routine maintenance for each component to include oiling,
lubrication and greasing data.
3. Manufacturer's cuts and rating tables, including brochures for all submittal items.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 9 of 11
4. Part numbers of all replaceable items.
5. Control diagrams and operation sequence.
6. Written guarantees.
7. Record drawings corrected and completed.
8. Completed equipment start-up forms and checklists.
9. Final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for all equipment.
2. Submit installation instructions, adjustment instructions, spare parts lists, exploded
assembly views for all equipment.
3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and
calibration tolerances.
4. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance
and repair data. Include directions for resetting constant volume regulators.
C. Binders:
1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories.
2. Bind each manual in a hard-backed loose-leaf binder.
D. Imprint on cover:
1. Name of project.
2. Owner.
3. Location of project.
4. Architect.
5. Contractor.
6. Year of completion.
E. Imprint on backing:
1. Name of project.
2. Year of completion.
F. Submittals:
1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit one PDF copy
for review by the Architect.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00-9
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 10 of 11
2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copy, submit one PDF and one bound
copy to the Owner.
1.22 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior of all equipment. Equipment shall be free of dirt, construction
debris, corrosion, etc.
B. Adequate provisions shall be made during construction to eliminate dirt, debris or other
material from entering and collecting inside of pipe, ductwork and equipment. Any collection
of material shall be thoroughly cleaned before equipment startup and if necessary again
before owner occupancy.
C. Clean exterior of all exposed pipe and ductwork.
1.23 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit one digital file with all drawings in PDF format.
B. Make all notes and revisions on PDF set in red.
C. Record actual locations of equipment, clean-outs, controlling devices, and all above grade,
under-floor, and buried piping and ductwork. Provide dimensions from gridline or walls to
indicate specific locations.
1.24 TESTING
A. Provide completed start-up forms and checklists.
B. Perform testing and balancing of HVAC systems as described in this Division and as
required by applicable codes and ordinances.
C. Provide changes in sheaves, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance.
1.25 WARRANTIES AND CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE
A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating
order at time of delivery to Owner.
B. Furnish one year warranty from date of substantial completion for all systems unless
specifically noted otherwise.
C. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from
date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect a failure is due to
neglect or carelessness of the Owner.
D. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of
equipment furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which
exceed one year.
E. Make all necessary balancing and control adjustments during first year of operation.
F. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work.
August 1, 2018 23 00 00- 10
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0000
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 11 of 11
PART 2 -NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DOCUMENTATION
A. Additional plan submittals to reviewing authority: If additional drawing submittals are
required at any time during construction contractor shall submit drawings, review with
authority, and pick up subsequent approved drawings. Engineer will revise and/or prepare
drawings for submittal.
3.2 INSPECTION
A. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by
the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
B. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor
shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and
approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work disturbed by him to its original
condition.
C. Energy Code C104 specifically requires the following inspections.
1. Mechanical Equipment Efficiency and Economizer: To be made after all equipment and
controls required by the Energy Code and this specification are installed and prior to
the concealment of such equipment or controls.
2. Mechanical Pipe and Duct Insulation: To be made after all pipe and duct insulation is in
place, but before concealment.
3. Motor Inspections: To be made after installation of all equipment covered by the Energy
Code and this specification but before concealment.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation for proper movement clearance.
3.4 CLEANING
B. Clean ductwork and equipment.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 230000
August 1, 2018 23 00 00- 11
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 1 of 7
DOCUMENT 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Manufacturers Standardization Society
of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS)Standards SP-58 and SP-69.
B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
C. Conform to requirements of IBC 1613 and SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines
for Mechanical Systems".
1.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Where two or more units of same class of equipment are required, use products of a single
manufacturer. All equipment shall be new and free from damage.
B. Protect stored material and equipment against weather, corrosion and dirt. Protect installed
mechanical components, including but not limited to piping, ductwork, and equipment
against weather damage, corrosion, dirt and construction dust. Seal equipment and
ductwork where and when necessary to be kept clean.
C. Provide major equipment components with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number
and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place.
D. Furnish standard and fabricated hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,
bolts, nuts, rods, washers and other accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installed products shall have surface Burning Characteristics: 25/50 flame spread/smoke
developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Perform work in accordance with local jurisdiction's requirements and AWS D1.1 for welding
hanger and support attachments to building structure.
C. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and
accessories.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger straps and rods shall be in accord with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
B. Fasten bracing to ductwork, including riveting, bolting, and tack welding per SMACNA.
C. Provide galvanized steel band or fabricated angle iron brackets for wall supports.
August 1, 2018 23 05 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 2 of 7
D. Exposed ducts shall be supported/anchored to structure at closer spacing and using heavier
materials, wherever so indicated on drawings.
E. Hanger Rods: Carbon Steel, with hex nuts and flat washers.
F. Concrete Inserts:
1. Continuous channel - Unistrut or approved.
2. Universal, malleable iron -Type 18, FS WW-H-171.
G. Beam Clamps and Attachments as required.
2.2 DUCT ROOF SUPPORT
A. Manufacturers: Caddy or approved equal.
B. Pyramid H-Frame thermoplastic base with rubber bottom, pre-installed strut nuts and
hardware kit to construct frame. All steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized. 750 Ib
load rating per base.
2.3 ACCESS PANELS
A. Milcor or approved equal.
B. Include an allowance for a minimum of 12 access panels.
C. Architectural grade, 14 guage frame and door, painted steel or stainless steel based on
application.
2.4 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Manufacturers' curbs where indicated on drawings.
B. Fabricated: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, variable
step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, wood nailer.
2.5 SLEEVES
C. Sleeves for Ductwork: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
D. Sealant: Acrylic
2.6 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers: Allied Tube &Conduit, B-Line Systems, Unistrut or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel, with holes 1-1/2 inches on center.
2.7 PENETRATIONS OF NON-RATED SURFACES
A. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates
for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 3 of 7
B. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill
annular space between piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
2.8 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.
B. Color code as follows: HVAC equipment--Yellow.
2.9 PAINT
A. Factory Finished Equipment: See individual equipment specification.
B. Ductwork: Paint interior of ductwork visible through grilles and diffusers with a flat black
paint. Prepare and paint surfaces in accord with Division 9.
2.10 SEISMIC SUPPORTS
A. Provide seismic support as required by IBC 1613 and local authorities.
B. Sway bracing for ductwork, piping, and equipment shall consist of steel angles, rods or
pipes. Shapes, lengths and methods of attachment shall be in accord with SMACNA
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems".
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
B. Provide access to existing piping, ductwork, equipment and other installations remaining
active and requiring access.
C. Extend existing piping and ductwork installations using materials and methods compatible
with existing installations.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting
bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond of adhesives or firestopping.
C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
E. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION-CLEARANCE
A. Appliances and equipment shall be accessible for inspection, service, repair and
replacement.
B. Clearance shall be provided for the replacement of filters.
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 4 of 7
C. A minimum of 30"of clearance shall be provided in front of the control side of appliances
and equipment. Provide additional space when required by NEC.
D. All control components shall be accessible for inspection and replacement.
3.4 INSTALLATION — DUCTWORK
A. Locate hangers, supports and accessories to handle loads imposed by ductwork, and air
distribution devices and with maximum spacing noted.
B. Support all ductwork to prevent sag, undue play and swing.
C. Maximum support spacing per SMACNA standards. Spacing shall not exceed 10 feet.
D. Before concrete is placed, install embedded inserts and secure firmly to form work.
E. Assemble and install hangers and supports on ductwork.
F. All supports and attachments for exposed ducts shall have non-removable fasteners.
G. Attachments to fireproofed steel structure shall be made prior to spraying of fireproofing
material. If necessary to disturb fireproofing after initial spraying, provide respraying or
repairs necessary to restore the integrity of the fireproofing.
H. Adjust hangers and supports as required to bring system to proper line and grade.
Ductwork shall be plumb with floor and parallel/perpendicular to building structure.
3.5 INSTALLATION —SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Provide seismic restraints and hangers in compliance with IBC 1613 and ASCE 7.
B. Seismic Bracing is specifically required for but not limited to:
1. All ductwork with a cross sectional area of 6 square feet or a diameter of 34 inches or
greater.
C. Seismic Bracing: Follow IBC 1613, ASCE 7, SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual and the
following.
1. Bracing shall be design/build by the contractor to resist seismic loading in accord with
Chapter 16 of the International Building Code, ASCE 7 or the SMACNA guideline.
2. Provide seismic calculations as required for Ip = 1.5.
3. Transverse bracing shall occur at a maximum interval of 30 feet, at each duct turn and
at the end of a duct run.
4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at a maximum interval of 60 feet.
5. Bracing may be omitted where duct hangers are less than 12 inches in length.
3.6 INSTALLATION -EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches
beyond supported equipment.
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 5 of 7
B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of formed steel channel or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with
flanges bolted to structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
3.7 INSTALLATION -FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate
weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms for
sound control.
C. Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash
and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment and
lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above
roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
3.8 INSTALLATION -SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide
for continuous insulation wrapping.
D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or
duct and adjacent work with insulation and caulk or fireproof airtight. Provide close fitting
metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
3.9 INSTALLATION —ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for installation at all concealed equipment which requires service,
maintenance or adjustment to include but not limited to equipment, dampers, control valves,
filters and controls.
B. Provide location layout and required size for all access panels to general contractor. Layout
shall be regular and consistent, maintain a uniform wall panel height of 24" CL AFF, unless
noted otherwise.
C. Furnish fire rated access panels where installed in fire rated assembly.
D. Provide stainless steel access panels where installed in tile surfaces.
E. Furnish access panels to general contractor for installation
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 6 of 7
F. Paint installed access panels to match wall or ceiling. Verify that panels are not painted
shut.
3.10 INSTALLATION -PENETRATIONS OF NON-RATED SURFACES
A. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition, floor, ceiling, and/or roof opening as
fol lows:
1. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 1 inch on both sides
of building element.
2. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between sleeve and building element.
B. Install escutcheons where piping penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces.
C. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of inechanical sealing device to
size of piping and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations air tight. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration
to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.
3.11 INSTALLATION —CONDENSATE
A. For all cooling coils, high efficiency gas burners and other equipment requiring condensate
drainage, provide appropriately sized condensate pumps where gravity drainage is not
possible or where scheduled.
B. Coordinate number and type of condensate pumps required with Plumbing Contractor.
C. Provide condensate overflow switches on cooling coils where damage to building
components could occur as a result of overflow as required by IMC.
D. For wall mounted fan coils, condensate pump, reservoir, wiring and piping shall not be
exposed to view. Field fabricated concealment is not acceptable.
E. For pumps located in equipment cabinet, above ceiling, fascia kit or unfinished space, obtain
power for condensate pump directly from electrical terminal block on unit served.
Coordinate with electrical contractor.
F. For wall mount fan coils with pumps located above a ceiling, obtain power from electrical
circuit. Coordinate with electrical contractor.
G. Connect condensate pump alarm wiring to unit served power terminals per manufacturer's
installation instructions. Coordinate with electrical contractor.
3.12 INSTALLATION-IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0500
City of Renton Public Works Shops COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
HVAC
Page 7 of 7
D. Nameplates: Identify mechanical equipment (air handling units, air terminal units, pumps,
heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices)with plastic nameplates.
1. Identity description should be as numbered on drawings or plain English description.
i.e. "EF-1" or"Boiler Controls".
2. Label wall controls and switches with associated equipment designation and control
function, i.e. "EF-1 Switch".
E. Provide ceiling tacks to locate dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of
panel closest to equipment.
3.13 CLEANING
A. Contractor shall make all mechanical components free of dust and dirt prior to startup.
3.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION 230500
August 1, 2018 23 05 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0593
City of Renton Public Works Shops TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND
BALANCING
Page 1 of 5
DOCUMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air systems.
B. Preparation of formal report.
1.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Work shall be performed by approved independent testing and balancing agency.
B. Perform testing and balancing in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)or
National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). All work shall be supervised.
C. Calibrate instruments used for testing and balancing within a period of six months of start of
work.
D. Mechanical contractor shall assist Balancing Agency in testing and balancing of inechanical
system.
1.3 FORMAT
A. Report shall consist of test sheets similar to AABC Standard Forms for Diffusers and Grilles,
Air Handling Equipment, Exhaust Fans, and Pumps (i.e., Form 12666 for Diffusers and
Grilles).
B. Report shall include the following.
1. Preface suggesting abnormalities and problems encountered.
2. Instrumentation List including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration
dates.
3. System Identification reporting location of equipment, zones, supply, return, and
exhaust openings.
4. Record following for each piece of air handling equipment.
a. Manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
b. Design and manufacturer rated data.
c. Actual CFM
d. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan.
e. Outside-air and return-air total CFM.
f. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor.
g. Final RPM of each motor.
August 1, 2018 23 05 93- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0593
City of Renton Public Works Shops TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND
BALANCING
Page 2 of 5
h. Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center
distance.
i. Belt size and quantity.
j. Static-pressure controls final operating set points.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Work of this section shall be performed by independent Air Testing and Balance Agency
specializing in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance,
adjust, and test air moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems.
B. Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five years of
specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing. Work by this Agency shall be
done under direct supervision of qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by
Agency.
C. Agency shall be approved in writing by Architect.
D. Neither ArchitecYs engineering consultant nor anyone performing work on this Project under
Division 23 shall be permitted to do this work.
1.5 ACCEPTABLE TEST AND BALANCE COMPANIES
A. AIRTEST Co., Inc. 425-313-0172
B. Neudorfer Engineers, Inc. 206-621-1810
C. Hardin & Sons 253-862-6645
PART2 -PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify systems are complete and in good working order before commencing work. Then, put
all systems and equipment into operation and continue operation until all adjusting,
balancing, testing, demonstrations, instructions and cleaning of systems have been
completed. Verify the following:
1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
August 1, 2018 23 05 93-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0593
City of Renton Public Works Shops TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND
BALANCING
Page 3 of 5
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect.
B. Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working
order.
C. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations including
ladders, scaffolding, additional dampers and clean filters.
D. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
E. During balancing technician's initial test of air handling systems, the Mechanical Contractor
shall have his sheetmetal foreman present to assist in any drive changes or dampers
necessary.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Diffuser, register and grille air flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow
rates within 10% and within 50 cfm of design rates.
B. Fan air flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within 10% and
within 100 cfm of design rates.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Ensure that clean filters, of the type specified, are installed prior to air balancing.
B. Provide additional volume dampers as necessary to accomplish design balances.
C. Set minimum position of motorized dampers for scheduled minimum outside air.
D. Check motors for proper rotation, coupling and drive alignment, belt tension and freedom
from vibration, etc.
E. Provide belt drive/sheave changes to adjust fan rpm as necessary to accomplish design
balances.
F. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
G. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
August 1, 2018 23 05 93-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0593
City of Renton Public Works Shops TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND
BALANCING
Page 4 of 5
H. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted,
verify correcting adjustments have been made.
I. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system
balance.
J. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
K. After completion of testing and balancing, operate systems under normal conditions for at
least two days of 8 hours each to demonstrate specified performance.
3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Perform soloing testing and balancing functions in accordance with Associates Air Balance
Council National Standards.
B. Adjust air handling and air distribution systems to obtain design supply, return, and/or
exhaust air quantities.
1. Test and adjust total system CFM by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive
changes as necessary.
2. Perform tests at high and low speeds of variable speed systems.
3. Adjust branch air quantities by damper regulation. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall
have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open to minimize throttling
losses.
4. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts and for outside air by Pitot tube traverse
of entire cross sectional area of duct.
5. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
C. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
1. Adjust air distribution to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
d rafts.
2. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that the
adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels.
3. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts.
D. Provide system schematic:
1. Identify the location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box.
2. Record the required and actual air quantities at each outlet or inlet.
3. Record size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet
data sheets.
E. Pressure:
August 1, 2018 23 05 93-4
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0593
City of Renton Public Works Shops TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND
BALANCING
Page 5 of 5
1. Measure static pressure conditions on air units, including filter and coil pressure drops,
and total pressure across fan with suction and discharge pressures.
2. Make air balancing allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
3. Measure building static pressure.
F. Electrical:
1. Record nameplate motor current and voltage.
2. Measure actual motor current and voltage at balanced condition.
G. Dampers:
1. Adjust outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
2. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions.
H. Permanently mark all outside air, supply air, and return air damper positions after balancing
has been completed.
3.6 FINAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. System shall be balanced and reports submitted before substantial completion inspection.
B. Balancing Agency shall be represented at inspection meeting(s) by qualified testing
personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of current air balancing test report.
1. Architect will choose and direct spot balancing. Differences greater than specified
tolerance between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring
repeat of testing and balancing for entire building and submission of a new test report.
In such case a new inspection will be made.
2. Perform rebalancing in presence of Architect/Engineer and subject to their approval.
3. If re-balancing is required, submit revised air test and balance reports to Architect
before Substantial Completion.
4. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Where systems provides over 5 percent more air than schedule requirements, rooms
supplied by that system shall have their supply air quantities increased by ratio of actual
total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by system schedule.
END OF SECTION 230593
August 1, 2018 23 05 93-5
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0700
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC INSULATION
Page 1 of 5
DOCUMENT 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation must have maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed
index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. All systems components subject to heat loss or gain, such as, piping, storage tanks, vessels,
valves etc. shall be insulated to conform with the Washington State Energy Code (as
minimum)and this section.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Insulation shall bear a manufacturer's mark indicating the product R-value or K-value and
thickness. This mark shall be visible after installation and shall be repeated at an interval of
no more than 10 feet.
B. External duct insulation shall be legibly printed or indentified at intervals not greater than 36
inches with name of manufacturer, R-value, thickness, flame spread and smoke-developed
index.
C. R-values shall be based on insulation only at 75 F mean temperature difference.
D. For rigid or spray foam the aged R-value per inch shall be provided in submittals.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER, BLANKET
A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Micro-Flex or equal by Owens-Corning, Knauf, Manson or
approved equal.
B. Insulation: Semi-rigid, shot-free, continuous fiber, noncombustible. ASTM C1393.
1. `K'factor: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
4. Density: 2.5 Ib/cu ft.
C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: reinforced facing, will accept paint. Seal with pressure sensitive
tape.
2.2 POLYOLEFIN INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: IMCOA or similar.
B. Polyolefin or Polyethylene pipe insulation is NOT ACCEPTABLE for any application.
August 1, 2018 23 07 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0700
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC INSULATION
Page 2 of 5
2.3 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM (PIPE)
A. Manufacturers: Armacell AP/Armaflex, Aeroflex Aerocel or approved equal.
B. Preformed flexible, closed-cell, elastomeric thermal insulation: Type I, Tubular form, self-
seal or continuous, 25/50-rated, CFC free, low VOC, 'K'factor: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. ASTM
C534.
C. Rigid clamp/hanger insert: Armacell Armafix, polyurethane insert and aluminum jacket,
single piece with self-adhering closure.
2.4 MINERAL FIBER, BLANKET
A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Minwool-1200 or equal by Knauf, Manson or approved
equal.
B. Insulation: Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
Applications. ASTM C612.
1. Operating Temperatures: ASTM C411, 1200 degrees F.
2. Density: 4.5 Ib/cu ft.
3. `K'factor: ASTM C518, 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2.5 FLEXIBLE GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER(SOUND LINER)
A. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Linacoustic RC or equal by Knauf, Manson or approved
equal.
B. Description: Flexible duct liner, glass fiber bonded with thermosetting resin, airstream
surface protected with reinforced coating.
1. ASTM E84, UL 723
2. Installed R Value: 1" R-4.2, 2" R-8.0
3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 6,000 fpm.
5. Acrylic polymer coating to prevent dust incursion and biological growth.
C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, impact applied or welded with integral head.
D. Field coat edges with Superseal edge treatment.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
August 1, 2018 23 07 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0700
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC INSULATION
Page 3 of 5
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply insulation when building is thoroughly dry to prevent shrinkage.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Insulate entire piping system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, pump fittings, connections to equipment and expansion joints. Use canvas
jackets for valves and other irregular shapes.
D. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.
E. Piping Inserts and Shields:
1. Insulation shall be continuous through supports and hangers with incompressible
inserts and shields. Do not directly clamp/support pipe scheduled to be insulated.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel saddle between pipe clevis hangers or pipe rollers and
insulation. Minimum 6 inches long, of contour matching adjoining insulation; may be
factory fabricated.
3. Inserts: Between pipe clamps, hangers or rollers and piping.
4. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for insulation type
and planned temperature range and service.
5. Glue insulation to both sides of insert.
6. Shields without inserts may be used at clevis hangers on refrigerant piping 5/8" and
smaller with continuous insulation.
F. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies
having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when
continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket
and fitting covers.
H. Exterior Piping Applications: Use only elastomeric closed-cell foam insulation. Insulate
fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and
finish with sealant. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o'clock position
on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of
horizontal equipment.
I. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
J. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
K. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
L. Insulate exhaust air ductwork where it is outside the insulated building envelope to prevent
condensation.
M. For all insulated ductwork:
August 1, 2018 23 07 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0700
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC INSULATION
Page 4 of 5
1. Provide insulation with vapor retarderjackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor retarderjacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings,joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
N. Exterior Ductwork and Equipment: Provide liner. Do not provide exterior insulation on
ductwork or equipment.
O. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. Secure insulation with
mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for spacing.
2. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Pi in : Provide on i in as listed below.
PIPE SIZE
Insulation „ 1" to 1-1/2 to 4" to
Service T e �� <1-1/2•' <4•' < 8„
Refrigerant Elastomeric
Suction(1) Cellular 1" 1" 1-1/2" -
FOAM
Refrigerant Elastomeric
Hot Gas Cellular 1" 1" 1-1/2" -
FOAM
Elastomeric
Condensate Cellular 1" 1" 1-1/2"
FOAM
1. Note: Insulate Refrigerant Liquid lines same as Suction lines on all Mitsubishi brand
equipment, where noted by manufacturer or called for on plans.
2. For all exterior piping applications use only Elastomeric Cellular Foam with Aluminum
jacket.
August 1, 2018 23 07 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 23 0700
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC INSULATION
Page 5 of 5
B. Ductwork: Provide on ductwork as listed below. Insulation thickness is provided as
reference; each application must meet minimum installed R-Value.
Insulation Approx. Min.
Service Location Type Thickness Installed Jacket
R-Value
Supply, Return Building Exterior Glass Fiber 3" R-8 -
Duct Liner
Attic, crawlspace
Supply, Return or uninsulated Glass Fiber 2�� R-6 FSK
areas within Duct Wrap
buildin .
Supply, Return, Unconditioned Glass Fiber 2�� R-6 FSK
Exhaust Space Inside Bld . Duct Wrap
Supply Concealed Space Glass Fiber 1-1/2" R-3.3 FSK
3 Duct Wrap
Exposed (4) in Glass Fiber
Supply Space With Duct Wrap/ 1-1/2" R-3.3 FSK
Supply Air Temp Duct Liner
<_55 F or>_105 F
Exposed in Space None, Except
With Supply Air Duct Liner
Supply Temp shown on
Between 56-104F Plans.
Outside the Glass Fiber „
Exhaust Air Insulated Building Duct Wrap 2 R-6 FSK
Envelope
Between backdraft Glass Fiber „
Exhaust Air damper& building Duct Wrap 3 R-7 FSK
exterior.
1. Secure duct wrap with mechanical fasteners spaced 12"on center, minimum. For
horizontal ducts 24"or more in width, duct wrap shall also be secured with mechanical
fasteners spaced 18" on center, on centerline of bottom of duct.
2. Insulation is not required on sound lined ductwork with sufficient insulating value.
3. Concealed space: Any space within the insulated building envelope that is concealed
from view, i.e. behind ceiling, wall, shaft, soffit, etc.
4. For exposed ductwork in finished spaces which is required to be insulated provide
internal liner with equivalent R-value.
5. Insulation required from exterior to shutoff damper or equipment. After damper provide
R-7 insulation.
END OF SECTION 230700
August 1, 2018 23 07 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 23 2300
City of Renton Public Works Shops REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system
components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar
metals in systems.
B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or
couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or
threaded connections to valves or equipment.
C. Size piping in accord with equipment manufacturer's refrigerant piping design guidelines
based on actual piping installation lengths. Use long line calculations when applicable.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping
systems.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to
shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system.
B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.
2.2 REFRIGERANT LINE SET
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, annealed, Type ACR
1. Flared ends with brass nuts and protective caps.
2. Pre-insulated, dual tube, liquid and vapor lines with closed-cell elastomeric foam.
3. R-410A, 700 PSI rated.
August 1, 2018 23 23 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 2300
City of Renton Public Works Shops REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 2 of 3
2.3 UNIONS, FLANGES,AND COUPLINGS
A. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING PROTECTION
A. Manufacturers: Mitsubishi Line-Hide or approved equal.
B. Material: UV stabilized PVC/ABS enclosure with snap-on covers, couplings, elbows and
caps forming a complete system.
C. Assembly: Stainless steel screws.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or
caps.
3.2 INSTALLATION PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
E. Protection: Where piping, other than cast iron or steel, is installed in a concealed location
through holes or notches in framing (i.e. studs,joists, rafters, etc.), less than 1-1/2 from
framing edge, provide shield plates. Shield plates shall be 16 gauge steel and cover the
piping area within framing plus 2"on each side along framing.
F. Use rigid Armacell Armafix pipe clamp assembly at all supports.
G. Determine equivalent line length and size piping per manufacturer's installation instructions.
Provide solenoid valve and other required piping accessories for long line installation.
H. Refrigerant piping shall not be installed in elevators, public stairways, stair landing or means
of egress spaces.
I. Install pipe identification.
J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or
connected equipment.
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
August 1, 2018 23 23 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 2300
City of Renton Public Works Shops REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 3
L. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and
provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
M. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen during brazing. Keep piping open with nitrogen
flow for zero pressure while brazing.
N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
O. Insulate piping and equipment.
P. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
Q. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of
refrigerant.
R. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.
3.3 INSTALLATION-EXTERIOR PIPING
A. Protect exterior piping with application specific piping protection cover system or field
fabricated GSM cover with steel angle supports.
B. Provide waterproof pipe entry into building with trim and flashing.
C. Protect exposed insulated pipe with aluminum jacket.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
B. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 400 psig. Perform final tests at 27
inches vacuum and 400 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector.
C. Repair leaks.
D. Retest until no leaks are detected.
END OF SECTION 232300
August 1, 2018 23 23 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 1 of 6
DOCUMENT 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss
coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place
of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round
ducts.
B. Standards: Comply with most stringent requirements and recommendations of International
Mechanical Code or SMACNA(Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association) Duct Construction Standards for fabrication, construction and sealant of duct,
fittings, and accessories.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Black Carbon Steel: Plain carbon steel which is not galvanized or oiled.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having
G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.
B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
1. duct.
2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Thermaflex M-KC or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Insulated assembly with inner duct of woven and coated fiberglass
permanently bonded to coated steel wire helix, 1"fiberglass insulation and vapor barrier
jacket of fiberglass reinforced metallized film laminate, UL 181 Class 1 complying with NFPA
90A&90B.
1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 2 inches wg negative.
2. Maximum Velocity: 6000 fpm.
August 1, 2018 23 31 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 2 of 6
3. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
4. Thermal Resistance: R-4.2
C. Accessories:
1. Hanger Strap: Thermaflex FlexTie— 1-1/2"wide, adjustable, plenum rated.
2. Elbow: Thermaflex FlexFlow Elbow—One piece adjustable design installs over flex
duct.
2.3 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: McGill AirFlow, Semco or approved equal.
B. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized
steel.
C. Joints: 16" and larger flange with gasket material.
D. Elbows: Smooth radius or 5 section, 1.5D.
E. Application: Required for all exposed round ductwork; all round ductwork 12"dia. and
larger; all round ductwork with static pressure over 1"w.g.. Optional for all round ductwork.
F. Construct duct with the followin minimum a es:
Diameter Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches 26
15 inches to 26 inches 24
28 inches to 36 inches 22
G. Construct fittin s with the followin minimum a es:
Diameter Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches 24
15 inches to 26 inches 22
28 inches to 36 inches 20
2.4 SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Ductmate GreenSeam+or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Snap lock round duct with self-sealing butyl rubber longitudinal seam
and polyurethane gasket transverse seam. No external sealant. No VOCs.
C. Joints: Male/Female with integral gasket.
D. Elbows: Smooth radius, 1.5D.
E. Application: Only allowed for low pressure ductwork with static pressure of 1"w.g. or less,
less than 10"diameter and concealed. Not for use exposed.
F. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
August 1, 2018 23 31 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 3 of 6
Diameter Gauge
4 inches to 10 inches 26
G. Construct fittin s with the followin minimum a es:
Diameter Gauge
4 inches to 10 inches 24
2.5 SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCTS (SNAP-LOCK)
A. This product is not acceptable for this project.
2.6 DUCT SEALANT
A. Manufacturer: Design Polymerics, United McGill or approved equal.
B. Sealant shall be water based and formulated to withstand working temperatures of-25°F to
+200°F. All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under ASTM C 732 (artificial weathering)and
pass ASTM C 734 (low temperature flexibility after artificial weathering). All sealants shall be
of an elastomeric nature, have a weight per gallon not to exceed 12.5, have solids by weight
of 66% ±2%, pass UL 723 with a flame spread of 5 and smoke developed of 5.
2.7 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support rectangular and round ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC
Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing,
and sealing for operating pressures corresponding to the ESP (external static pressure)of
the fan system. i.e. Ductwork for a fan with and ESP of 0.75"w.g. should be constructed per
SMACNA 1"w.g. pressure standard.
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width.
Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes.
Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass
fiber insulation.
C. Indicated dimensions on drawings are net inside. Allow for thickness of duct lining where
indicated.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or
electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree
lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.
August 1, 2018 23 31 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 4 of 6
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Make field measurements to establish locations of hangers and supports where installation
will not damage building construction.
B. During construction, install temporary closures of inetal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
C. Where ducts pass through partitions, ceilings or floors. Provide 1" clearance and insulate
from structure with insulation material. Provide flanged sheet metal closure.
D. Where ducts pass through rated walls or assemblies without fire dampers, provide '/4"to 1"
annular space and fill with firestop sealant. Ductwork shall be minimum 26 gauge metal.
E. Isolate joints between dissimilar metals with fiber gasket.
F. Drawings do not attempt to show all offsets in ductwork. Make such offsets as necessary for
installation of work without additional cost to Owner. 15 degree maximum angle of offset.
G. Exterior Ductwork:
1. Construct one gauge heavier than SMACNA standard for size indicated.
2. Seal all joints and seams with heavy mastic. Duct shall be water tight.
3. Construct to prevent standing water on duct.
H. Ductsox:
1. Install suspension system in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
Manufacturer's instructions must be provided with product.
2. Clean air handling unit and ductwork prior to installation.
3. Clean Ductsox soiled during installation by laundering according to the manufacturer's
terms of laundry.
I. Exposed ductwork shall be Appearance Grade. Ductwork located in crawl spaces, shafts,
and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
1. All round ductwork shall be spiral seam (no snap-lock joints).
2. All joints clean and workmanlike.
3. Ductwork entirely free of dents.
4. Ductwork subject to denting due to space function construct one gauge heavier than
SMACNA standard for size indicated.
August 1, 2018 23 31 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 5 of 6
5. All hangers trimmed of excess metal.
6. Plumb, level, parallel or perpendicular to building structure.
7. Sealed with transparent, paintable sealant to avoid streaking.
J. Flexible Duct:
1. Install insulated flexible duct in full extended condition free of sags and kinks.
2. Use minimum length required to make connection.
3. Length shall not exceed 10 feet.
4. Supported on 36" centers with minimum 1-1/2"wide strap. Do not crush.
5. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
K. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 00.
L. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
3.3 SEISMIC BRACING
A. See 23 05 00.
3.4 DUCT SEALING
A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible. Ductwork shall be sealed using welds, gaskets, or mastic. Duct tape is
not permitted as a sealant on any ducts with the exception of that on fiberglass ducts
specifically made for such use.
B. For all ductwork seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. For 2"w.g. and higher
pressure class ductwork also seal all duct wall penetrations (i.e. screw, fastener, rod or
wire).
C. Low pressure ductwork (less than 3"w.g.)shall be sealed to a leakage rate not to exceed 6
percent of the system airflow. All deficient ductwork shall be re-sealed until compliant.
D. Provide written documentation of testing to be included with the Test and Balance report,
see 23 05 93. Include drawing(s) indicating where test measurements were taken.
3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.
B. Connect air outlets and inlets to supply ducts with five foot maximum length of flexible duct.
August 1, 2018 23 31 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3100
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
Page 6 of 6
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other
half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters,
or bypass during cleaning.
3.7 SCHEDULES
A. Ductwork Material Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Supply, Return, Exhaust, Relief Galvanized Steel, Aluminum
B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule: Install higher pressure class than indicated where
corres ondin fan s stem ESP external static ressure is hi her.
AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Low Pressure Supply Minimum 1 inch wg.
Return, Exhaust Minimum 1 inch wg
END OF SECTION 233100
August 1, 2018 23 31 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3300
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 COORDINATION
A. Verify locations for access panels with Architect.
B. Coordinate damper power, control and fire alarm interface with other trades.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements.
B. Damper pressure drop ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with
AMCA 500.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Ruskin, Greenheck or approved equal
B. Frames: Galvanized steel, minimum 20 gage.
C. Blades: Galvanized steel, minimum 20 gage, attached to minimum 3/8 inch shafts with
locking handle quadrant. Provide 2" standoff for insulated ductwork applications.
D. Maximum Velocity: 1500 fpm.
E. Rectangular: 24" and under on a side Ruskin MD25; over 24" on a side Ruskin MD35 or
equal.
F. Round: Ruskin MDRS25 or equal.
2.3 REMOTE OPERATED BALANCING DAMPERS (MANUAL)
A. Manufacturers: Young, MAT or approved equal.
B. Damper:
1. Round butterfly or radial damper with external control hardware, 5020-CC, RT-250.
2. Round butterfly or radial damper with internal control hardware, 5020-CC-2, RT-150.
3. Rectangular opposed blade damper with external control hardware, 830A-CC, RT-200.
4. Rectangular opposed blade damper with internal control hardware, 830A-CC-2, RT-
100.
C. Remote Damper Operator:
1. External cable control, 3" cover plate, 270-301
August 1, 2018 23 33 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3300
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 3
2. Internal cable control, 270-275
3. Remote cable wall control, 700 (where indicated).
2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Manufacturers: Duro-Dyne or approved equal
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and
Flexible.
C. Double fold "Grip-Loc" metal-to-fabric connection.
D. Indoor Connector: "Metal-Fab", 24 ga, 3"metal - 3"fabric-3" metal.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant Neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric conforming to
NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd, 500 Ibs tensile strength.
E. Exterior Connector: "Metal-Fab", 24 ga, 3"metal -3"fabric- 3" metal.
1. Fabric: UI listed fire-retardant Hypalon coated woven galas fiber fabric conforming to
NFPA 90A, minimum density 24 oz per sq yd, 250 Ibs tensile strength.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.
B. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3.2 INSTALLATION.
A. Provide motorized in lieu of gravity back-draft dampers per Energy Code.
B. Provide control dampers where not furnished with packaged equipment.
C. Provide insulated control dampers where:
1. The damper is installed behind a louver.
2. The damper is installed in a roof penthouse or gravity ventilator.
3. The damper is unducted and open to a conditioned space.
D. Provide shroud (matching duct material)over flexible duct connections when installed
outside.
E. Install remote operated dampers for balancing where damper is located in an inaccessible
location.
August 1, 2018 23 33 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3300
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
F. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations and as indicated on Drawings:
1. Before and after each fire damper, smoke damper and combination fire and smoke
damper.
2. Where access is required for a valve or damper.
3. Install at locations for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96.
G. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for
shoulder access, and as indicated on Drawings. Review locations prior to fabrication.
END OF SECTION 233300
August 1, 2018 23 33 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3400
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC FANS
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 3400 HVAC FANS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance
with UL 705.
D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.
1.2 DAMPERS
A. A gravity backdraft or motorized control damper is required on every exhaust fan.
B. Fans which are noted to operate continuously or have a capacity of 300 cfm or less shall
have a gravity backdraft damper unless noted otherwise. All other fans shall have a
motorized control damper.
C. See 23 33 00 for motorized control dampers.
D. Provide insulated control dampers where scheduled or where required by 23 33 00.
1.3 FAN EFFICIENCY
A. Single fan or multiple fans in parallel with combined motor nameplate over 5hp shall have a
Fan Efficiency Grade (FEG)of 67 or higher and shall be selected to operate within 15%of
the maximum total efficiency of the fan.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Cook or approved equal.
B. Construction: Spun aluminum with rigid internal support and aluminum birdscreen.
Backward inclined aluminum wheel and inlet, statically and dynamically balanced.
C. Direct Drive:
1. Motor: Permanently lubricated mounted on vibration isolators out of the air stream.
2. Motor: Electronic Commutation DC brushless motor with internal solid state AC/DC
converter circuitry and heavy duty ball bearings. Speed controllable down to 20% of
full speed. Minimum 85% efficient at all speeds.
a. Motor mounted potentiometer speed control dial.
August 1, 2018 23 34 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3400
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC FANS
Page 2 of 3
3. Accessories:
a. Gravity backdraft\Motorized Control damper. (See Part I, Dampers)
b. Insulated roof curb with liner; matched to roof slope.
c. Curb seal.
d. Aluminum birdscreen.
e. NEMA disconnect switch.
f. Speed Control
2.2 CEILING FANS
A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Panasonic, Broan or approved equal.
B. Construction: Galvanized steel with 1/2" acoustical insulation, built in spring loaded
backdraft damper, mounting bracket and detachable white enamel aluminum ceiling grille.
Direct drive forward curved centrifugal fan; dynamically balanced.
C. Motor: Totally enclosed, rated to run continuously, thermal overload protection, mounted on
vibration isolators.
D. Accessories:
1. Speed control
2. Gravity backdraft\Motorized Control damper. (See Part I, Dampers)
3. Round duct adapter
4. Hanging isolation kit
5. Sloped roof cap or hooded wall cap as shown
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ROOF CURBS
A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer.
B. Provide sound attenuation material in curb where so indicated on drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Secure roof fans with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.
B. Suspended Fans: Install flexible connections between inlet and outlet of fan and ductwork.
Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between
ductwork and fan while running.
C. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
August 1, 2018 23 34 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3400
City of Renton Public Works Shops HVAC FANS
Page 3 of 3
D. Install gravity backdraft or motorized control dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as
indicated on Drawings.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean inside of fan cabinet.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION 233400
August 1, 2018 23 34 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3700
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Diffuser, register, and grille performance shall be tested and rated in accordance with
ASHRAE 70.
B. Louver performance shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA 500.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ROUND DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal.
B. Type: Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in
360 degree pattern.
C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish.
2.2 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal.
B. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core, adjustable pattern diffuser.
C. Frame: Surface mount with flat frame or T-bar lay-in.
D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel white finish.
2.3 SUPPLY REGISTERS
A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal.
B. Type: Contoured and individually adjustable blades, 3/4" blade spacing, two-way deflection.
C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
D. Fabrication: Steel with factory white enamel finish.
2.4 EXHAUST/RETURN GRILLES
A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal.
B. Type: Fixed blades, 1/2 inch blade spacing, with blades set at 35 degrees.
C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting, welded corners.
D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, with factory
white enamel finish.
August 1, 2018 23 37 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3700
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 2 of 3
2.5 EGGCRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A. Manufacturers: Titus, Price, Krueger or approved equal.
B. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch aluminum core.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory white enamel finish.
D. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting or channel lay-in frame for
suspended grid ceilings.
2.6 LOUVERS
A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, Wonder Metal or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Stationary, drainable blade. AMCA certified.
C. Type: 6 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame. Minimum initial
point of water penetration of 900 fpm.
D. Fabrication: 12 gage thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory 2-coat 70%
Kynar finish, color to be selected.
E. Mounting: Furnish with flanges, mullions, and hardware for installation.
F. Bird Screen: Aluminum 3/4" x 0.051"flattened expanded metal.
2.7 GRAVITY ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Greenheck, Cook, Price or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Square or round type as shown„ aluminum; aluminum wire bird screen
and insect screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.
C. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel or aluminum construction with continuously welded seams,
built-in cant strips, 1 inch insulation with liner, damper tray, curb seal and factory installed
nailer strip. Matched to roof pitch.
D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with
offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.
E. Motor Operated Damper: Aluminum multiple blade construction, sealed edged with offset
hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked and motor drive, power open, spring return.
2.8 GOOSENECKS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and
Flexible, of minimum 18 gage aluminum. Provide termination insect screen.
2.9 CAPS
A. Pitched Roof Cap: Steel construction with black enamel finish, integral flashing flange, built
in birdscreen with damper. Greenheck RJ (6x9 or larger)or approved equal.
August 1, 2018 23 37 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 3700
City of Renton Public Works Shops AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 3 of 3
B. Flat Roof Cap: All aluminum exterior construction, galvanized steel internal supports,
integral birdscreen without damper, built in flashing flange. Greenheck GRSF or approved
equal.
C. Wall Cap (round connection): Aluminum construction, aluminum finish, built in birdscreen
with damper. Greenheck WC or approved equal.
D. Wall Cap (rectangular): Steel construction with black enamel finish, built in birdscreen with
damper. Greenheck WC or approved equal.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify inlet and outlet locations with Architectural Plans.
B. Verify ceiling/wall type before ordering.
C. Verify diffuser air patterns are as indicated before starting air balance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not
dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly.
C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
END OF SECTION 233700
August 1, 2018 23 37 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 7400
City of Renton Public Works Shops OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 7400 OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 NOT USED
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.3 ELECTRICAL
A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi-
motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 440.4(B) and must include a
SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC)of the electrical circuit serving
the equipment. See electrical drawings for AIC kA rating. For equipment 60 Amps or less
MOCP the SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit
nameplate. Equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the unit nameplate. If
AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide a minimum SCCR of 10kA.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Trane, Carrier, York, Aaon or approved equal.
B. Product Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and wired, consisting of
roof curb, cabinet, supply fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, reversing valve,
refrigeration circuit, condenser, electric heating coils, air filters, mixed air casing,
microprocessor controls, R-410A refrigerant charge and accessories. ARI tested, UL listed.
C. Configuration: Convertible Downflow or Horizontal air delivery.
D. Roof Mounting Curb: Galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer strips. Full
perimeter type for mounting under entire unit, shipped knocked down for field assembly.
E. Cabinet: Heavy gauge, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, tested for 1000 hours
ASTM B117 salt spray test, removable or hinged access panels, 1/2 inch foil-faced
insulation with sealed edges.
F. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive,
adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, high efficiency motor. Motor permanently lubricated
with built-in thermal overload protection.
G. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Double slope
drain pan with piping connection. Factory leak tested to 200 psi.
H. Compressor: Direct drive, hermetic, scroll with centrifugal oil pump, suction gas cooled,
internal overload protection.
I. Refrigeration circuit: Thermal expansion valve, filter-drier, suction, discharge, and liquid line
service valves with gauge ports. Dehydrate and factory charge with oil and refrigerant.
August 1, 2018 23 74 00- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 7400
City of Renton Public Works Shops OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
Page 2 of 3
J. Condenser:
1. Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested to
200 psi.
2. Condenser Fan: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Motor
permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection.
K. Air Filters: 2 inch pleated, MERV 8.
L. Mixed Air Casing:
1. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Class 1A, maximum 3.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0
inches wg pressure differential.
2. Economizer: Factory installed fully modulating motorized outside air and return air
dampers controlled by dry bulb controller with minimum position setting. Outside air
damper normally closed and return air damper normally open. Furnish barometric relief
damper capable of closing by gravity. Furnish rain hood with screen.
M. Accessories:
1. Through the base electrical
2. Thermal expansion valve
3. Hot gas bypass
4. Hinged access doors
5. Multi-stage heating and cooling
6. Emergency heat control
7. Low ambient control
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as shown on shop drawings.
B. Verify piping rough-in is at correct location.
C. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Furnish roof curbs for installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with ARI 430.
August 1, 2018 23 74 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 7400
City of Renton Public Works Shops OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS
Page 3 of 3
B. Roof Curb:
1. Assemble roof curb.
2. Install roof curb level.
3. Coordinate curb installation and flashing.
4. Install units on roof curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility
services.
5. Install gasket material between unit base and roof curb.
C. Install flexible connections between unit and inlet and discharge ductwork. Install metal
bands of connectors parallel with minimum 1 inch flex between ductwork and fan while
running.
D. Install assembled units with vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings
and flexible electrical leads.
E. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to splash block on roof.
F. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.
G. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
H. Install control wiring between unit and field installed accessories.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at
Substantial Completion.
C. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units.
D. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished cabinets, using finish materials
furnished by manufacturer.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.
3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
B. Protect finished surfaces of cabinets with protective covers during remainder of construction.
END OF SECTION 237400
August 1, 2018 23 74 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 23 8126
City of Renton Public Works Shops SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
&HEAT PUMPS
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 23 8126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS & HEAT PUMPS
PART1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Capacity rating in accordance with ARI.
B. Sound rating is accordance with ARI 270.
C. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.
1.2 ELECTRICAL
A. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): All HVAC and refrigeration equipment with multi-
motor or combination electrical loads shall comply with NEC 110.10 &440.4 and must
include a SCCR greater than the Available Interrupting Current (AIC)of the electrical circuit
serving the equipment. See electrical drawings for required AIC kA rating. Equipment
SCCR may be presented in writing from the manufacturer or shown on the unit nameplate.
Refrigeration or air-conditioning equipment over 60 Amps MOCP must list the SCCR on the
unit nameplate. If the AIC rating is unavailable or cannot be determined provide equipment
with a minimum SCCR of 10kA.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING 8� HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Mitsubishi or approved equal.
B. General: Indoor/Outdoor unit combination shall be manufacturer paired. ETL labeled, AHRI
240 rated. R-410a Refrigerant. Cooling operation from 14F to 115F. Heating operation from
-4F to 75F.
C. Indoor unit: Factory assembled, wired and run tested ductless evaporator unit with white
finish.
1. Fan: Two speed, direct drive fan with permanently lubricated bearings, statically and
dynamically balanced. Adjustable guide vane and motorized air sweep louver.
2. Filter: Removable washable.
3. Coil: Smooth plate aluminum fins on copper tubing with inner grooves, silver alloy
brazed, pressure tested, condensate pan and drain.
4. Control: Microprocessor controlled self-diagnostic, run time delay, auto restart, test run
switch, automatic cooling, display set point and room temperature, 24/7
programmability.
D. Outdoor unit: Horizontal discharge condensing unit constructed of galvanized steel with
powder coat baked enamel finish.
1. Fan: Direct drive, permanently lubricated bearings, mounted for quiet operation, fan
guard.
August 1, 2018 23 8126- 1
Sign Shop Expansion 23 8126
City of Renton Public Works Shops SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
&HEAT PUMPS
Page 2 of 3
2. Coil: Corrugated aluminum fins on copper tubing with protective metal guard and
metering orifice.
3. Compressor: Rotary with crankcase heater, accumulator, internal thermal overload,
high pressure safety switch.
E. Accessories:
1. Low ambient operation to 0 F.
2. Pre-charged refrigerant tubing.
3. Compressor restart time delay.
PART 2 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete pad or roof support rails for condensing unit.
Provide inserts for mounting.
B. Coordinate size and location of sleeves or block-outs needs for refrigerant piping.
C. Determine refrigerant pipe routing to efficiently minimum run length and avoid interference.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.
B. Install refrigerant piping from condensing unit to indoor unit(s). Install refrigerant specialties
furnished with unit.
C. Insulate both liquid and vapor refrigerant piping on all runs.
D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.
E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
F. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed
accessories.
3.3 INSTALLATION — FAN COIL UNIT
A. Install condensate piping with trap and determine route from drain pan to nearest waste with
1/4"slope. Provide condensate pump where drain is not available or slope cannot be made.
B. Install fan coil unit on vibration isolators.
3.4 INSTALLATION -CONDENSING UNIT
A. Install condensing units at grade on concrete foundations with anchors.
B. Install condensing unit at roof on fabricated rails or curb with cap. Secure unit to support
and seal.
August 1, 2018 23 8126-2
Sign Shop Expansion 23 8126
City of Renton Public Works Shops SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
&HEAT PUMPS
Page 3 of 3
C. Install condensing units on neoprene vibration isolators.
3.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Furnish initial start-up and commissioning. During first year of operation, including routine
servicing and checkout.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet if necessary.
B. Install new filters in units at Substantial Completion.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan
has been test run under observation.
END OF SECTION 238126
August 1, 2018 23 8126-3
Sign Shop Expansion 26 06 00
City of Renton ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 4
DOCUMENT 26 0600 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE PROVISIONS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections apply to this and all applicable portions of the Special Conditions are hereby made
part of this Division.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Scope of Work shall consist of, but not limited to the following:
1. Modification to existing 480/277 volt service distribution equipment and related feeders.
2. 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire transformer.
3. Branch circuit panelboards for lighting and power.
4. Branch circuit conduit, boxes, wiring and devices.
5. Grounding.
6. Construction power facilities.
7. Lighting fixtures including self contained exit and emergency fixtures complete with lamps.
8. Telephone terminal boards, raceways, outlet boxes, wiring and devices.
9. Upgrade emergency generator receptacle and manual transfer switch (Bid Alternate #1).
10. Modifications to existing Fire Alarm System.
11. Relocation of existing antenna and related raceways.
12. Relocation of existing feeder serving Vehicle Wash Building.
13. Modifications to existing Entry Access System.
14. Relocation of server room (Bid Alternate#2).
15. Power wiring, magnetic motor starters and disconnects for all equipment as required for
Division 21/22/23 and all other Divisions of these specifications and by the Owner.
16. All other electrical equipment and services needed to complete a usable and operable
facility in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations..
1.3 CODES, STANDARDS AND PERMITS
A. All work shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, City of Renton
Electrical Code, State of Washington Electrical Construction Code, State of Washington
Energy Code, State of Washington Administrative Code, Washington State Department of
Health, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), National Fire Protection Administration Code
and all local electrical and fire codes and ordinances.
B. Obtain and pay for all required licenses, permits and inspections.
C. All equipment, materials and devices shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) label. If
no label is available, the label of a testing agency approved by the local inspecting authority is
required.
D. Certification of compliance with codes shall be obtained for Electrical Inspector and shall be
submitted to the Owner at completion of work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All new equipment, materials and devices shall be free from defects. Protect all electrical
equipment from damage throughout the course of construction.
August 15, 2018 26 05 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 06 00
City of Renton ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 4
B. For the actual fabrication, installation and testing of the work of this section, use only
throughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the
requirements for this work and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of
the specified items.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect electrical system materials before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect at no additional costs to the Owner.
1.6 FIELD INVESTIGATION
A. Contractor shall thoroughly investigate site prior to bidding. No change in contract price will be
allowed for work required to comply with existing conditions.
1.7 SUBMITTAL INFORMATION -SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Manufacturers: Submit complete descriptive literature and shop drawings to Architect with bid
proposal. No equipment is to be ordered or installed until equipment has been approved
without prior written approval from Owner.
B. Submittal information: Shop drawings are required for the following items: Lighting fixtures,
lamps, control devices and accessories; distribution and metering equipment; panelboards
and circuit breakers; motor starters and disconnect switches; wiring devices and trim plates;
Fire Alarm System design and equipment/devices; Security System / Entry Intercom design
and equipment/devices.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Provide maintenance manual for the servicing of all equipment installed. Manuals shall have a
typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs.
B. Data incorporated into manuals shall be neat, clean copies, 8'/2"x 11" sizes for binding.
C. Manual shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance
instructions, replacement parts lists and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and
systems installed under the project. Provide names, addresses and telephone numbers of
manufacturers' representatives.
D. Three bound copies shall be delivered to the Architect.
1.9 TESTS
A. The Contractor shall perform all tests required by these specifications. The Contractor shall
notify the Architect and Owner at least 48 hours prior to conducting any required tests.
B. All wiring shall test free from short circuits and ground faults, shall show insulation resistance
between phase conductors and neutral and grounding conductors of not less than the rated
insulation resistance value of the specific conductors. The system ground, service entrance
conductors and all feeders and sub-feeders shall be tested with appropriate meggers, or other
approved instruments and methods, to determine ground insulation resistance values.
C. Contractor shall repair or replace any items failing to meet the requirements at no additional
expense to the Owner until such item or items can be demonstrated to comply.
August 1, 2018 26 05 00 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 06 00
City of Renton ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 4
D. The Contractor shall have available instruments for measuring light intensities, voltage and
current levels and for the demonstration of continuity, grounds or open circuit conditions.
E. Panel loads shall be tested and balanced as closely as possible among all phases. Upon
completion of the electrical systems with all electrical equipment connected and operational,
take reading of voltage and amperage at main service equipment and at each panelboard and
at end of longest branch circuit run at no load and at full load conditions. Record results in
tabulated, typed format and include in Operations Manual.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work among all the various trades doing work in the building
and shall examine all drawings, including the Mechanical, Structural and Architectural, for
construction details and necessary work coordination.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work and installation requirements with serving utility
companies. Conform to all construction requirements as defined by authority having
jurisdiction.
C. Contractor is required to coordinate with Architect to determine exact locations for common
area lighting and power, fire alarm devices, proximity readers and related equipment.
Coordinate all device and fixture locations in individual apartments.
D. Special attention is called to the coordination of door swings and location of all related
switches to be on the strike side of the door, and the location of ducts, grilles, pipes and other
equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, kitchen appliances and other electrical
equipment is clear from and in proper relation to these items.
E. The Contractor will not be paid for cutting, patching, wiring and finishing required for relocation
of work installed due to interference with work of other trades.
F. Contractor shall consult the architectural drawings for the exact height of all outlets with
relationship to millwork, trim details and structural elements.
1.11 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
A. Contractor shall provide all trenching, cutting of pavement and backfilling required for the
installation of electrical work. Included is the coordination with serving utility companies to
provide all trenching and backfill as required by utility companies for the installation of building
services.
B. Compaction of backfill and any patching of pavement shall be done by the Contractor.
1.12 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of work, and before final acceptance and payment, the Contractor shall, at
his expense, remove from the site and adjoining properties and dispose of all surplus and
discarded materials, rubbish, temporary buildings, equipment and debris which may have
accumulated during the course of work.
B. All fixtures, equipment and devices shall be thoroughly cleaned and in proper condition prior
to final acceptance.
1.13 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work put in under this specification and drawings.
He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense, as may be necessary, any
August 1, 2018 26 05 00 -3
Sign Shop Expansion 26 06 00
City of Renton ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 4
defective work, materials or parts which may show itself within one year after certificate of
occupancy, two years for ballasts with installation due to imperfection in materials or
workmanship. Incandescent lamps shall not be guaranteed, however, all incandescent lamps
shall be operational at the time of final acceptance of the project.
B. Provide twenty four (24) hour service for any and all warranty problems experienced in
operation of the equipment provided.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers of certain equipment and materials are specified in other sections
of this specification.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for conditions under which work is to be performed. Report to Architect in
writing all conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Starting of work constitutes acceptance of the conditions under which work is to be performed
and this contractor shall, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and
defective work encountered.
3.2 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established
bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all
measurements at site and check the correctness of same as it related to the work.
B. Any discovery of discrepancy between actual measurements and those indicated shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect. Related work shall not proceed until receiving
instructions from the Architect.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All wiring shall be provided under Division 26 including wiring for equipment as described
under Divisions 21, 22 and 23, and wiring as specified in other Divisions for elevator,
appliances, kitchen equipment, laundry equipment and miscellaneous equipment.
B. The Division responsible for furnishing the equipment to be controlled shall furnish all control
devices and related control wiring required for the equipment to perform, regardless of
whether the device is to be wired in a control or power circuit.
C. HVAC and controls shall be furnished under Division 23. Power wiring to these items shall be
installed under Division 26.
D. All power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including
power wiring through starters, shall be furnished and installed under Division 26.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
August 1, 2018 26 05 00 -4
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 19
City of Renton 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLES
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 05 19 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLES FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Conductors shall be copper, 600 volt with type THHN, THWN or XHHW insulation, unless
otherwise specified elsewhere. Minimum wire size to be No. 12 AWG except control and
signal conductors may be No. 14. Aluminum wire of the compact, Triple E alloy type will be
permitted for feeder sizes No. 2 and larger.
B. Color code to be as follows:
Equipment Ground -green; 480/277 volt: Neutrals - Grey, Phase A- Brown, Phase B -
Orange, Phase C -Yellow; 120/208 volt: Neutrals - white; Phase A - Black, Phase B - Red,
Phase C - Blue. All switchlegs and control and interlock wiring shall be color coded with colors
other than those above. Indicate colors used on final as-built drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Conductors to be insulated, solid copper for sizes No. 10 and smaller. Conductors No. 8 and
larger shall be stranded.
B. All taps and splices in No. 8 or smaller wire shall be fastened together by means of solderless
twist-on type connectors. All taps and splices in wire larger than No. 8 shall be made with
solderless compression or indenter type lugs and taped to provide insulation equal to the
conductor.
C. Feeder conductors size AWG 2 and larger may be compact stranded aluminum wire, Triple E
alloy. Use AL/CU lugs for all terminations using aluminum conductors
D. All terminations, connections, and splices in aluminum wire shall be coated with anti-corrosion
oxide inhibiting conductive compound. Aluminum wire shall be terminated only in approved
stamped AI-Cu lugs or splicing devices.
E. Conductors in Type MC armored cable shall be copper with THHN insulation and color coded.
Armored cable shall have green insulated equipment grounding conductor.
F. All power feeders and branch circuitry circuits No. 4 and smaller shall be wired with color
coded wire with the same color used for a phase throughout the building. Power feeders
above No. 4 shall either be fully color coded or shall have black insulation with color coded
marking tape in all boxes and enclosures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Wire in vicinity of heat producing equipment shall have type THHN type insulation.
B. Protect all conductors from damage during installation and prior to installation of covers,
devices and equipment.
C. All conductors to be sized per the National Electrical Code. Maximum voltage drop for all
August 1, 2018 26 05 19 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 19
City of Renton 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
Page 2 of 2
panel feeders shall be 3%. Maximum voltage drop for all branch circuits shall be 5%. Voltage
drop to be measured at farthest point on a particular circuit to determine branch circuit
maximum voltage drop.
D. Type MC cable may be used where allowed by code. Cables shall not be exposed to
moisture.
E. All panel feeders to have 25% spare capacity above calculated demand load.
F. Indicate all feeders and panel feeder sizes on as-built drawings if different that as shown on
drawings.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
August 1, 2018 26 05 19 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 26
City of Renton GROUNDING
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 05 26 GROUNDING FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. All electrical equipment, metallic conduit, motor frames, service equipment, panelboards,
transformers, etc. shall have equipment grounding system per Code requirements. System
grounding conductor shall run from the main service ground to all panels and from grounding
lugs on each panel to each branch circuit outlet box and device in accordance with NEC
requirements.
B. Provide ground bars, ground rods, grounding conductors and connections.
C. Ground antenna equipment per NEC and manufacturer's recommendations. Provide ground
rods and connections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Panel feeders, motors and power circuits shall be grounded with code sized insulated
equipment grounding conductor. Metallic conduit may be used for equipment grounding
conductor for lighting and where permitted by code.
B. All flexible metallic conduit and armored cable used for power and lighting shall be equipped
with a green, insulated copper equipment grounding conductor, code sized. Bond to boxes
and equipment or device at each box.
C. All circuitry installed in non-metallic conduit to be equipped with code sized equipment
grounding conductor.
D. Conduit sizes shall be adjusted as required to allow for equipment grounding conductor.
E. Ground electrodes to be 10' x 5/8"copperweld ground rods with suitable wire clamps.
Grounding electrodes to be sized and installed per NEC and local requirements.
F. Ground bar in Server Room to be sold copper, 1/4" x 4"x 36" as detailed on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Bond the grounding electrode conductors to the main service ground buss and to the ground
bus/metal frame of the equipment.
B. Indicate all grounding equipment and feeder ground conductors.
C. Provide minimum two (2) grounding electrodes and ground conductor for relocated antenna.
Ground antenna structure and related equipment.
D. Install ground bar in Server Room at 18" above finished floor. Connect grounding conductors
as indicated on drawings.
August 1, 2018
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 26
City of Renton GROUNDING
Page 2 of 2
3.2 TESTING
A. Test entire grounding system for continuity and correct any dis-continuities or high resistance
circuits.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
August 1, 2018 26 05 26 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 29
City of Renton ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 0529 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR CITY
OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install all supports, hangers and inserts, etc. required to mount equipment,
cabinets, fixtures, conduit, cables, pull boxes and other equipment under this Division.
B. Supports and mounting hardware for relocated antenna.
C. Supports and hangers shall be code-approved for the type of application.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Supports, hangers, etc. shall be designed for the specific application.
B. Supports, hangers, etc. shall be structurally sized for the type of load being supported.
C. Unistrut, Kindorf, or Super Strut are approved manufacturers.
D. All materials exposed to moisture or dampness shall be manufactured with the specific
application for the location installed. All steel to be galvanized with paint to match adjacent
surface color(s) as required by Architectural conditions.
E. Antenna hardware exposed to weather to be stainless steel.
E. Conduit supports on roof or on slab to be supported by manufactured galvanized steel
channel with compact foam, uv resistant, weatherproof. Space on 10' centers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building.
B. Supports, hangers, etc. shall be installed in an approved manner and as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Lighting fixture pendants to be supplied by manufacturer of fixture with stems, canopies and
swivel base, painted to match fixture finish. Length of pendants to be as required to achieve
required mounting height.
D. Support antenna per manufacturer's instruction and as required by Code.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
August 1, 2018 26 05 29 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 33
City of Renton RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. All wiring to be in conduit where required by Code. Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel
conduit, electrical metallic tubing (EMT), Intermediate Metal Tubing (IMC), flexible metal
conduit, heavy wall Schedule 40 PVC and electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT).
B. Branch circuit wiring above accessible ceilings may be metal clad cable, type MC, where
permitted by codes. Provide suitable metal outlet boxes with appropriate connectors.
D. At all concealed or surface outlets for electrical lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles, control
devices, etc., code approved outlet boxes shall be provided with trim and mounting hardware.
E. Surface or flush junction or pull boxes shall be provided as required to facilitate branch circuit
wiring or feeder conductor installation and as required by Code.
F. Remove exposed conduits on east exterior wall serving the Vehicle Wash Building. Re-route
feeder as indicated on drawings to accommodate new construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS- RACEWAY
A. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduits, heavy wall, or Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be used
for all raceways underground or under slab. Do not install conduits in concrete slab.
B. Underground RGS and PVC conduits shall be joined to prevent entrance of moisture. Use
joint sealing compound on threaded fittings in rigid galvanized steel conduit. Apply two coats
of Kipper's Bitumastic No. 50 compound to entire length. Use PVC joint sealant for PVC
conduits.
C. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways above slab where not subject to
mechanical injury or dampness. Under no circumstances will electric tubing be allowed
underground. Tubing shall be joined with set screw fittings.
D. All connections to motors or vibrating equipment or at other locations where required shall be
made with not less than 24" of flexible zinc-coated steel conduit, using special type of
connectors for this conduit. Flexible conduit shall be liquid-tight with approved fittings in wet or
damp locations.
E. Install insulating bushings on all rigid galvanized steel conduits terminating in panels, cabinets
or boxes. Material in these bushings must not melt or support flame.
F. Metal clad cable type MC shall be installed per Code using special fittings approved for
intended purpose. Conductors shall be THHN insulated copper or SHHW insulated aluminum.
H. ENT with approved fittings may be used for all applications where permitted by codes.
2.2 MATERIALS- CABLES
A. Metal clad cable type MC shall be installed per Code using special fittings approved for
intended purpose. Conductors shall be THHN insulated copper.
August 1, 2018 26 05 33 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 33
City of Renton RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 2 of 3
2.3 MATERIALS, SIZING AND TRIM - BOXES
A. Outlet boxes shall be standard stamped galvanized steel, one-piece. All outlet boxes shall
maintain the fire rating of wall and ceiling assemblies, one hour minimum. Boxes shall be
provided with cable clamps and grounding terminal.
B. Outlet boxes shall be of such form and dimension as to be adapted to the specific use,
location and type of device or fixture to be used. Box sizes shall be determined in accordance
with the NEC requirements for conductor fill, with or without devices as necessary.
C. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 4" octagonal or 4" square x 1'/2"deep or larger as required with
appropriate trim rings and fixture or device mounting hardware as required.
D. Switch, wall receptacle and other outlet boxes in plastered or gypsum board wall and exposed
masonry walls shall be minimum 4" square x 1'/2"deep minimum. Provide a standard trim ring
of appropriate depth and opening to suit device.
E. Low voltage Class 2 devices fed by cable may be mounted with flush mounted low voltage
mounting brackets. Caddy MP1.
F. Outlet boxes exposed to weather shall be cast iron or aluminum with gasketed covers and
threaded hubs for conduits. Boxes shall be weatherproof or watertight as required by Code.
G. Junction and pull boxes shall be galvanized steel with screw-secured blank covers for surface
mounting as required. Boxes shall be sized for conduits entering and conductor fill in
accordance with Code requirements. Boxes exposed to weather shall be weatherproof or
watertight as required by Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DRAWINGS
A. All feeder conduit sizes to be indicated on drawings. Raceways for low voltage systems to be
sized and shown on drawings. Major junction /pull boxes to be sized and shown on drawings.
Locate and identify all conduit stub-ups and spare conduits on drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. All conduits and cable shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner, and shall be properly
supported with approved conduit clamps, hanger rods, cable tray, cable hooks and structural
fasteners. All conduits except those from surface mounted devices or fixtures shall be run
concealed from view. Exposed conduits shall be supported with clamp fasteners with toggle
bolts on hollow walls or ceilings and with lead expansion shields on concrete. Rigid steel box
connections shall be made with double locknuts and bushings.
B. All conduits shall be kept clear of plumbing fixtures to facilitate repair or replacement of said
fixtures without disturbing wiring. Except for control purposes, all conduits shall be kept away
from items producing heat.
C. Conduits shall be concealed in all areas. Surface conduits shall be run parallel with building
lines in such a manner as to not detract from Architectural appurtenances or aesthetics.
Contractor to attend pre-installation meeting to review all feeder and branch circuit routing
with Architect.
D. Conduits underground or underslab on grade shall be installed in accordance with applicable
codes. Underground conduits in public right of way shall be minimum 36" below finished
August 1, 2018 26 05 33 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 33
City of Renton RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 3 of 3
grade.
E. Conduits for Antenna System cables to be in ENT or Schedule 80 PVC. See Section 27 53
19.
3.3 INSTALLATION - CABLES
A. All armored cable shall be run in neat and workmanlike manner, and shall be properly
supported with approved cable staples and straps.
B. All type MC cables except those from surface mounted devices or fixtures shall be run
concealed from view.
3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. All flush mounted outlets shall be mounted such that covers and plates will fit tight to finished
surfaces without the use of shims or mats. Plates shall not support wiring devices.
B. Height of wall outlets to centerline above finished floors shall be as follows:
Switches - 4'-0"
Receptacles - 1'-6"
Desk Receptacles - 42" or as indicated on drawings.
Telephone - 1'-6"
Thermostat - 4'-0"
Intercom /Wall Telephone - 54"
Television - 1'-6"
Fire Alarm Pull Station - 4'-6"
Fire Alarm Speaker/strobe - 6'-8" or 6" below ceiling
Note: All mounting heights to be verified with Architect and shop drawings prior to installation.
All device mounting box mounting heights to conform to local codes and ADA requirements
where applicable.
C. Height of wall mounted lighting fixtures shall be as required by Architectural conditions and
Code. Lighting fixture housing to completely cover outlet box opening.
D. Outlet boxes shall be mounted true and straight in relation to surrounding building elements.
E. Maintain fire rating of all walls and ceilings. Fire caulk all penetrations through walls and
ceilings. Outlet boxes to be approved for installation in rated assemblies.
F. Outlet boxes located in common walls; outlet boxes to be mounted in adjacent stud wall
cavities when possible. Avoid installing outlet boxes in adjoining units in common wall stud
bays. Outlet boxes to be acoustically tight so as to not transmit sound between adjoining units
and between common areas and units. Provide acoustic barrier for all outlet boxes and
penetrations in common stud wall/ceiling bays.
G. Label all outlet boxes as to the system they serve. Fire alarm boxes to have red covers.
Control boxes to have blue cover. Identify telephone and television boxes.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
August 1, 2018 26 05 33 -3
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 45
City of Renton SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR RACEWAYS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 0529 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR RACEWAYS AND
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide seismic restraints for electrical equipment, both supported and suspended, conduits
and boxes.
B. Supports and bracing hardware for equipment and conduits.
C. Supports shall be code-approved for the type of application.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Supports, bracing, etc. shall be designed for the specific application.
B. Supports, bracing, etc. shall be structurally sized for the type of load being supported.
C. Conduit bracing for conduits 2 '/2' nominal diameter or larger. Conduits suspended by
individual hangers 12 inches or less need not be braced.
D. Steel fabrication to be in accordance with AISC M011 /ASTM A 36.
E. Bracing hardware exposed to weather to be stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All items shall be supported from the structural portion of the building. Seismic restraints
including anchors to building structure to be designed by a registered professional structural
engineer licensed in the State of Washington.
B. Details, number, size, capacity and locations of braces and anchors for suspended raceways
and equipment to be indicated on As-Built drawings .
C. Attach all bracing to structural members of the building which are capable of withstanding the
design load of the seismic restraint. Bracing of equipment shall comply with SMACNA seismic
restraint manual and the IBC.
D. Comply with the requirements of Section 26 05 29.
END OF SECTION 26 05 45
August 1, 2018 26 05 45 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 05 53
City of Renton ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURES
FOR CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical equipment identification shall include color coded phenolic nameplates for all
service equipment, disconnects, and fused switches including use size and type.
B. Electrical equipment shall be marked per Code to warn qualified persons of potential electric
arc flash hazards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Equipment Nameplates:
1. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, engraved in 1/16"thick phenolic letters, a
minimum of 3/16" high, as follows:
a. White letters on black background for equipment served by building normal
service.
b. White letters on red background for equipment served by standby service.
c. White letters on blue background for control and signal equipment and boxes.
B. Where applicable, nameplates shall include source panel, fuse size and type, e.g.,
disconnects, motor starters, etc.
PANEL 5B
120/208V 3� 4W
FED FROM PNL 4C
Provide complete list of proposed nameplates with submittals.
C. Junction and Pull Box Identification: Mark the cover of all junction boxes and pull boxes to
identify the system, circuits, or feeders contained within the box. Use red color for fire alarm.
Power circuits to have specified circuit numbers contained within the junction box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clean all surfaces prior to installing labels. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces
which require finish, install identification after completion of painting.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
August 1, 2018 26 05 53 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 22 00
City of Renton LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide dry type distribution transformers for all loads requiring 120/208 volt service.
B. Transformers to be secured to floor as recommended by manufacturer. Provide all mounting
bracing and hardware as required.
C. Ground secondary neutrals of all distribution transformers per NEC.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Dry type transformers shall be of adequate rating to support 125% connected load.
Transformers to be NEMA Class I, 480 volt, 3- phase delta primary, 120/208 volt, 3-phase, 4-
wire, wye configuration, 60 hertz, 97.5% efficiency.
B. Provide six 2-1/2% full capacity taps in primary winding, two above and four below normal
voltage.
C. The insulation system shall be for 150 degrees C. rise for 220 degrees C. insulation system.
D. Transformers 15 kva and larger shall be NEMA TP-1 rated.
E. Transformers shall have steel enclosure with knockouts for conduit connections.
F. Transformers to be floor mounting as per manufacturer's recommendation.
G. The transformers shall be of the same manufacturer as the approved panelboard
manufacturer.
H. Minimum impedance shall be 4.5%.
I. Nameplates shall be attached with a minimum of two 6-32 roundhead screws, lockwasher
and nuts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount transformers on 200# rated ribbed neoprene vibration pads.
B. Provide primary and secondary overcurrent protection as required by NEC and local Code.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
August 1, 2018 26 22 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 24 13
City of Renton SWITCHBOARDS AND METERING
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS AND METERING FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide modifications to existing 480/277 volt switchboard as indicated on drawings.
B. Switchboard components shall comply with NEMA standards, shall be UL listed and have an
Integrated Equipment Rating equal to existing equipment rating.
C. Furnish and install all devices, hardware, trim and labeling.
D. Submit shop drawings to the Architect in accord with the General Conditions and General
Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the final Schedule for switchboard. Include Rating
Standards, Circuit Breaker Withstandability Data and individual circuit rating, poles, and load
information.
E. Provide signage as required by Seattle City Light and NEC to identify Main Service
Disconnect locations. Equipment shall be field marked to warn qualified personnel of potential
electric arc flash hazards.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Existing switchboard is Westinghouse with FDP fused disconnect switches. New panel trim to
be suitable to the mode of mounting, and shall be primed and painted in the manufacturer's
standard color. Manufacturer: Eaton.
B. Locate phenolic circuit labels above disconnect switch factory label.
C. New fused disconnect switch to bolt-on and be compatible with the existing switchboard
manufacturing and design. As-built fault current rating of existing switchboard is 100K AIC.
D. Provide a nameplate for the overcurrent devices. See Section 260553.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate raceway entries to permit installation of conductors while maintaining the minimum
bending radius prescribed for each conductor.
B. Maintain power to facility at all times. Any power interruptions to be scheduled 48 hours prior
to power shut-down. Coordinate with Owner.
C. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners. Check tightness of bolted bus
joints using a calibrated torque wrench per manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Install all trim, filler plates and covers.
August 1, 2018 26 24 13 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 24 13
City of Renton SWITCHBOARDS AND METERING
Page 2 of 2
E. Existing metering to remain.
END OF SECTION 26 24 13
August 1, 2018 26 24 13 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 24 16
City of Renton PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 2416 PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR
CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Panelboards shall comply with NEMA standards, shall be UL listed and have an Integrated
Equipment Rating.
B. Submit shop drawings to the Architect in accord with the General Conditions and General
Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the Panel Schedules for all distribution and
branch circuit panels. Include Rating Standards, Circuit Breaker Withstandability Data and
individual circuit rating, poles, and load information.
C. Provide modifications to existing panelboards as indicated on drawings.
D. Balance loads on all phases of all panelboards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Panelboards shall be rated at proper voltage, current and phase for intended use with bus
bars of copper or aluminum. Provide each panel with a ground bar, 100% neutral, bolt-on
breakers and common trip or multi-pole breakers.
B. Panelboard enclosure cabinets shall be of code gauge galvanized steel. Trim and door to be
suitable to the mode of mounting, and shall be primed and painted in the manufacturer's
standard color Panelboard doors shall be provided with lock, flush cylinder tumbler type and
furnished with two keys for each lock. Locks for all new panelboards shall be keyed alike.
C. Locate branch circuit directory inside the panelboard door. Directory shall consist of a metal
frame, clear plastic cover and typed circuit directory. Label all panelboards.
D. Provide equipment grounding bar in all panelboards and distribution panels.
E. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be UL labeled, bolt-on, thermal magnetic type, and shall
have an interrupting rating of minimum 10,000 AIC or. Higher fault current ratings may be
required to withstand available fault current. Coordinate fault current ratings with serving utility
and provide devices of adequate rating.
F. Main circuit breakers shall be bolt-on, thermal magnetic type and shall be capable of being
padlocked in the OFF position.
G. All multi-pole circuit breakers shall be single operating, common trip with single handle.
H. Circuit breakers to be installed in existing panelboards to be of the same manufacturer and
bracing as the panelboard in which they are to be installed.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Eaton, Square D, Cutler Hammer or prior approved equal.
August 1, 2018 26 24 16 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 24 16
City of Renton PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 2of 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount panelboards plumb with the top of panelboard at 72" above finished floor. Verify
panelboard mounting heights with Architect.
B. Furnish and install typed branch circuit directory for all new and existing panelboards. Label all
panelboards.
C. Provide minimum 10% space in all new panelboards.
D. Identify branch circuitry on as-built drawing indicating the exact circuits as installed. Include
schedule for each panelboard indicating name, ampacity, voltage, phase, main breaker/lugs
only, trim type, branch circuit breaker and loads.
E. Provide flash-are signage for all panelboards ar required by Code.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
August 1, 2018 26 24 16 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 27 26
City of Renton WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all wiring devices and appropriate trim or cover plate.
B. Provide empty outlet boxes with blank cover plate with conduit stub-up for all future devices
located in finished walls as required.
C. Devices to be located as directed by the NEC, ADA, Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Receptacles and switches shall be specification grade, Decora rocker-style, white.
Receptacles shall be duplex grounding type, 20 Amps. Switches shall be quiet type.
B. Special receptacles shall be as required for equipment.
C. Ground fault interrupter receptacles shall be 15 Amp with test switch. Feed-thru type is
acceptable for down-circuit protection.
D. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Straight blade, Heavy-Duty grade, duplex receptacle, with
equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the
device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.
1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.
2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
E. Where a single receptacle is on a dedicated circuit, the receptacle to be 20 Amp rated.
F. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors for interior lighting controls shall be wall mounted,
adjustable with contact ratings capable of controlling connected load. Wall box occupancy
sensors with local switch shall be used for Offices, Storage and Printing Room. Sensor
Switch, Wattstopper or approved equal.
G. Provide daylighting and dimming controls as required by Energy Code. Dimming system to be
compatible with dimming ballasts for all lighting fixtures in daylighting areas. Lutron or
approved equal.
H. All devices and trim plates except special receptacles shall be smooth, plastic, white color.
Leviton, Hubbell, General Electric, Pass & Seymour or prior approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all devices straight and plumb. Cover plates shall fit securely and tightly against wall
and device. Cover plates shall not support devices.
B. Two or more switches, time switches or receptacles in same location shall be mounted in
August 1, 2018 26 27 26 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 27 26
City of Renton WIRING DEVICES
Page 2 of 2
multi-gang boxes with one-piece trim plate.
C. Provide 0-10 volt dimming for daylighting in Office.
D. Provide blank outlet boxes with blank cover for devices in Server Room to accommodate
devices in the event Bid Alternate #2 is not accepted.
E. Provide adequate duplex receptacles in offices, utility rooms, Shop, Mezzanine and all
associated areas. Coordinate all outlet locations with Architect prior to rough-in.
F. Provide at least one receptacle in each utility room. Provide minimum three four-plex
receptacles in Server Room (See Bid Alternate #2). Provide a receptacle within 25' of
mechanical equipment. Provide weatherproof ground fault receptacle within 25' of exterior or
roof mounted mechanical equipment.
G. Special devices shall be installed as required for equipment. Coordinate with equipment
provider.
H. Provide ground fault receptacles with weatherproof covers in all exterior locations as required
by Code. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's instructions.
I. Isolated ground receptacles to be installed with equipment ground conductor to yoke and
isolated ground conductor to device ground terminal. Isolated ground conductor to be green
with yellow stripe.
I. Light switches to be located on latch side of door leading into room. Provide local switching
and automatic controls for all lighting as required by the Local Code.
J. Provide automatic lighting controls and daylighting controls in Office. Occupancy sensors in
Storage, Server, Printing and Small Office. Adjust all automatic lighting controls to properly
operate to meet Local Code requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
August 1, 2018 26 27 26 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 28 13
City of Renton FUSES
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 2813 FUSES FOR CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all fuses as required.
B. Materials shall be new, free from defects and arrive at job site unopened in original
containers.
C. Make all necessary provisions for storing materials and equipment at job site so as to ensure
the quality and fitness of the items to be incorporated in the work. Equipment shall be stored
to prevent damage and corrosion.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide fuses as required per NEC, and as required for a fully operational system. Fuses to
limit fault current to within equipment ratings. Provide fault current coordination study to size
equipment and rating of bracing capability.
B. All fuses shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor at jobsite and only when equipment is
to be energized. Fuses shall not be installed during shipment.
C. Fuses:
1. Provide current limiting, UL, time delay fuses with sufficient AIC rating to withstand
available utility fault current. Coordinate fault duty with utility company.
2. For feeders 600 amps and less:
a. Class RK-1, LPS-RK for 600 volt, dual element.
b. Class RK-5, LPS-RK for 250 volt, dual element.
c. Class J, LPJ for 600 volt and below, dual element.
3. For motor circuits 600 volts and below:
a. Class RK-1 and Class J sized at 125% FLC of motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Indicate fuse type and sizes on as-built drawings.
END OF SECTION 26 28 13
August 1, 2018 26 28 13 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 28 19
City of Renton ENCLOSED SWITCHES
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 2819 ENCLOSED SWITCHES FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide disconnects at all motors and other equipment items unless the equipment has a self-
contained, code approved disconnecting method. Equipment disconnects shall be fused or
non-fused as required by the equipment manufacturer.
B. Motor and equipment disconnect switches shall be NEMA rated and UL listed and shall meet
the requirements of the National Electrical Code and local codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Square D, Cutler Hammer or prior approved equal.
B. Switches shall be "Heavy Duty"grade and be mounted in an enclosure suitable for the
environment they are mounted in.
C. Nameplates: Provide engraved phenolic nameplates, permanently attached per section 26 05
53.
D. Single-Phase Motor: Provide toggle type, 20-amp, 120-volt rating, specification grade for
motors 1/3 HP or less, 120 volt, single-phase.
E. Three-Phase Motor: Provide horsepower rated, multi-pole, fused or non-fused switch.
F. Equipment disconnects shall be fused or non-fused as required by the equipment
manufacturer, rated at 125% of full load nameplate amperage or rated horsepower, heavy-
duty type.
G. Service Entrance disconnect switches to be SE rated with bracing required to withstand
available fault current. Install Current Limiting Fuses as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Indicate all disconnect switch locations on drawings, size, fused or un-fused. Location of all
disconnects shall conform to code requirements and as required to allow proper access to the
equipment being served.
B. Securely mount to separate structural support. Disconnects supported only by raceways will
not be acceptable. Maximum height of 6'-0" above floor
C. Provide auxiliary contacts as required to interface with signals from other systems. Provide
auxiliary contacts as required to interface with solid state VFD starters provided by Division 23
when applicable.
END OF SECTION 26 28 19
August 1, 2018 26 28 19 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 29 13
City of Renton MOTOR CONTROL
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 2913 MOTOR CONTROL FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Motor starters for all equipment requiring them shall be furnished with equipment. Install and
connect as required.
B. Control wiring for motor starters for all equipment requiring them shall be furnished with
equipment.
C. Provide 120 volt interlock wiring between control devices and other systems where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Starter sizes, voltage, etc. shall be verified by Contractor. Starters to be line voltage, across
the line, non-reversing type with replaceable heaters. Square D, Cutler Hammer or prior
approved equal.
B. Motor starters to be mounted in suitable enclosure suitable for the environment they are
mounted in.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install as required and per manufacturers' instruction. Provide engraved rigid plastic
nameplates for each motor starter per section 26 05 53.
B. Verify motor starter sizes and overload relay ratings with equipment furnished to assure
proper match prior to energizing power.
C. Provide auxiliary relays as required to interface with signals from other systems.
D. Provide code required disconnect means for all controllers as required by the NEC and local
inspector.
E. Indicate motor starter locations on drawings with size, rating, type and voltage.
F. Shop exhaust fan VFD starters to be provided and installed under Division 23. Line side
connections to be provided under Division 26. Utilize auxiliary contacts in disconnect switch to
disable VFD starter when local disconnect switch is turned off. Coordinate with mechanical
contractor.
END OF SECTION 26 29 13
August 1, 2018 26 29 13 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 32 13
City of Renton STANDBY POWER
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 26 32 13 STANDBY POWER FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide modifications to the existing standby service as indicated on drawings per Bid
Alternate #1.
B. Modifications to include new circuit breaker and feeder from Main Switchboard, new manual
transfer switch and new generator receptacle.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide required connections to main service switchboard for new 200 amp fused disconnect
switch. Provide connections to the standby power manual transfer switch. See Section 26 24
13.
B. Standby power main disconnect switch to be Service Entrance (SE) rated with bracing
required to withstand available fault current. Install Current Limiting Fuses as required.
C. Manual Transfer Switch to be 200 amp, 600 volt rated, 3 pole, SN, SE mounted in NEMA 3R
enclosure. ASCO Power, Russo Electric, Onan, Schneider or prior approved equal.
D. Generator receptacle to be 200 amp, 4 pole, 4 wire, NEMA 3R, 600 volt, pin and sleeve
construction. Appleton #ADJA20044-200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location of all equipment shall conform to Code requirements and as required to allow proper
access to the equipment being served.
B. Securely mount to wall or structural support. Equipment supported only by raceways will not
be acceptable. Maximum height of 6'-0" above grade.
C. Label Standby Service disconnect switch and transfer switch.
D. All feeders and branch circuitry serving Standby Power loads to be kept separate from the
Normal Power building panelboards and branch circuitry. Identify junction boxes serving
Standby Loads separately from junction boxes serving normal loads. See Section 26 05 53.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
August 1, 2018 26 32 13 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 51 00
City of Renton INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
Page 1 of 3
DOCUMENT 26 5100 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES FOR CITYOF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Fixtures furnished under this Division shall be complete with all necessary trim and mounting
hardware, and installed per manufacturer's instruction.
B. Furnish and install complete and operating interior lighting system complete with wiring,
controls lighting fixtures and lamps. Installation shall be in conformance with the requirements
of the Illuminating Engineering Society, the 2017 National Electrical Code and 2015 Seattle
Energy Code (SEC).
C. All lighting equipment and fixtures shall bear the UL label and be listed for the type of
construction installed. Fixtures in direct contact with insulation shall be IC rated. Lighting
fixtures to comply with the Seattle Energy Code (SEC) requirements.
D. Furnish and install all Code required exit and emergency lighting fixtures. Emergency and Exit
fixture locations to be reviewed and approved by Architect and JHA prior to rough-in.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished in accordance with the Lighting Fixture Schedule or
subsequently approved substitutions. Lighting fixtures to be Energy Star rated in common
areas to comply with HUD requirements.
B. All lighting fixtures, accessories and lamps shown on the fixture schedules shall be furnished
unless specifically noted. All fixture types shall be submitted to Architect for Architect's review
prior to ordering.
C. All fixtures to be factory pre-wired. Fixture supports shall be as require by the fixture
manufacturer. Provide extra blocking or bracing for special fixtures or location as required.
D. Fluorescent fixtures to have rapid start electronic ballasts except where controlled by
occupancy sensor(s) in which case program start ballasts to be provided.
E. Lenses in enclosed fluorescent fixtures to be acrylic prismatic.0.125"thick minimum. Lighting
systems shall be 85 CRI or better and have a color temperature of 3500K or as noted on
Lighting Fixture Schedule. Linear flourescent lamps to be Octron T-8. Compact fluorescent
ballasts shall be high power factor type and produce 100% rated lamp lumen output.
F. LED fixtures to be furnished with integral driver and heat sink, 3500 K or as scheduled in
Lighting Fixture Schedule.
G. Fixtures in common area Daylight Zones to be dimmed. Provide automatic dimming controls
for fixtures in Daylight Zones, 0-10 volt.
H. Occupancy Sensors to be dual technology, ceiling mounted with relay power packs as
required. Rooms under 600 sq. ft. to be provided with wall box occupancy sensor with local
switch. Wattstopper or Sensor Switch.
August 16, 2018 26 51 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 51 00
City of Renton INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
Page 2 of 3
I. Service area corridors, storage rooms, utility rooms and mechanical/electrical rooms to be
provided with LED strip or wraparound type linear fixtures. LED strip lighting fixtures to be
furnished with chrome wire guard. Provide occupancy sensors in all rooms as required by
code.
J. Offices to have recessed LED lay-in fixtures. Provide occupancy sensor. See drawings for
details.
K. Emergency lighting shall be provided by integral emergency lighting fixtures with self-
contained battery, test switch, charger and dual adjustable LED lamps. Integral emergency
ballasts may be used where approved by Architect. Minimum code required lighting shall be
provided in all common areas and in the path of egress (ie: corridors, stairwells, etc.).
Emergency lighting shall provide a minimum 1 footcandle with 90 minutes of full operation
before degradation due to loss of battery power.
L. Provide lighted exit lighting fixtures in all areas of path of egress, maximum 100 feet between
exit fixtures. Exit fixtures to be located in conformance with building officials. Provide
directional arrows where required. Exit fixtures to be self-contained LED with steel housing,
white.
M. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule for lighting fixture requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using standard supports for outlets and fixtures.
Ceiling finish material shall not support fixtures.
B. Lighting fixtures shall conform with the City of Seattle requirements and Seattle Energy Code
(SEC).
C. Coordinate mounting heights for all wall mounted fixtures with Architect prior to rough-in.
D. Fixtures less than five pounds may be supported from the outlet box by means of an
interposed metal strap, hickey or other threaded connection.
E. Installed lighting illumination levels to be in conformance with the recommendations of the
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES), NEC, SEC and Building Codes.
F. Emergency lighting fixtures shall provide emergency lighting for minimum 1'/2 hours in all
required areas. Emergency lighting capacity to be greater than minimum code requirements
where directed by Architect. Provide required illumination levels in all areas as required by
codes.
G. All fixtures shall be set free of light leaks, wraps, dents or other objectionable characteristics.
H. All lamps shall be operational at time of final acceptance.
3.2 SWITCHING OF FIXTURES
A. Provide 0-10 volt dimming for daylight areas with automatic controls as required by the Local
Energy Code. Local dimming stations to be located as indicated on drawings or as directed by
Architect.
B. Provide switching of all lighting fixtures as required by the National Electrical Code and the
Seattle Energy Code.
August 16, 2018 26 51 00 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 26 51 00
City of Renton INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
Page 3 of 3
C. Provide all required occupancy sensors and daylighting controls as required by the Seattle
Energy Code.
3.3 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide 10% spare diffusers of each type used, packaged and marked to identify fixture type.
B. Provide 10% spare batteries for exit and emergency lighting fixtures.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
August 16, 2018 26 51 00 -3
Sign Shop Expansion 26 56 00
City of Renton SECTION EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 26 5100 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES FOR CITY OF RENTON
CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Fixtures furnished under this Division shall be complete with all necessary trim and mounting
hardware, and installed per manufacturer's instruction.
B. Furnish and install complete and operating exterior lighting system complete with wiring,
controls lighting fixtures, supports and lamps. Installation shall be in conformance with the
requirements of the Illuminating Engineering Society, the 2017 National Electrical Code and
the 2015 City of Seattle Energy Code.
C. All lighting equipment and fixtures shall bear the UL label and be listed for wet or damp
location as required.
D. Provide exterior lighting controls with manual override.
E. Provide exterior lighting along building perimeter as indicated on drawings. Coordinate
locations of all fixtures with Architect. Indicate final locations of all lighting fixtures with fixture
type, wiring and controls on As-Built drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished in accordance with the Lighting Fixture Schedule or
subsequently approved substitutions. All lighting fixtures, accessories and lamps shown on
the fixture schedules shall be furnished unless specifically noted.
B. All fixtures to be factory pre-wired. Fixture supports shall be as require by the fixture
manufacturer. Provide extra blocking or bracing for special fixtures or location as required.
C. LED fixtures to be designed for exterior locations, high power factor type and produce 100%
rated lamp lumen output.
D. Building to have LED wall brackets as indicated on drawings.
E. Exterior lighting controls to consist of photoelectric cell, astrodial time switch and contactors.
Indicate lighting controls on As-Built drawings. Intermatic or prior approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixtures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using standard supports for outlets and fixtures.
B. Coordinate mounting heights for all wall mounted fixtures with Architect prior to rough-in.
C. Installed lighting illumination levels to be in conformance with the recommendations of the
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES), NEC and Building Code. Submit lighting design levels
with photometrics for maintained footcandles in all exterior areas.
August 1, 2018 26 56 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 26 56 00
City of Renton SECTION EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
Page 2 of 2
D. Exterior lighting to be designed and installed to prevent light pollution to neighboring
properties.
END OF SECTION 26 56 00
August 1, 2018 26 56 00 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 27 00 00
City of Renton TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 27 0000 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide conduits, outlet boxes, pull boxes and terminal boards for a complete interior
telephone/data wiring system infrastructure.
B. Conform to the requirements of Division 00 and 01, including the General Conditions, and
Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
C. Install raceways and boxes for telephone/data wiring and for fiber optic cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. IT system installer shall provide individual Category 6 cable from TTB/ITB to each telephone
and data outlet. Cables shall be 100 ohm, unshielded 4 twisted pair, 22 gauge, solid copper,
insulated, color coded conductors with overall PVC jacket meeting the requirements of
EIA/TIA-568-1991 and Category 5 of EIA/TIA Technical Systems Bulletin PN-2841.
B. At each outlet box, IT system installer shall provide a minimum of (2) data jacks. At desk
locations, provide a minimum of (2) data jacks and (1) voice jack. Number adjacent to symbol
on drawings indicates the number of data jacks required. All jacks to be RJ-45 jacks.
Coordinate jack arrangements with Owner.
C. For all areas, provide 1- 3/4"conduit to TTB for each telephone outlet and each data outlet.
Contractor may run up to three outlets per homerun, increasing conduit size by 1/4"for each
additional outlet. Do not exceed maximum conduit fill of 40% conduit capacity per EIT/TIA-
569.
D. Provide (2) 3/4"conduits to video wall in large office as directed by Architect.
D. Provide telephone/data RJ-45 jacks in floor outlet boxes as indicated on drawings.
E. Terminal strips shall be of the size and style conforming to Century Link Communications
Standards.
F. Device trim plates to match wiring device trim plates. See Section 262726.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Included shall be the notification of Century Link Communications that new outlets are being
installed and coordination regarding installation.
B. Run telephone and data conduits to TTB/ITB. Provide conduits, sleeves and all raceways as
required. Cables above accessible ceilings may be run exposed and supported by j-hooks.
Terminate cables as directed by Owner's IT Representative. Contractor to provide a
August 1, 2018 27 00 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 27 00 00
City of Renton TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEM
Page 2 of 2
continuous uninterrupted conduit path from each outlet to the nearest terminal board.
C. Verify exact locations of devices and all conduit routing with Architect prior to installation.
D. Label all telephone/data cables as directed by Owner's IT system installer. Coordinate
installation with Owner.
E. All telephone handsets, switching equipment, IT racks, servers, cables, devices and trim
plates and connections to be provided by Owner's Telephone/ IT system installer. Fully
coordinate all installation requirements with Owner prior to installation.
F. All telephone and data wiring shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner. Bundle cables
and secure with nylon wire ties.
G. Conduit bends for IT cables shall be minimum 6 times the internal radius. Conduit bends for
fiber optic cables shall be minimum 10 times the internal radius. Install conduits per ITA/EIA
569.
H. All wiring to be concealed and installed in conduit where required by code. Maximum
horizontal cable run shall not exceed 300 feet from mechanical termination to the device
plate.
END OF SECTION 27 00 00
August 1, 2018 27 00 00 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 27 05 23
City of Renton CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 27 05 23 CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide conduits, outlet boxes, pull boxes and terminal boards for a complete interior CATV
wiring system infrastructure.
B. Conform to the requirements of Division 00 and 01, including the General Conditions, and
Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. CATV system installer shall provide individual RG6 coaxial cable from CATV terminal to each
video outlet.
B. At each outlet box, CATV system installer shall provide a coaxial jack. Coordinate jack
arrangements with Owner.
C. For all areas, provide (1 ) 3/4"conduit to CATV terminal for each video outlet. Contractor may
run up to three cables per homerun, increasing conduit size by 1/4"for each additional outlet.
Do not exceed maximum conduit fill of 40%conduit capacity.
D. Splitters shall be of the size and style conforming to Comcast Communications Standards.
E. Device trim plates to match wiring device trim plates. See Section 262726.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Included shall be the notification of Comcast Communications that new outlets are being
installed and coordination regarding installation.
B. Run CATV conduits to CATV terminal. Provide conduits, sleeves and all raceways as
required. Cables above accessible ceilings may be run exposed and supported by j-hooks.
Terminate cables as directed by Owner's Representative. Contractor to provide a continuous
uninterrupted conduit path from each outlet to the nearest terminal board.
C. Verify exact locations of devices and all conduit routing with Architect prior to installation.
D. Label all video cables as directed by Owner's CATV system installer. Coordinate installation
with Owner.
E. All splitters, line amplifiers, cables, fittings, devices and trim plates and connections to be
provided by Owner's CATV system installer. Fully coordinate all installation requirements with
Owner prior to installation.
August 1, 2018 27 05 23 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 27 05 23
City of Renton CATV RACEWAY SYSTEM
Page 2 of 2
F. All CATV wiring shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner. Bundle cables and secure
with nylon wire ties.
G. Conduit bends for video cables shall be minimum 6 times the internal radius.
H. All wiring to be concealed and installed in conduit where required by code. Maximum
horizontal cable run shall not exceed 300 feet from mechanical termination to the device
plate.
END OF SECTION 27 05 23
August 1, 2018 27 05 23 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 27 53 19
City of Renton ANTENNA RACEWAY SYSTEM
Page 1 of 2
DOCUMENT 27 53 19 ANTENNA RACEWAY SYSTEM FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Relocate existing radio antenna as indicated on drawings.
B. Provide conduits, elbows and pull boxes for a complete radio antenna system wiring system
infrastructure.
C. Conform to the requirements of Division 00 and 01, including the General Conditions, and
Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Antenna system installer shall provide all antenna cables and terminations.
B. Antenna conduits to run from base of antenna to the Server Room located in the Mezzanine
Server Room under Bid Alternate #2. In the event Bid Alternate#2 is not accepted, antenna
conduits to terminate at the existing antenna head-end cabinet located on the main level.
C. Conduits for antenna cables to be ENT or PVC Schedule 80. See Section 26 05 33.
D. Antenna relocation to be coordinated with Owner and Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor to provide all required mounting hardware, antenna base with swivel joints to allow
lowering of antenna mast and all required bracing per Code.
B. Terminate conduits above concrete slab with bell ends. Cap conduits to avoid the entrance of
debris.
C. Conduits shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner. Run conduits parallel to building
lines.
G. Conduit bends for video cables shall be minimum 6 times the internal radius.
H. Provide pull string in all conduits for cable pulling by antenna Installer.
I. Remove exposed antenna wiring and conduits at existing antenna location. Abandon empty
conduits below grade.
END OF SECTION 27 53 19
August 1, 2018 27 53 19 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 28 13 00
City of Renton ENTRY ACCESS/SECURITY SYSTEM
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 28 1300 ENTRY ACCESS / SECURITY SYSTEM FOR THE
CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Extend existing Entry Access/Security System to cover exterior doors in new addition.
B. Provide rough-in including conduits, outlet boxes, pull boxes, and raceways for a complete
entry access/security system. Owner's security system installer to provide all entry
access/security equipment, wiring, cabling,jacks, and connections.
C. Conform to the requirements of Division 00 and 01, including the General Conditions, and
Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
D. CCTV cameras and related equipment to be installed by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Security System installer shall provide all wiring from security terminal to each security system
outlet. See drawings for locations.
B. All wiring to be in conduit, '/2' (minimum). Wiring above suspended ceilings may run exposed.
Support with J-hooks, 10' OC.
C. Entry access/security system equipment shall match existing system equipment and be fully
integrated into existing security system. Existing system control panel by Ademco.
D. Security system horns shall be projector type, beige. Bells to be 6", beige. Match existing.
Provide required mounting brackets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Run security/entry access conduits to existing terminal in electrical room. Provide conduits,
sleeves, boxes and all wiring as required. Cables above accessible ceilings may be run
exposed and supported by j-hooks. Terminate cables as directed by Owner's Representative.
B. Provide security system bells in interior spaces as indicated on drawings. Verify exact
locations of devices and all conduit routing with Architect prior to installation.
C. Label all cables as directed by Owner. Final connections between system equipment and the
wiring system shall be made under the direct supervision of a representative of the Owner
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. All wiring shall be run in a neat and workmanlike manner. Bundle cables and secure with
nylon wire ties.
E. Remove entry access/security system devices and wiring where no longer required.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
August 1, 2018 28 13 00 - 1
Sign Shop Expansion 28 31 00
City of Renton FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
Page 1 of 3
Document 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM FOR
THE CITY OF RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Extend fire alarm system into new spaces as indicated on drawings. Provide a code
approved, properly operating fire alarm and detection system complete to include all required
wiring, boxes, conduits, equipment, devices and interconnection with other systems.
B. Existing system is a multi-zone, Class B, electrically supervised, non-coded type utilizing
individually addressable manual pull stations, horns/strobes, mini-horns/strobes, smoke
detectors, heat detectors, control panel with annunciator, remote annunciator and battery
back-up.
C. Connect to duct detectors, smoke dampers and devices as required. Coordinate with Division
23.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing al drawings required to secure approval from the
Renton Fire Department. All Fire Alarm System devices and wiring shall be shown on as-built
drawings.
E. Fire Alarm System shall comply with the current provisions of the following standards:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
4. FM Factory Mutual
5. Washington State Uniform Fire Code
6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
7. All requirements and regulations of the Renton Fire Department
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire alarm system to be installed by a factory trained and certified technician with no less than
five (5) years active experience installing similar systems. Manufacturer shall maintain factory
trained and certified personnel within 50 miles of the project site available for 24 hour
maintenance and service to fire alarm system.
B. All equipment shall match existing system. Existing system is Notifier Series 4800.
C. Contractor shall coordinate with respective trades in order that a complete and operational fire
alarm system
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Alarm condition. Operation of any alarm initiating device shall activate the following effects,
and, unless specified otherwise, shall maintain them continuously until all alarm initiating
devices are restored to the normal condition:
1. Activate audible and visual alarm signals until alarm signals are reset to non-alarm
condition. Alarms to provide minimum 92 dB or 15 dB above ambient sound level in all areas
of the building.
2. Remove motors of air handling equipment , 2,000 cfm or more capacity, from their power
source.
3. De-energize smoke damper hold-open devices and cause smoke dampers to close
automatically.
4. Turn on exterior lighting and common area lighting fixtures via relays as indicated on
drawings.
August 1, 2018 281�V�9/��
Sign Shop Expansion 28 31 00
City of Renton FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
Page 2 of 3
B. Alarm Initiation: General alarm condition to be caused by any one of the following
circumstances:
1. Activation of any manual pull station.
2. Activation of any system smoke or heat detector.
3. Control panel to indicate zone of originating alarm device.
C. Trouble Alarm Initiation: A distinct trouble alarm to sound and a LED light at control panel and
remote annunciator shall illuminate upon the activation of the following conditions:
1. Any malfunction of any fire detector device. System to visually annunciate location of
faulty device.
2. Any circuit short or open condition. Excessive noise condition on the signaling line circuit.
3. Activation of alarm silencing switch.
Activation of any trouble condition shall not prevent the resounding of the control panel
audible devices in the event of a subsequent trouble condition in other circuits. When the
trouble is corrected the system shall not require manual restoration.
D. Control Panel: Program new detectors such that each space is assigned to a separate zone.
Each zone shall have separate supervised zone trouble and zone alarm indication. Each
device to be set to a unique addressible code. Manual input to be through the use of a keypad
or keyboard.
E. The receipt of an alarm shall be indicated by zone and type of alarm until acknowledged. In
the event subsequent new alarms are received, they shall be stored in sequence and
automatically displayed after acknowledgment of the previous alarm. When the alarm initiating
device circuit is restored to normal, indication shall be given that the alarm zone can be reset.
F. Remote Annunciator is existing. Revise annunciator to indicate new zones as required.
1.4 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
A. Equipment manufacturer shall guarantee all equipment and devices and the proper operation
of this system. Provide a five (5) year warranty against faulty materials or workmanship.
During the first year, provide two inspections of the system (at 5th and 11th month) by the
manufacturer's representative. These inspections shall consist of a complete operational
testing of the system plus four hours training for on-site personnel.
B. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and
electrical defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manual Pull Stations to be installed in flush steel outlet boxes. Stations to be single action
type, steel with red finish with raised letter operating instructions of contrasting color.
B. Manual pull stations to be fitted with self contained, 9V battery operated, clear, tamperproof,
polycarbonate shield with integral horn. Horn to produce 95dB. STI Stopper II # STI-1100.
C. Automatic Smoke Detectors to be photo-electric type and shall incorporate a solid state
voltage regulator which can maintain detection sensitivity over an input voltage range of 17-
25.4 volts DC. Detectors to be shielded against electro-magnetic interferences.
D. Mini-horns/strobes shall be beige in color and shall produce 90 dB output at 10'-0". Strobe to
produce 110 candela in each bedroom and living room, 75 candela in toilet rooms.
E. Speaker horns/strobes shall be 24 VDC polarized, modular design, mounted in flush steel
August 1, 2018 28 31 00 -2
Sign Shop Expansion 28 31 00
City of Renton FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
Page 3 of 3
outlet boxes, steel housing, red color. Where units are to be surface mounted Units to provide
92 dB in all areas of building and installed in accordance to codes. Strobes to be 75 candela.
Exterior horn/strobe to be in weatherproof housing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All exposed, visible devices shall be located as approved by both the Fire Marshall and
Architect. Contractor's shop drawings shall locate all exposed, visible devices, for approval by
Architect. Architect to be advised of any changes required by Fire Marshall prior to installation.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions all
wiring, conduit and fixture boxes required. All wiring shall meet the requirements of the
National Electrical Code and the City of Renton Electrical Code.
C. Contractor to use color coding for all wiring.
D. Smoke detectors shall not be mounted within four (4) feet of an air outlet.
E. Protective covers shall not be removed from devices until Owner's acceptance of system.
F. Provide complete operation and maintenance instructions and complete as-built record
drawings.
END OF SECTION 28 31 00
August 1, 2018 28 31 00 -3
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 1 of 9
DOCUMENT 31 1000 SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Provide pre-mobilization video (on DVD) of existing site conditions.
2. Locate and document existing utilities and controls.
3. Save and protect from harm any trees, structures, features, and facilities to remain.
4. Provide temporary chain link construction fencing to secure construction site.
5. Adjust and relocate temporary chain link construction fencing per stage as necessary to
secure site.
6. Provide staging and stockpiling locations.
7. Remove and dispose of curbs, pavement, topsoil, and other items shown on plans and as
required to install new improvements.
8. Remove and dispose of utility materials from below the ground surface as required.
9. Cap and abandon utilities where not required to be removed.
10. Identify, and coordinate with the Owner's Representative and/or utility purveyor(s), the
disconnection, capping, abandonment, and/or removal of utilities as required.
11. Clear and grub areas of the site as required and designated for new construction. Remove
trees and plantings in such a manner to protect those that are to remain.
12. Salvage existing materials as specified.
13. Dispose of material from the site.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not lim-
ited to following:
1. Section 01 56 00—Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
2. Section 31 12 00— Earthwork
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Comply with Section 013400.
B. WSDOT- Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edi-
tion; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition.
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-1
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 2 of 9
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements.
B. Submit surveyor's Certificate of Insurance
C. Submit demolition procedures and operational sequence for review and acceptance by the
Owner's Representative. Include permits for transport and disposal of debris as required.
D. Prior to mobilization to the site, submit to Owner's Representative a copy of a DVD with video
recording of existing conditions of surfaces (including existing pavement, building and struc-
tures to remain), equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as
damage related to construction.
E. Prior to mobilization, submit for review a complete site access, staging, and stockpiling plan
using a copy of the basic site layout plan. Identify all areas to be used for access, staging,
and stockpiling throughout various phases of the construction sequence. Provide a legend or
key as appropriate where phasing affects location.
F. Submit Record Drawings according to Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals, identify-
ing and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical and
mechanical conditions.
1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. All site demolition materials shall become the Contractor's property unless otherwise noted in
the project documents.
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Protection of existing improvements
1. Provide, erect, and maintain fencing, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to
prevent damage to existing improvements.
2. Restore any existing on or off-site improvements damaged by this work to their original
condition, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. Restoration includes but is not limited
to landscaping, pavement, walks, structures and fences.
3. Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as
a result of site preparation and demolition work.
B. Contact all necessary utility purveyors including City of Renton, PSE, and Comcast to coordi-
nate utility cutoffs and removals. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected.
C. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice and Coordination. Site utilities shall remain
in service unless otherwise directed. Coordinate work with Division 01 requirements.
D. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air hammers and other noisy equipment. Conform to local
governing requirements regarding Noise Control.
E. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes:
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 3 of 9
1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities
for all areas of the site not under construction.
2. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
3. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed
traffic ways.
F. Verify location and elevation of existing utilities at points of connection prior to commencing
work on new utility that is to be connected to the existing utility. Coordinate with Owner's
Representative if actual conditions are at variance with plans.
G. Verify location and elevation of existing utilities sufficiently in advance of construction to allow
for coordination and mitigation of conflicts without down time or project delays.
1.7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS
A. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing, setting, and marking all line and location stakes
including offsets and general construction staking. When work requiring control is required, all
necessary related equipment and instruments shall be on site. A qualified layout engineer,
surveyor, or technical specialist shall be assigned to the Contractor Crew for this work. The
equipment and personnel must be available, at no additional cost to the City of Renton for the
purposes of verifying layout, conformance of grading, and certifying the accuracy of the work
per the contract documents.
B. The Contractor is responsible for preserving all benchmarks and stakes and is required to re-
place any stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or missing.
C. The Contractor is responsible for review of all utility purveyor and City records relating to the
existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these fa-
cilities and shall restore all utilities at Contractor's own expense. The Contractor is to notify
the Owner's Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on record docu-
ments are encountered.
D. If any discrepancies are found by the surveyor between the drawings and actual field condi-
tions, the contractor shall immediately notify the Owner's Representative.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule the required pre-construction meeting with the City of Renton and the Own-
er/Architect.
B. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local codes and safety regulations. If there are
any conflicts among referenced standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
C. Coordinate demolition work with utility companies.
D. Obtain all necessary permits.
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 4 of 9
PART 2— PRODUCTS
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin work prior to receiving Notice to Proceed from Owner.
B. Verify that site improvement removal may safely and appropriately begin.
C. Obtain required permits and permission from local governing authorities and Owner prior to
commencing work.
D. Prior to beginning site removals and clearing, meet with the Owner's Representative and re-
view demolition plan. Indicate all existing trees that will be affected by construction and coor-
dinate with Landscape Architect. Coordinate removals of landscape materials with the Own-
er's Representative and Landscape Architect.
3.2 DOCUMENTATION OF UTILITIES AND CONTROLS
A. Maintain a separate drawing to be stored on-site for identifying key utilities and controls. Iden-
tify and apply color-coded markings identifying shut-offs for domestic water, irrigation water,
power, and gas. Identify sanitary sewerage, stormwater discharge, gas, fiber optics, and tele-
phone (all as appropriate) lines, which are to be maintained in service during the work. Color-
code emergency contact information for each utility directly on the drawing.
B. Project Record Documents, identify and accurately locate all capped utilities, utilities to be
abandoned in place and other subsurface piping, structural, electrical and mechanical exist-
ing improvement to remain.
3.3 GENERAL
A. Install perimeter Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (TESC) measures and flag or
fence, as shown on plans, all clearing limits prior to clearing or grubbing of the site.
B. The Contractor shall implement and employ means and methods necessary to execute site
demolition work in accordance with the Contract requirements and project schedule.
C. The contractor shall schedule site demolition work to minimize existing soil disturbances. The
Contractor's ability to perform site demolition work with the existing moisture sensitive soils
may be impossible during different periods of the work and may require the contractor to
cease operations until some soil healing occurs. Inactive workdays or wet weather days shall
be expected and planned for in the Contractor's schedule and bid without extra cost to the
Owner, except in abnormal wet weather cases. Abnormal wet weather cases shall be in ac-
cordance with the General Conditions. Time delays caused by the inability to perform work in
existing saturated soils shall not be a basis for additional money or time claims.
D. Prior to commencing site demolition and clearing, locate and flag all limits. Save and protect
all areas to outside limits or existing improvements to remain. Contractor shall repair to equal
or better condition areas outside limits impacted by Contractor's work. Prior to site clearing
and demolition, contact utility location service and have all underground utilities on the site
and adjacent right of ways clearly marked. Locate, flag, and protect existing underground
utilities to remain.
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 5 of 9
E. Approximate locations of existing utilities have been obtained from available records and are
shown for convenience. The contractor shall be responsible for verification of the locations
shown and for discovery of possible additional utilities not shown so as to avoid damage or
disturbance. The underground utility location service shall be contacted for field location prior
to any construction. The Owner shall be contacted if a utility conflict exists.
F. Protect exposed soils from erosion by covering with straw mulch or plastic. Prevent disturb-
ance from vehicular traffic. Coordinate with TESC requirements.
G. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during con-
struction.
H. The Contractor shall provide temporary barricades, barriers, guard railing, shoring etc as
necessary to protect personnel, structures, and utilities to remain intact during the operation
of this contract. Conduct work in such a way to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, struc-
tures, other facilities and injury to persons. The Contractor shall clean adjacent structures and
improvements of dust, dirt or debris caused by demolition and clearing operations. Any dam-
age to existing facilities to remain or to improvements on adjacent properties shall be re-
paired, replaced and/or reconstructed by the Contractor at their expense to its original condi-
tion or better as directed by the Owner's Representative.
I. Conduct site demolition and clearing in such a way to ensure minimum interference with
roads and other adjacent properties. Do not close or obstruct streets or other occupied or
used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 CLEARING
A. Specifically locate and establish clearing limits by physical means as required by the docu-
ments. The chain-link security fence shall also be allowed to establish the clearing limits.
B. Clear areas of the site as required and designated for new construction. Remove trees and
plantings in such a manner to protect those that are to remain. Cut and remove entire stumps
of trees designated to be removed. Completely remove all roots, stumps, vegetation and all
other organic debris within the clearing limits as required for new construction and as indicat-
ed on the documents.
C. Save and protect trees indicated on plans to remain. Protect all off-site trees along adjacent
roadways and on surrounding properties.
D. Remove growth and underbrush within the clearing limits as required for new construction
and as indicated. Perform removal operations in a manner to protect existing property and
trees and plants to remain.
E. Do not drive heavy equipment outside of clearing limits to perform any clearing or tree re-
moval. Replace all fencing and TESC features damaged by logging at no additional cost to
the Owner.
F. Dispose of clearing debris off site in a legal manner. Remove all debris and litter found on-
site.
3.5 GRUBBING
A. Grub or otherwise prepare areas where clearing has occurred to receive construction or other
improvements.
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 6 of 9
B. Excavate and remove all stumps to depth as necessary (assume 3 feet for bidding purposes)
to remove all organic material and roots associated with the stumps.
C. Excavate and remove roots larger than 1 inch in diameter, rocks, boulders and other unsuita-
ble materials.
D. Strip site to an average depth of 6 inches, with greater depth as required for stump and root
removal listed above.
E. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations as indicated for the respective
areas of work in these specifications. Compact to the appropriate level indicated per Section
31 1200.
3.6 DRAINAGE AND GROUNDWATER
A. Control all surface and sub-surface water in order to prevent damage to the project site and
adjacent properties. Provide all means necessary to immediately resolve surface water
drainage problems generated on the construction site. Protect disturbed areas from inclement
weather and surface runoff during construction process to provide a suitable working platform
for all phases of the construction. Provide proper grading to prevent standing water.
B. Intercept and route upstream stormwater around the project site.
C. Keep natural drainage ways open for drainage at all times. Provide erosion control and
stormwater turbidity control facilities as required according to the Plan, Section 01 56 00, and
per the City inspector to prevent sediment transport and turbid stormwater discharge either
downstream or offsite. TESC facilities shall be installed prior to clearing and demolition. At no
time shall more than one foot of sediment be allowed to accumulate within a catch basin,
ditch, or swale. All catch basins and conveyance ditches shall be cleaned prior to paving.
Mud/sediment build-up shall be removed, and the cleaning operation shall not flush sedi-
ment-laden water into the downstream system.
D. Keep open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition work free of standing water. All
water shall be discharged in a stabilized manner to the site TESC system.
E. Keep all trenches, holes and pits free of water during clearing, grubbing, excavation, con-
struction of structures and installation of drains. Control surface run-off in order to prevent
collection of water in areas not indicated to hold run-off.
F. Prior to clearing and demolition, in the event dewatering is required, submit to the Owner's
Representative a statement of the method, installation, and details of the dewatering systems
in accordance with Division 1. Provide, install, and operate all necessary equipment to keep
excavations free from water during construction. Dewater and dispose of the water in order to
not cause damage to public/private property or to cause a nuisance/menace to the public.
The Contractor shall have at all times sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good
working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outages. Have available, at
all times, competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment.
G. Control ground water to prevent softening of the base of the excavation or formation of quick
conditions or boils during excavation. Design and operate dewatering systems in order to
prevent removal of natural soils and to eliminate turbidity of the discharge water.
3.7 SITE REMOVALS GENERAL
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 7 of 9
A. Remove and dispose of site walls and foundations, fences, site furnishings, stairs and foun-
dations, landscaping, topsoil, piping, and other obstructions in areas to be cleared. Materials
not designated for salvage shall be broken up, loaded, and legally disposed of by the Con-
tractor. Care shall be taken removing items to ensure that damage does not occur to the ex-
isting trees and improvements which are to remain in place. All removals shall be accom-
plished by making a neat vertical saw cut at the limits of removal. All concrete walk removals
shall be sawcut at the next adjacent joint. Adjacent materials designated to remain that are
damaged by the Contractor during the work shall be replaced at no additional cost to the En-
gineer.
B. In the event the Contractor encounters utility lines not shown on the site plan or otherwise in-
dicated to be saved, removed, or abandoned, the location of such lines shall be marked in
the field and the Engineer notified
C. Sprinkle excavated material and access roads as necessary to limit dust to the lowest practi-
cable level. Do not use water to such an extent as to cause flooding, contaminated runoff, or
icing.
D. Explosive blasting is forbidden.
3.8 PAVEMENT DEMOLITION
A. Raze, remove, and dispose of curb, concrete and asphalt pavements and appurtenances,
concrete walls, concrete plaza and patios, concrete site stairs, and other Pavement removals
adjacent to existing pavement to remain shall be accomplished by making a neat vertical
sawcut at the limits of removal for asphalt and to the nearest joint on concrete. All concrete
walk removals shall be sawcut at the next adjacent joint. Adjacent pavement materials desig-
nated to remain that are damaged by the Contractor during the work shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.9 UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Contractor shall coordinate with applicable utility owners, purveyors and Owner's Repre-
sentative to provide timely completion of utility removal work to be done by others. Installation
of temporary utilities may be required to accomplish the required work and shall be consid-
ered incidental to the work.
B. Locate all existing underground and above ground utilities in area of work. Save, support and
protect utilities to remain. All utility piping and structures not designated for removal are to
remain until new services are tested and in operation and shall be protected during construc-
tion unless indicated otherwise. Damage to existing utilities which are to remain shall be re-
paired immediately at the Contractor's expense. In the event the Contractor encounters utility
lines not shown on the site plan or otherwise indicated to be saved, removed, or abandoned,
the location of such lines shall be marked in the field and the Owner's Representative noti-
fied.
C. Locate, identify, disconnect, remove and dispose of utilities to be shown to be demolished.
Arrange with utility owners and purveyors to shut off indicated utilities. Disconnect and/or re-
move existing utilities and/or structures as shown on plans and any additional utilities found in
the construction area that conflict with improvements as part of this work.
D. Asbestos piping: This project may contain asbestos cement utility piping and could be en-
countered during the demolition work. The existing asbestos cement piping shall be demol-
ished or abandoned in place as necessary and in accordance with the local, State and feder-
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 8 of 9
al regulations.
E. Completely remove all existing utility piping and structures within the building and structure
footprints unless otherwise noted.
F. Existing site irrigation facilities may be present on site. The many locations of the existing irri-
gation facilities are unknown. The existing irrigation system demolition work shall include but
is not limited to demolishing the irrigation control valves and boxes shown on the plans and
including the removal of underground piping, wiring and heads located upstream and down-
stream of the control valve such that no piping or wiring in the work are remaining. Where the
contractor finds existing irrigation system within the work area not designated to remain, the
contractor shall coordinate with the Landscape architect for removal. It shall be anticipated
that the contractor will trace and remove all piping and wiring such that no further system fa-
cilities are remaining. Capping and abandoning existing irrigation system is not allowed. Re-
moval and demolition of the existing irrigation system work shall be incidental to the site
demolition.
3.10 FILLING DEPRESSIONS
A. Fill depressions caused by clearing, grubbing, demolition and utility removal operations shall
be accordance with Section 31 12 00 and shall meet all criteria specified for moisture and
compaction with respect to the future conditions designated for that area. The Contractor is
cautioned to the anticipated use of common backfill materials due to their moisture sensitivity.
The contractor is responsible and shall install satisfactory soil materials to accomplish the
work. The demolition excavation and backfill shall be incidental to the Site Demolition work.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 01 72 00 Construction Waste Management.
B. All site demolition materials shall become the Contractor's property unless otherwise noted in
the project documents.
C. The refuse resulting from site preparation shall be disposed of by the Contractor in a manner
consistent with all government regulations. In no case shall refuse material be left on the pro-
ject site, shoved onto abutting private properties, or be buried in embankments or trenches
on the project site. Debris shall not be deposited in any stream or body of water, or in any
public right-of-way or upon any private property except by written consent of the private prop-
erty owner. On-site burning is not allowed. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any de-
bris resulting from work of this Section.
D. Non-salvageable or non-recyclable demolition, contaminated soils, and creosote debris shall
be transported to an approved disposal facility that meets all regulatory requirements for that
demolition debris.
E. The Contractor has the option to secure its own demolition debris, asphalt, concrete, and
creosote materials disposal or recycle site(s) provided it has acquired all permits and approv-
als necessary from governing agencies and the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative copies of trip tickets and receiver
tickets for all material transported to approved landfills and/or recyclers to ensure disposal at
proper facilities. Trip tickets will not be used to quantify material.
G. Leave the project area in a neat and orderly condition to meet the approval of the Own-
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 31 10 00
City of Renton SITE PREPARATION
Page 9 of 9
er/Owner's Representative.
3.12 SECURITY FENCING
A. See section 01 50 00.
3.13 REMOVAL OF SECURITY FENCING
A. Remove Security Fencing within 2 weeks of establishment of the Contract Work as Substan-
tially Complete.
3.14 PROTECTION OF STOCKPILES
A. Protect stockpile areas from release of sediment. Cover stockpiles at all times while not in
use to keep stored material dry. Surround materials stockpiled on pavement by two rows of
straw bales or compost filter sock with joints staggered.
August 1, 2018 31 10 00-9
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 1 of 12
DOCUMENT 31 1200 EARTHWORK
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Accomplishing indicated and required excavation, filling, compaction, and rough grading as
required for building pads, concrete walkways, asphalt patching, and the construction of
other miscellaneous improvements.
2. Protection and conditioning of on-site materials.
3. Removing and disposing of materials that are unsuitable for reuse from the site.
4. Importing any additional required materials.
5. Coordinating earthwork operations with the other work of the Project.
B. Work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal
Construction, latest edition, Washington State Department of Transportation/APWA.
C. Related sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 01 56 00—TESC
2. Section 31 10 00—Site Preparation
3. Section 31 41 33—Trench Safety
4. Section 32 12 16—Asphalt Paving
5. Section 32 13 13—Concrete Paving
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the Sand Equivalent
Test.
B. ASTM D1556-90 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
C. ASTM C136 Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate.
D. ASTM D1557-91 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modi-
fied Effort(56,000 ft-Ib/cu ft).
E. ASTM D2922-91 Standard Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
F. WSDOT- Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edi-
tion; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-1
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 2 of 12
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 34 00.
B. Samples:
1. Submit sieve analysis of each type of material from an independent testing agency.
Review and acceptance of a sieve analysis does not constitute approval of the actual
product, which may be subject to additional testing at any time.
C. WSDOT pit certifications for each pit.
D. Health and Safety Plan - Prepare and submit a Worker Health and Safety Plan. Although cer-
tain requirements are identified here and elsewhere in these specifications, it is the sole re-
sponsibility of the Contractor to provide a safe work environment and adequate protection to
individuals under their employ. Maintain a copy of the Health and Safety Plan in a conspicu-
ous location on the Job Site and reinforce the requirements of the document at weekly Job
Site Safety Meetings.
E. Safety Products- Submit for the Engineer's approval manufacturer's product data for each
worker safety product specified.
F. Provide current calibration certificates for each piece of inechanical monitoring equipment to
be used in the work. Perform field testing of equipment for the Engineer's approval prior to
commencing excavation.
1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Protection of existing improvements:
1. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing vegetation and improvements
not indicated for removal. Restore site improvements, including but not limited to
landscaping, pavement, walks, structures, fences and planters, damaged by this work to
their original condition, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. Restore to original
grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site
preparation and demolition work.
2. Minimize the impact to the surrounding area during construction and installation of utilities
and other improvements by using the minimum size of equipment required to perform the
work.
1.5 DEWATERING
A. Design, furnish, install, operate, maintain, and remove a dewatering system(s)to achieve
proper completion of work performed under this Contract. Meet the requirements set forth by
the City of Renton and the Minimum Standards for Construction and Maintenance of Wells,
Chapter 173-160 WAC, specified by the Department of Ecology, State of Washington.
B. Furnish, install, operate, and remove any additional machinery and equipment necessary to
keep excavations free from water during construction. Dewater and dispose of the water in
accordance with DOE standards and so as not to cause injury to public or private property, or
to cause a nuisance or a menace to the public. Maintain on site sufficient pumping equipment
and machinery in good working condition for emergencies, including power outage and flood-
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-2
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 3 of 12
ing. Have available at all times competent workers for the continuous and successful opera-
tion of the dewatering systems. Do not shut down dewatering system between shifts, on holi-
days, on weekends, or during work stoppages without written permission from the Owner's
Representative.
C. Control groundwater in a manner such that softening of the bottom of excavations or for-
mation of"quick" conditions or"boils" during excavation does not occur. Design and operate
dewatering systems so as to prevent removal of the natural soils.
D. During excavation, installation of pipelines, placement of working base, and trench backfilling,
and prior to the acceptance of the work or any portion of the work, keep excavations free of
water. Control surface runoff so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations or in
other isolated areas of the site. Design dewatering system using accepted and professional
methods of design and engineering consistent with the best modern practice. Maintain
groundwater levels at a depth of two feet below the base of excavation. Control dewatering
operations so as to not cause subsidence of adjacent structures or utilities.
E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, operation, and
maintenance of any component of the dewatering system, as well as any failure of any com-
ponent of the system for this Contract.
F. For any method of dewatering, secure the area from unauthorized access.
G. Discharge from dewatering operations must be to an approved location. Prior to initiating the
dewatering operation, review the discharge point with the City of Renton's inspector.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Stockpile materials on site within clearing limits and at approved locations. The Contractor
shall be responsible for delivery coordination, placement and protection of stockpiled materi-
al.
B. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion and/or deterioration of mate-
rials. Place stockpile or grade site surface around stockpile to prevent ponding of surface wa-
ter.
C. Remove stockpile and construction debris, restore area as indicated on plans or to pre-
existing state, leave area in a clean and neat condition.
D. Trench spoils and stockpiles shall be located at least 6 feet from edges of trenches and ex-
cavations and shall be graded such that surface water is prevented from discharging into ex-
cavations or trenches. Large stock piles from site grading should not be located within 20 feet
of utility trench excavations.
1.7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS
A. Furnish, set, and mark all line location stakes. Assign a qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or
technical specialist for this work; this person shall be on site at all times when work requiring
control is being performed, together with necessary equipment, supplies and instruments re-
lated thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available, at any time and at no addi-
tional cost to the Owner, for the purpose of verifying layout, grades, and certifying the accu-
racy of work on the site.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-3
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 4 of 12
B. Preserve benchmarks and stakes and replace stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or
missing.
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall select materials that are products of firms that are regularly engaged in
the manufacture of the specified materials.
1.9 BASE BID REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall include in the base bid all costs of achieving final grades as shown on the
Contract Documents including all excavation to suitable bearing soil, export, legal disposal,
import, placement, compaction, and protection. The existing conditions are represented by
the site plan. The Contractor accepts the provided information as existing condition upon
commencing land disturbing clearing or earthwork activities.
B. The Contractor has the option to perform, at their own expense, a topographic survey of ex-
isting conditions and submit their survey for Owner's Review and approval for use for earth-
work calculations prior to Contractor's land disturbing clearing or earthwork activities.
C. The cost of excavation and off-site disposal of material and imported fill and its placement
and compaction required to meet sub-grade elevations as defined in the Contract Documents
shall be included in the base bid amount and shall be compensated using Unit Prices except
as noted in paragraphs F, G and H below.
D. Subgrade: For the purpose of the Contractor Bid, the following shall define the required base
bid subgrade elevations after stripping:
1. Building: One (1)foot below the bottom of the floor slab.
2. Footings: One (1)foot below the bottom of the footing.
3. Paving: The elevation of bottom of paving section.
E. If the Contractor's sequencing of the Work includes stock piling and double handling of mate-
rials, it shall be included within the base bid amount and shall be at no additional cost to the
Owner.
F. The soil integrity will be influenced by weather conditions and by the Contractor's sequenc-
ing, handling and protection of the material. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to
protect the soils from wet weather conditions, and/or disturbance from construction activities.
Failure by the Contractor to adequately protect onsite soils intended for re-use shall be at no
additional cost to the Owner and will not be compensated using Unit Prices.
G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all unauthorized excavation and import and
shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. The Unit Price shall not be applied to unauthor-
ized excavation or import. Unauthorized excavations shall be backfilled with structural fill and
compacted as required.
H. Removal, disposal, and replacement of soils deemed unsuitable as a result of the Contrac-
tor's sequencing, handling and protection of the materials shall be at no additional cost to the
Owner and will not be compensated using Unit Prices.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-4
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 5 of 12
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Crew Foreman shall have a minimum of six years working experience and four years experi-
ence as foreman performing similar work.
B. All work shall comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications and City of Renton Standards.
Where in conflict the City of Renton Standards will prevail.
C. Field Quality Control Testing:
1. The Owner will engage a qualified independent Geotechnical Engineer and/or testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing including but not limited to, soil bearing
verification, fill compaction testing, and laboratory gradation and other index testing of on-
site and imported materials for compliance with these specifications.
2. If the material is found to be non-compliant with the Contract, the Contractor shall bear the
cost of testing, removal of all non-compliant materials from the project site, and
replacement of the materials with materials meeting the requirements of the Contract.
D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the accuracy of all survey information provid-
ed by the Owner prior to commencing excavations or filling operations. Commencement of
these operations constitutes acceptance of the survey information as appropriate to meet the
intent of the Contract.
E. Grading Tolerance: Finished grade will match contours and elevation shown will be within
1/10 foot.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Approval of Fill Material: All material which is proposed to be used as fill, bedding or backfill
shall be graded and tested for moisture content and compactability. Gradation and test re-
sults shall be submitted for review and acceptance by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer
prior to placement of fill. Materials shall be checked during the course of importation to en-
sure they continue to meet the Specifications.
B. Material used in filling shall be appropriate to the site and the intended for use in that portion
of the site.
C. Onsite soil shall not be anticipated for use as structural fill.
D. Topsoil shall not be used as a fill material.
E. No frozen or thawing material shall be used as fill.
F. Controlled Density Fill (CDF, aka flowable fill):
1. Shall be a mixture of Portland Cement, admixture (optional), FlyAsh, aggregates and
water. It shall be proportioned to provide a non-segregating, free flowing, self-consolidating
and excavatable material that will result in a non-settling fill which has measurable
unconfined compressive strength.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-5
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 6 of 12
2. Materials testing shall be with unconfined compressive test cylinders. Test data may be
either laboratory trail batch test data or field test data of the same mix within the previous 6
months. Alternate mix designs may be required at the Engineer's discretion. The
unconfined compressive strength at 28 days shall be a minimum of 50 psi and a maximum
of 300 psi. Material shall be a sand/grout slurry proportioned to be hand-excavatable after
long term strength gain.
3. Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Standard
Specifications:
Portland Cement 9-01
Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1(2)
Admixture for Concrete 9-23.6
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25
4. Controlled density fill shall meet the following requirements:
Ingredients Amount per CY
Portland Cement 50 Ib.
Aggregates Class I or 2 3300 Ib.
Air Entrainment Admixture Per Manufacturer's recommendations
Fly Ash Class F 300 Ib.
Water 300 Ib. (maximum)
5. The material consistency shall be flowable (approx. slump 3-10 inches). If requested by
the Contractor, the proportions may be adjusted with the approval of the Owner's
Representative.
G. Crushed Surfacing Top and Base Course shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-
03.9(3), except that the percent by weight passing the U.S. No, 200 sieve shall not exceed 5
percent and shall have a minimum of two mechanically fractured surfaces.
H. Common Borrow: Common Borrow material shall consist of on-site excavated soils free of
organic and deleterious or objectionable material and of such size and gradation that the
specified compaction can be readily attained. Maximum particle size shall not exceed 6-
inches. The moisture of Common Borrow material at the time of placement shall be within a
range of two percent of the optimum moisture content for compaction. If on-site soils are
generated at a moisture content above optimum for compaction, they shall be moisture condi-
tioned before being considered for re-use. Common Borrow shall at meet the requirements
of WSDOT Section 9-03.14(3) except that the percent by weight passing the U.S. 200 sieve
shall be less than 35 percent unless authorized for use by Owner's Representative. Common
Borrow shall not be used for earthwork activities during periods of wet weather.
I. Gravel Borrow: per WSDOT Section 9-03.14(1)except that the percent by weight passing the
U.S. No, 200 sieve shall not exceed 5 percent.
J. Structural Fill:
1. All fill placed under footings, slab on grade floor, roadways, sidewalks, walkways, behind
walls, and all other paved areas, including utility trench back fill beneath these areas shall
be "structural fill" unless otherwise authorized by Owner's Representative.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-6
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 7 of 12
2. Imported structural fill shall be used under the building slab, building footings and within
ten (10)feet of the building footprint
3. Structural fill:
a. During the dry season (April 15-October 15)shall be shall be an imported well-graded
sand and gravel material free of organic material, debris and other deleterious materi-
al, meeting the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.14(1),
Gravel Borrow modified such that 100 percent passes the 1-1/2 inch sieve.
b. During the rainy season (October 16-April 14), structural fill shall be washed crushed
rock or select granular fill consisting of well-graded sand and gravel or crushed rock
free of organic material, debris and other deleterious material meeting the require-
ments of WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.9 Aggregate for ballast or
crushed surfacing or 9-03.14 Gravel Borrow, both with a maximum particle size of 6-
inches and less than 5 percent passing the U.S. Standard No.200 sieve.
4. On site material specified herein as Common Borrow may not be used as structural fill
except as approved by Geotechnical Engineer but may be considered for use in
landscaped areas.
5. The Contractor shall use best management practices to protect soils during construction
and shall be familiar with wet weather and winter soil work.
K. Base Sand: Base Sand shall be composed of no less than 99.7% mineral aggregates by dry
weight(as measured by organic burn test) meeting the following particle analysis gradation:
Screen Size %Passinp
'/4" 100
#4 90-100
#10 80-90
#20 60-80
#30 40-60
#60 <10
#100 <5
#200 <2
Base Sand compacted to 85%of maximum dry density as measured by the Modified Proctor
test(ASTM D1557)shall exhibit an infiltration rate of a minimum of 9 inches per hour.
2.2 SAFETY, MONITORING,AND RESPONSE EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide barricades, safety guards, temporary fencing, signage and/or
other methods to secure trenches, open excavations, and other unsafe conditions resulting
from this construction. Undertake work in full compliance with all applicable regulatory re-
quirements.
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All earthwork shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 require-
ments for Excavation, Trenching and Shoring.
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-7
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 8 of 12
B. The Contractor shall expect to perform site earthwork during the spring, summer, fall, and
winter months. The Contractor shall not assume that the on-site soils are suitable for re-use
during wet weather conditions. The Contractor shall implement and employ means and
methods necessary to execute earthwork in accordance with the Contract requirements and
project schedule. The Contractor shall execute earthwork to minimize existing soil disturb-
ances. Inactive workdays or wet weather days shall be expected and planned for in the Con-
tractor's schedule and bid without extra cost to the Owner, except in abnormal wet weather
cases. Abnormal wet weather cases shall be in accordance with the General Conditions.
Time delays caused by the inability to perform work in existing saturated soils shall not be a
basis for additional money or time claims.
C. Permits:
1. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining permits required for work within the right of
way.
3.2 SAFETY MONITORING AND RESPONSE
A. Maintain conformance to the Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.
3.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Utilities:
1. The Contractor shall protect from damage private and public utilities in accordance with
WSDOT Section 1-07.17. Contractor shall, before excavation begins, call the Utilities
Underground Location Center 1-800-424-5555. Contractor shall pay for location of existing
utilities.
2. The Contractor shall, at their own expense, make excavations and borings ahead of the
work, as necessary, to determine the exact location of utilities and underground structures.
3. It is understood that there will be interfering utilities, service laterals and other underground
pipes, drains, or structures encountered that are not shown or areas shown incorrectly on
the plans or have not been previously discovered in the field. Contractor agrees this is a
normal and usual occurrence in the construction of underground improvements.
Furthermore, Contractor understands and agrees that work in some cases must be done in
close proximity to said utilities and underground pipes, drains, and structures not shown or
shown incorrectly on the plans which may require a change in operations and may cause
sloughing of the trench, additional traffic control, additional pavement and backfill costs
and time. The Contractor agrees that these occurrences are usual and ordinary, and are
reflected in the Bid and plan of operation.
B. Pavement: The Contractor shall protect from damage all pavement or paved areas including
curbs intended to remain. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement if damage occurs
to pavement or curbs to remain.
1. Access Streets and Roadways: Provide wheel cleaning stations per Section 01 56 00.
2. Repair and/or replacement of damaged facilities will be accomplished at the Contractor's
expense.
3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-8
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 9 of 12
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect all work in progress from damage due to ex-
tremes of cold, moisture, or drying, or mechanical damage from equipment traffic or foot traf-
fic. Alert the Owner's Representative to the presence or likelihood of conditions that may ad-
versely affect the quality of the work, the physical structure of soils, or transport of site soils
off-site.
B. Do not work frozen soils.
C. Protect soils from excessive moisture. See Geotechnical Report recommendations. During
periods of prolonged precipitation, take aggressive steps to avoid over-saturation, erosion, or
homogenization of soils by covering with protective plastic sheeting, collection and controlled
dewatering, detention for sediment removal, and not disturbing wet soils. It shall be the Con-
tractor's sole responsibility to manage soils that are too wet or too dry for use.
D. Protect foundation subgrades as necessary from foot and equipment traffic and ponding of
water during wet weather conditions. Typical measures of protection include compacted
crushed rock or a lean-mix concrete mat placed over a properly prepared subgrade. Contrac-
tor should place foundation concrete and backfill excavations as soon as possible to protect
the bearing surface.
E. Apply supplemental moisture to overly dry soils, but not to the extent that would cause runoff,
puddling, or erosion.
F. Do not operate heavy equipment near excavations where trench wall or slope failure may re-
sult.
3.5 SITE GRADING
A. Required contours and elevations are shown on the Drawings; if indicated information con-
flicts with actual conditions, notify Owner's Representative and obtain direction before pro-
ceeding with grading of area in conflict.
B. In areas to be graded, remove trees as indicated in plans, brush, and other deleterious mate-
rial.
C. Provide subgrades required for various backfill soils and soil amendments as shown on Plans
and Details.
D. Following clearing, grubbing, stripping, excavations to reach subgrade and prior to placement
of any fill, the exposed subgrade in areas to be occupied by paving, or structures shall be
proof rolled and compacted to a dense, unyielding condition with a loaded dump truck, large
vibrating roller or equivalent. Site clearing, proof rolling and compacting shall be observed by
the Owner's representative to identify soft spots or unsuitable material. Overexcavate per the
Owner's representative recommendations areas that cannot be reworked and/or compacted.
Replace overexcavated material with imported structural fill unless otherwise directed.
E. Unless otherwise approved, scarify soils surfaces to receive compacted fill to a depth of at
least eight (8) inches. Moisture condition scarified soil to obtain moisture to near optimum
moisture content. Compact scarified soils to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this
section.
F. Place fill in controlled layers in thicknesses that are compatible with the type of equipment be-
ing used. Do not exceed a loose thickness of eight(8) inches for each fill layer. Compact
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-9
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 10 of 12
each layer to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this Section. Determine the field
density of the compacted soils by the ASTM D2922 and D3017 test method.
G. All areas to receive compacted fill shall be field reviewed and tested by the Owner's repre-
sentative prior to the placement of new fill.
H. Fill soils shall be granular and shall meet the specifications graduation requirements. The
testing agency shall evaluate and/or test material for its conformance with specification prior
to delivery to site. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative 72 hours (three
working days) prior to importing fill to the site.
I. The Owner's representative shall observe the placement of compacted fills and conduct in
place field density tests on the compacted material to check for adequate moisture content
and required relative compaction. Where less than required relative compaction or inade-
quate moisture is indicated, remove and replace the substandard fill or apply additional com-
pactive effort and moisture conditioning as necessary until relative compaction, as specified
in this section, is achieved. Additional testing (re-testing) is at the Contractor's own expense.
J. The Contractor shall grade the site and control drainage at all times to prevent water from
ponding in construction areas and/or flowing into excavations. Exposed grades shall be
crowned, sloped, and smooth drum-rolled at the end of each day to facilitate drainage. Ac-
cumulated water must be removed from subgrades and work areas immediately prior to per-
forming further work in the area. Soil deemed unfit due to Contractor's inattention to drainage
or lack of soil protection shall be replaced with imported structural fill at the Contractor's own
expense.
K. The Contractor shall be prepared to intercept any ground water seepage entering the excava-
tions and route it to a suitable discharge location.
L. Slope prepared surfaces to have positive drainage and direct flows to TESC facilities.
3.6 SLOPES
A. The Contractor is responsible for the stability and safety of all temporary slopes.
3.7 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade preparation and protection shall be per Section 2-06 of WSDOT, except Contractor
shall perform all staking.
3.8 EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT AND BACKFILLING
A. General:
1. Exercise sound engineering and construction practices for excavations and trenches.
Maintain trenches such that no damage will occur to any foundation, structure, pole, utility
or other facility due to sloughs or any other cause. If as a result of trenching operation,
there is disturbance of the ground which may endanger or damage other property and
require repair, the Contractor shall take remedial action at no additional expense to the
Owner.
2. Provide dewatering, shoring and other types of stabilization, in addition to shoring required
for Safety by State codes to maintain the integrity of the trench or excavation and protect
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-10
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 11 of 12
adjacent utilities or structures. All earthwork shall conform to the Washington
Administrative Code (WAC)296-155 requirements for excavation, trenching and Shoring.
B. Excavation Material
1. Common Excavation: The naturally occurring sand, gravel, clays, or mixtures of the above,
required to be moved for the construction of roadways and for the establishment of
proposed site grades. Common excavation material shall be moved with the use of
mechanical equipment, such as shovels, loaders, bulldozers, graders, rippers, etc., but
shall not require drilling and blasting or drilling and line breaking. Excavation by sluicing
method will not be permitted.
2. Unsuitable Excavation: Shall consist of unstable materials, such as topsoil, peat, muck,
water-impregnated clays, yielding or wet soils, swampy or other undesirable materials,
including buried logs, stumps, abandoned utility and product delivery lines, or trash.
Excavated material shall be replaced with Structural Fill.
a. Unsuitable materials beneath structures, roadways, or embankments shall be
removed to the depth designated by the Owner's Representative, and backfilled
with Structural Fill.
C. Structural Fill:
1. Embankments shall be constructed in accordance with WSDOT Section 2-03 and City of
Renton Standards.
2. Placement of structural fill shall be in accordance with WSDOT 2-03.3(14)C, Method C.
D. Moisture Conditioning and Temporary Stockpiling:
1. Where the Contractor excavates material which is over the allowable range of moisture
content for placement as fill, the Contractor shall condition the material, before considering
for re-use, to allow placement as common fill. Excavated material considered for reuse
must be evaluated by the Owner's representative prior to using as common fill.
2. The Contractor shall stockpile excavated material when no fill material is required at the
time of excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing the stockpiled
material from becoming saturated beyond the critical moisture limits for fill placement.
3. Stockpiled selected material, which becomes saturated beyond allowable limits for
placement as fill, shall be removed and disposed of and replaced with Gravel Borrow or
Structural fill, as appropriate for the intended use and weather conditions during installation
at the expense of the Contractor.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF EARTH MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall remove all excavated material that is not acceptable for use as fill on site.
Legally dispose of excess material off site, at Contractor's expense.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of densi-
ty specified for area classification. In landscape areas, do not allow equipment traffic to overly
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-11
Sign Shop Expansion 31 12 00
City of Renton EARTHWORK
Page 12 of 12
compact areas beyond specified percentages. Remediate over-compaction as directed by the
Engineer including ripping, re-grading and re-compaction or over-excavation and in-kind re-
placement per plan.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the percent-
ages below for maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density rela-
tionship determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.
C. Compaction:
1. Compact all fill and backfill to prevent subsequent settlement.
2. Water settling orjetting will not be permitted as a means of compaction.
3. Furnish heavy rollers or compactors except as follows:
a. Use pneumatic hand tampers for trenches and areas not accessible to heavy equip-
ment.
b. Compact areas within 3-feet of footings, foundations and walls with hand equipment.
4. The Contractor shall compact fill and backfill to the following minimum relative compaction
(percentage of maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557).
Locations Required Minimum Rela-
tive Com action
Under Slabs on Grade and Foundations 95%
Under Walks and Pedestrian Pavin 95%
Structural fill 95%
Parkin , fire lanes, and vehicular drive lanes 95%
D. Moisture Control:
1. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
content. Compact each layer to required percentages of maximum dry density or relative
dry density for each area classification.
2. Do not perform compaction operations on excessively wetted soils.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND/OR WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove from the Owner's property, all waste materials, including unacceptable excavated
material as determined by the Owner's representative, trash and debris, and dispose of it off
site in a legal and timely manner. Provide dump receipts from an approved dump site if di-
rected.
O LPD Engineering, PLLC 2018
August 1, 2018 31 21 00-12
Sign Shop Expansion 31 41 33
City of Renton TRENCH SAFETY
Page 1 of 1
DOCUMENT 31 4133 TRENCH SAFETY
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies requirements for the safety systems to be used in all excavation activi-
ties, including but not limited to storm, sewer, water and electrical trench and structure exca-
vation, and excavation for grading.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not lim-
ited to the following:
1. Section 31 10 00—Site Preparation
2. Section 31 12 00— Earthwork
1.3 REFERENCES
A. R.C.W. Chapter 49.17 WISHA.
B. WAC 296-155 Safety Standards for Construction Work.
C. WAC 296-155-660.
D. R.C.W. Chapter 39.04.180 Public Works/Trench Excavations- Safety Systems Required.
PART 2— PRODUCTS --NOT USED
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS
A. Protect all excavation in excess of four-feet in depth with a safety system conforming to the
referenced requirements.
B. The Contractor's excavation safety system shall be designed by a qualified person and meet
the referenced requirements.
C. All excavation not requiring trench safety systems shall also meet the WISHA safety stand-
ards and the requirements of Section 31 12 00, Earthwork.
O LPD Engineering, PLLC 2018
August 1,2018 31 41 33-1
Sign Shop Expansion 32 12 16
City of Renton ASPHALT PAVING
Page 1 of 5
DOCUMENT 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This work consists of the installation of crushed surfacing base course, top course and as-
phalt paving placed on a prepared subgrade in accordance with these Specifications and in
close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross-sections shown in the
plans.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Coordinate related requirements specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but
not limited to the following:
1. Section 01 56 00—TESC
2. Section 31 12 00— Earthwork
3. Section 32 13 13—Concrete Paving
1.3 REFERENCES
A. APAW- Designs and Specifications for Asphalt Concrete Pavements and Bases, 1990 Edi-
tion.
B. ANSI/ASTM C136— Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
C. ANSI/ASTM D1557—Test Methods for Moisture— Density Relations of soils and
soil/aggregate mixtures using 10 Ib. rammer and 18-inch drop.
D. ASTM D2950—Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nucle-
ar Methods.
E. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)Current Edition.
F. WSDOT-Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edi-
tion; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition.
1.4 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS
A. Furnish, set and mark all line location stakes. Assign a qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or
technical specialist to do this work; this person shall be on site at all times when work requir-
ing control is being performed. Furnish and maintain on site necessary equipment, supplies
and instruments related thereto. Make this equipment and personnel available, at no addi-
tional cost to the Owner, for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of
work on the site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01 34 00.
August 1, 2018 32 12 16-1
Sign Shop Expansion 32 12 16
City of Renton ASPHALT PAVING
Page 2 of 5
B. Submit HMA mix design and material supplier certification.
1.6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements, in accordance with referenced Standard Specifications and the
following:
1. Do not proceed with placement when subgrade or base is saturated, pumping, or frozen.
2. Apply asphalt concrete surface only when atmospheric temperature is more than 45-deg
F., when underlying base is dry and when weather is not rainy or damp. Aggregate base
course material may be applied when air temperature is greater than 30 degrees F. and
rising if approved by Owner's Representative.
3. Do not apply tack coats when temperature is below 50 degrees F. or when base is wet.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Producer/Installer: Provide materials produced by bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly
engaged in the production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete. Installer must be experienced
in the installation of Asphaltic concrete paving with adequate plant, equipment, and personnel
for the completion of the work.
B. Provide materials meeting or exceeding requirements specified herein.
C. Allowable Tolerances: Surface Smoothness shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 5-
04.3(13).
D. Testing:
1. Contractor will furnish material testing and inspection for quality control during paving op-
erations. Paving thickness is subject to core tests upon completion. Should average
thickness be less than specified, contractor shall remove and replace areas where defi-
ciencies were found. Patch all core drill holes.
2. Pavement shall be tested for proper thickness and proper drainage as specified in Divi-
sion 1.
3. Any applicable portion of the crushed surfacing work under this specification shall be
tested for the specified compaction by ASTM D1557 procedures as applicable. Failure of
the material to achieve the specified density will be just cause for rejecting any portion of,
or all the material represented by the test. Provide one density test for each 5,000 square
feet of all crushed surfacing courses placed.
4. When stabilizing base course or portion thereof has been placed and compacted in ac-
cordance with requirements, notify the testing laboratory to perform density tests. Do not
place asphalt pavement until results have been verified and base course installation ap-
proved.
5. Test asphalt concrete pavement in-place compaction by the nuclear method, ASTM
D2950. If compaction tests indicate that stabilizing base course or asphalt paving do not
meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at Contractor's
expense.
August 1, 2018 32 12 16-2
Sign Shop Expansion 32 12 16
City of Renton ASPHALT PAVING
Page 3 of 5
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Note that work correction is to include soft spots, pumping, aggregate separation, settlement,
puddling, and/or uneven finish not level with adjacent existing surfaces. Correction may in-
volve removal and replacement of the material if condition is determined to be irreparable, at
the discretion of the Owner's Representative, and at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with Quality Control Section provisions, Specifications, and Manufacturer's data.
Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
1. Conform to APAW-Section I I, "Specifications for Asphalt Paving"of above referenced
manual. Provide bases, type and thickness of asphalt concrete as required by these
Specifications and plans for site paving.
B. Compact subgrade and provide thickness of crushed surfacing as required by these Specifi-
cations and the plans.
C. All materials shall conform to WSDOT Section 9-03.8 and City of Renton requirements.
D. Recycled cement concrete rubble and recycled asphalt may be allowed in accordance with
WSDOT Section 9-03.21(1) and as approved by the Owner's Representative for on-site use.
E. Recycled asphalt may be allowed as aggregate in the production of HMA if it meets the re-
quirements of WSDOT Section 9-03.8(3)B and as approved by the Owner's Representative
for on-site use.
2.2 CRUSHED SURFACING
A. Crushed Surfacing shall be in accordance with Section 31 12 00 and with WSDOT Section 9-
03.9(3).
2.3 APHALT TREATED BASE
A. Asphalt Treated Base shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 4-06.
2.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Asphalt concrete shall be composed of asphalt and aggregate which, with or without the addi-
tion of mineral filler and blending sand as may be required, shall be mixed in the proportions
specified to provide a homogenous, stable and workable mixture.
B. Asphalt concrete shall be HMA Class 'h" conforming to WSDOT Section 9-03.8(6)or an ap-
proved Modified Class B Asphalt.
2.5 TACK COAT
A. Tack coat of asphalt shall have 0.05 to 0.08 gallons of retained asphalt per square yard of
application and be in accordance with WSDOT 5-04.3(5)A.
August 1, 2018 32 12 16-3
Sign Shop Expansion 32 12 16
City of Renton ASPHALT PAVING
Page 4 of 5
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance
of conditions as satisfactory.
1. Construct in conformance with the plans, details, dimensions and grades specified.
2. Confirm that final grades allow for the finished surface to drain freely to an acceptable lo-
cation prior to installation.
B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to prevent damage from work of this Section.
1. Protect work of other trades. Take special care in work adjacent to buildings.
2. Should any damage occur, repair or replace as directed by Owner's Representative.
3.2 CRUSHED SURFACING
A. Prepare subgrades and place crushed rock courses in conformance with WSDOT Section 4-
04.3(4), and as shown in the drawings.
3.3 ASPHALT TREATED BASE (ATB)
A. Preparation of surfaces and placement of ATB.
1. Prepare subsurface for placement of ATB in conformance with WSDOT Section 4-06 and
as shown in the project Documents. Thickness of ATB lift and gravel base shall be per fi-
nal paving section for the area of placement as shown in the project Documents.
2. Prepare subgrade below temporary ATB by compacting to 95% modified Proctor.
3.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. Prepare surfaces to receive final paving in accordance with WSDOT Section 5-04.3(5).
B. Preparation of aggregates, mixing, hauling, spreading, finishing and compaction shall be as
specified for HMA in WSDOT Section 5-04.3.
C. Joints and Connections with Existing Facilities shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section
5-04.3(12).
D. Sampling and testing of asphalt concrete shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 5-
04.3(8)A non-statistical.
E. The grade tolerance of the compacted first lift of track asphalt shall be +1/4" and -0". The as-
phalt concrete base shall not deviate from the true surface in excess of 1/4" on a 10'straight
edge in all directions.
F. All edges to be straight or a continuous smooth line tapered at a 45 degree angle where free-
standing or adjacent to soil area. No reverse slopes or birdbaths will be allowed. The com-
August 1, 2018 32 12 16-4
Sign Shop Expansion 32 12 16
City of Renton ASPHALT PAVING
Page 5 of 5
plete surface of the asphalt shall be of uniform texture, smooth uniform as to grade, and free
from defects of all kinds. Verify elevation requirements prior to commencing paving.
G. Asphalt areas that cannot be machine rolled must be hand rolled or tamped to provide a
smooth and uniform surface in conformance with the tolerances listed above.
3.5 TACK COAT
A. Tack coat shall be applied per WSDOT Section 5-04.3(5)A.
3.6 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove and replace defective work not conforming to the plans and specifications to speci-
fied tolerances at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Remove and replace, as directed, any crushed surfacing that shows soft spots, pumping, set-
tlement, puddling, and/or uneven finish not level with adjacent existing surfaces, at no addi-
tional cost to the Owner.
C. Remove and replace any pavement that shows cracks, ponds or puddles, bulges, spalling of
aggregate at the surface, has non-uniform edges where not adjacent to curbs, which does
not freely drain or exhibits other defects, at the Contractor's own expense.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After placement of crushed surfacing, clean adjacent surfaces outside the limits of the exist-
ing crushed surfacing of excess or spilled materials, to allow for landscape restoration.
B. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphaltic materials.
C. Do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic paving until it has cooled and hardened, and in no
case sooner than six(6) hours after placing.
D. Provide barricades and warning devices to prevent traffic on asphalt paving and to alert pe-
destrians to the surface condition.
O LPD Engineering, PLLC 2018
August 1, 2018 32 12 16-5
Sign Shop Expansion 32 13 13
City of Renton CONCRETE PAVING
Page 1 of 5
DOCUMENT 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 —GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Provide extruded curb as shown on the project documents.
2. Provide and install site work concrete as shown on the project documents.
B. Work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal
Construction, current edition, Washington State Department of Transportation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not lim-
ited to the following:
1. Section 311000—Site Preparation
2. Section 311200—Earthwork
1.3 REFERENCES
A. WSDOT-Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edi-
tion, Washington State Department of Transportation.
B. American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings
2. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting
3. ACI 306R- Cold Weather Concreting
4. ACI 316R- Recommendations for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Bases
C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
D. WSDOT-Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edi-
tion; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 013400.
B. Submit product data and manufacturer's instructions for:
August 1, 2018 32 13 13-1
Sign Shop Expansion 32 13 13
City of Renton CONCRETE PAVING
Page 2 of 5
1. Concrete mix design for all surfaces, noting where mix designs to be used throughout site.
2. Admixtures
3. Joint Sealants
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Provide wood or steel edge forms. Wood forms shall be Douglas fir or larch, number two
grade minimum, seasoned SAS, straight and true.
B. Special Edge forms for radii shall be approved in advance by Owner's Representative. Rigid
steel forms shall not be used on curved edges.
2.2 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND SIDEWALKS
A. Materials for cement concrete pavement and sidewalks shall conform to WSDOT Section 8-
14.
B. Curing Materials shall be impervious sheeting: ASTM C 171, 10 mils.
2.3 CEMENT CONCRETE CURB
A. Materials for cement concrete curb shall conform to WSDOT Section 8-04.
2.4 BASE COURSE
A. Base course shall be in accordance with the 31 2200.
2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joint material shall be pre-molded saturated felt 3/16"thick extending full width and
depth of joint.
B. Expansion joints shall be placed to align with scoring pattern.
C. Expansion joints in the ROW shall conform to City of Shoreline Standards.
2.6 JOINT SEALANT
A. Joint sealant shall conform to WSDOT Section 9-04.2(2).
PART 3—EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes Contractor's acceptance
of conditions as satisfactory.
August 1, 2018 32 13 13-2
Sign Shop Expansion 32 13 13
City of Renton CONCRETE PAVING
Page 3 of 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions and shapes. Allow for transitions to existing
grades where shown on Plans.
B. Subgrade:
1. Preparation of subgrade shall conform to WSDOT Section 2-06.
2. Verify compaction of subgrade for on-grade work.
3.3 SETTING FORMS
A. Base Support:
1. Compact the base material under the forms true to grade so that, when set, they will be
uniformly supported for their entire length at the grade as shown.
2. Correct imperfections or variations in the base material grade by cutting or filling and
compacting.
B. Form Setting:
1. Set forms sufficiently in advance of the placing of the concrete to permit the performance
and approval of all operations required with and adjacent to the form lines.
2. Set forms to true line and grade and use stakes, clamps, spreaders, and braces to hold
them rigidly in place so that the forms and joints are free from play or movement in any
direction.
3. Forms shall conform to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm)when
checked with a straightedge and shall not deviate from true line by more than 1/4 inch (6
mm)at any point.
4. Do not remove forms until removal will not result in damaged concrete or at such time to
facilitate finishing.
5. Clean and oil forms each time they are used.
6. Make necessary corrections to forms immediately before placing concrete.
7. When any form has been disturbed or any subgrade or subbase has become unstable,
reset and recheck the form before placing concrete.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Curbs:
1. Extruded curb shall be installed in accordance with contract documents and WSDOT
Section 8-04. Expansion joints shall be provided at 10 foot maximum spacing. The work
shall be performed in a manner which results in a curb constructed to specified line and
grade, uniform in appearance and structurally sound. Curbs found with unsightly bulges,
August 1, 2018 32 13 13-3
Sign Shop Expansion 32 13 13
City of Renton CONCRETE PAVING
Page 4 of 5
ridges or other defects shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense if
Owner's Representative considers them to be irreparable.
B. Walkways
1. Cement concrete sidewalks shall be installed as shown on plans and in accordance with
WSDOT Section 8-14.
2. Expansion joints shall be provided as shown on Plans. Where not shown provide at 10-foot
maximum spacing. When checked with a 10-foot straightedge, grade shall not deviate
more than 1/8 inch, and alignment shall not vary more than 1/4 inch.
3. Broom finish and cure rigid pavement in accordance with WSDOT Section 5-05.
C. Curing and Protection
1. Protect concrete adequately from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost,
mechanical injury, tire marks and oil stains, and do not allow it to dry out from the time it is
placed until the expiration of the minimum curing periods specified herein. Use impervious-
sheeting curing. Membrane-forming compound is not allowed. Maintain temperature of air
next to concrete above 40 degrees F for the full curing periods.
2. Impervious-Sheeting Curing: Wet entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine spray of
water and then cover with impervious sheeting. Lay sheets directly on concrete surface
and overlap 12 inches. Make sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than concrete surface
to be cured, and weight down on the edges and over the transverse laps to form closed
joints. Repair or replace sheets when torn or otherwise damaged during curing. Leave
sheeting on concrete surface to be cured for at least 7 days.
3.5 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Control joints or tooled score joints intervals shall mimic existing patterns. On straight work,
the joints shall be parallel with and at right angles to the line of the work. The markings shall
be made with jointer tools that will round the edges of the scoring line to the radius of 1/2",
with a depth of not less than 1/2". The finishing joint opening shall not be wider than 1/8".
Provide straight, smooth 1-1/2" troweled finish on both sides of the control joints.
3.6 FINISH
A. Float and Trowel: Match existing finish or provide "broom finish" by lightly combing straight
lines with a medium stiff broom as directed by Owner's representative. Broom pattern to be
perpendicular to main pedestrian traffic route.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cement concrete proportioning shall meet the requirement of WSDOT Section 5-05.
B. The contractor shall protect the concrete against all damage prior to final acceptance. Re-
move concrete containing excessive cracking, fractures, spalling, or other defects and recon-
struct the entire section between regularly scheduled joints at no additional cost to the Own-
er.
August 1, 2018 32 13 13-4
Sign Shop Expansion 32 13 13
City of Renton CONCRETE PAVING
Page 5 of 5
3.8 DEFFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove and replace defective work not conforming to plan and specifications specified toler-
ances at the Contractor own expense.
B. Remove and replace any pavement that shows cracks, ponds or puddles, bulges, which does
not freely drain or exhibits other defects at the Contractor own expense.
3.9 CLEANING
A. After completion of the curing period:
1. Remove the curing material.
2. Sweep the concrete clean.
3. After removal of all foreign matter from the joints, seal joints as specified.
4. Clean the entire concrete of all debris and construction equipment as soon as curing and
sealing of joints has been completed.
B. Leave premises clean and free of residue from work of this Section.
O LPD Engineering, PLLC 2018
August 1, 2018 32 13 13-5